Bromma Group Manual

BGS
BGS Manual
Manual
BROMMA GROUP STANDARD MANUAL

Spreader type: STS 45 Serial No: 12249

Customer: ZPMC

Enduser: PPC

0-1- Feb 03 Rev. 01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

1. How to read this Manual

Introduction
Warnings
Safety Precautions

2. Description of the Bromma Group Spreader

Function
Modular system
Options and Accessories

3. Technical information
Data Sheet
Accessories included
Declaration of conformity (For Europe regional only)
General Assembly Drawing

4. Start-up procedures

5. Handling instructions

6. Maintenance
6.1 Periodic maintenance procedures
Lubrication instructions
Tightening torques

6.2 Hydraulic system

6.3 Electrical system and control system
6.4 Repair and adjustments (REP)
6.5 Fault finding (RAP)

7. Spare Parts
7.1 How to order spare parts
7.2 How to return parts
7.3 Spare parts list
7.4 Additional drawings för special components

8. Accessories

9. Service Notes, Feedback

10. Index

Bromma Conquip 0-2- Feb 03 Rev. 01

 Bromma Group Manual

1. How to read this Manual

Introduction
Bromma Conquip has since 1967 been the leading
manufacturer of telescopic container handling spreaders. A large
number of BROMMA spreaders are in service today in ports and
terminals around the world.

A complete range of fixed length and telescopic spreaders are

available, and each one provides high handling efficiency, excellent
reliability, with ease of maintenance and repair.
Note!
This Manual
This manual may contain some infor- This Manual is specified for the spreader delivered and, thus, it is
mation about equipment that has not intended for the operators, service and supply staff.
been installed on your spreader. Chapters 1 thru 5 contain mainly operator information, chapter 6
Before purchasing any spare part, see contains maintenance information and chapter 7 contains spare
Chapter 3 Technical specifications. parts information.
This Chapter specifies all the Chapter 8 describes all the accessories included in this delivery.
equipment that is installed on your
spreader. Ensure also that the serial In Chapter 9 you will find a survey about your experience with
no. of the spreader and the manual is the product and your expectations. It is important for Bromma to
corresponding. receive your opinion in order to develop both the product and the
manual.

Symbols:
Important symbol denotes measures/information that it is
important to follow.

Triangle symbol denotes a situation that requires caution.

Prohibitory symbol denotes measures that you must not take.

Mandatory symbol denotes measures that you must take.

Examples:

Be careful. Hot surface.

Regulation. Remove the main plug.

1-1- April 05 rev. 01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Warnings
READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE
THE SPREADER IS PUT INTO OPERATION.

The manual contains vital information for the safety of

personnel and the correct use of the spreader.

Bromma Group will not accept any liability for the use of the
spreader for any purposes outside what is described in the
manual.

DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the

spreader bar. The Safe Working Load is shown on the
nameplate that is permanently affixed to the side frame of the
spreader.

Safety precautions
The spreader shall be operated and serviced only by
authorized personnel.

The spreader must only be used for the purpose for which it is
designed.

The crane controls must be designed in such a way that no

signals from the crane can be active when the spreader is
about to be connected to the crane. Otherwise hazardous
situations may occur due to unintentional movements.

DO NOT change system settings and functions.

Perform a functional test after any maintenance or repair work.

Stay clear of the spreader when in operation.

Stay clear of all moving parts, such as guide arms (flippers),

moving beams, telescopic chains, etc. A safe distance is 5 meters.

DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while

the power is on.

DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once

adjusted by qualified personnel. See chapter 6.2 Hydraulic
system for proper pressure adjustment.

Bromma Conquip 1-2- April 05 rev. 01

Bromma Group Manual

DO NOT unlock the spreader while a container is suspended in

the air. It could cause personnel injury or property damage.

Maintain adjustment of all electrical and hydraulic components.

Inspect the spreader for damage daily.

Care must be taken when performing any maintenance inside the

spreader frame. It must be carried out under extreme caution and
by personnel familiar with risks related to spreader function and
movements.
Serious injury by crushing can occur.

Contact Bromma Conquip AB before doing any repair work on

the spreader apart from replacing normal wear parts.

DO NOT walk or stand beneath the spreader bar during opera-

tion.

DO NOT attempt to lift a container that is not level (+/- 5°).

DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair

or adjustment. Never put any body extremity beneath the
spreader bar.

NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD.

DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container,

whether laden or empty, by hand or by tagline.

DO NOT stand between a container and any construction that

many prevent your movement to safety. A definite hazard exists
that could cause serious injury or death by being crushed between
the container and an obstruction (such as a building or another
container).

RISK OF CRUSHING. The STS 45 spreader has a risk of

crushing between the movable twin units. (Separating twinlift
spreaders only)

RISK OF INSTABILITY. The STS45 spreader has the ability

to move the center of gravity point of the 20’ containers outwards
possibly causing instability. This can create instability and extra
load on the crane ropes and should be thoroughly checked prior
to operation. This situation is particularly severe when lifting
loaded and empty containers at the same time. Due to the risk of

1-3- April 05 rev. 01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

instability the crane must be equipped with load cells .

(Separating twinlift spreaders only)

Be sure power is maintained to the lock or unlock solenoid

when the spreader is in use.

IF THE SPREADER IS NOT USED AND/OR

MAINTAINED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH
THESE OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS, BROMMA CANNOT GUARANTEE
THE SAFETY OR RELIABILITY OF THIS EQUIPMENT.

Bromma Conquip 1-4- April 05 rev. 01

 Bromma Group Manual

2. Description of the Bromma Group

Spreader
Function
General
The spreader consists of a center main frame and two pairs of
telescopic beams. The outer end of the telescopic beams are
connected together by end beams.
The length of the spreader can be adjusted to fit different size
containers.
The ends of the telescopic beam units are equipped with flipper
arms, used to position the spreader onto the container. The
twistlock system, that locks the spreader to the container , is fitted
in the corners of the end beams. The telescopic drive system,
flipper arms and twistlocks are hydraulically operated. The
hydraulic power pack and the electrical cabinet are mounted on
the main frame.

Flipper Arms
Electrical Cabinet
Main Frame
Power Pack

End Beam

Telescopic
Beam Unit

Twistlocks

2-1-Oct 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
A hydraulic power unit consisting of a reservoir (tank), a
pump/motor unit and filters is mounted on heavy-duty rubber
shock absorbers on the main frame.

The pump is driven by an electric motor.

Pump / motor unit Pressure filter

Oil tank

Rubber shock
absorbers

An (optional) test adapter is built into the system and allows

the pressure, flow and temperature to be measured during
operation.
System pressure is normally 100 bar. (The hydraulic
components used, are designed to work at over 200 bar). directional valves

Electrically operated directional control valves are used to

control the telescopic drive system, twistlock and flipper arms.
The directional solenoid valves can be manually operated in
case of signal failure.

To protect the hydraulic and mechanical components, the

flipper arms are equipped with shock relief valves set at 140 or
200 bar depending on motor type.

The telescoping drive system has a built-in over-center valve

that holds the slide beams in place during operation. To avoid
mechanical damage, the over-center valve has a built- in shock
relief valve, set at 70 bar.

Bromma Conquip 2-2- Oct 02 rev. 00

 Bromma Group Manual

TELESCOPIC SYSTEM
The telescopic beams run on low friction bearing glide plates, one
at each bottom corner of the main frame (total of 4) and on the
top and bottom at the end of each telescopic beam (total of 8).
Sufficient clearance is provided between the glide plates and the
structure to allow the beams to flex, enabling the spreader to
handle slightly distorted containers.

Lifting lugs located in each corner of the spreader make it

possible to attach slings for the handling of damaged containers
or non-containerised cargo. Optional lifting lugs on the outside of
the main beam can also be provided.

Telescopic beam
glide plates

Lifting lugs

Hydraulic motor
with reduction gearbox Main frame
glide plates

A built-in clearance under the main frame enables hatch covers

and slightly overstuffed containers to be handled.

If larger clearances are required, lugs for an over-height can be

Lifting lugs furnished.

The telescopic system is driven by means of a hydraulic motor

and gearbox connected to an endless chain. The counter balance
(over center) valve locks the motor when the directional control
valve is not powered. This holds the spreader in position during
operation.

2-3-Oct 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

The telescoping chain is fitted with stacks of spring washers

that work as shock absorbers where the chain is attached to
the tension rods. The springs allow for changes in the length of
the spreader of up to ±15mm (5/8").
A pulse encoder or a positioning system with proximity
switches (see data sheet chapter 3) controls the length of the
spreader. Both positioning systems make it possible to posi-
tion the twistlocks of the spreader within ± 5 mm of the Tension rod
nominal spacing.

Blocks of
spring washers

Tension rod

Chain

TWISTLOCK
Four twistlocks for a single container spreader are located in Hydraulic cylinder
the corners of the spreader to engage and lift the container.
Switches for
A hydraulic cylinder rotates the twistlock and two sensors
locked/unlocked
indicate the position of the twistlock, Locked or Unlocked. positions
A landing pin safety system is provided to assure that the
spreader is properly landed on the container before rotating
the twistlocks.

A spring loaded landing pin near each twistlock is pushed up

into the twistlock housing when the spreader is landed on the
container. When the spreader is properly landed on a contai-
ner, the landing pin will activate a proximity switch. Only when
Switch for
all the corners of the spreader are landed, can the twistlocks landing pin
be turned. At the same time, the blocking key is moved high
enough so the blocking stop on the twistlock lever arm passes Landing pin
underneath it. If the spreader is not properly landed the Twistlock

Bromma Conquip 2-4- Oct 02 rev. 00

 Bromma Group Manual

proximity switch will not be activated and the blocking key will
get in the way of the blocking stop. This will stop the twistlocks
from turning.

Flipper arm As an option, the twistlock system has a built-in stress and noise
Solenoid valve reductive absorber, the INRS (Impact Noise Reduction System ).

GUIDE ARMS (FLIPPER ARMS)

The spreader is equipped with hydraulically operated flipper
arms located in each corner of the spreader to guide the spreader
onto the container.
The flipper arms are controlled by solenoid valves that can be
manually operated in an emergency.
For protection, each flipper arm circuit has a shock relief valve,
which opens at a pre-set pressure of 40 or 100 bar above the
normal working pressure. As soon as the shock load is removed
the flipper returns to the vertical position.
shock relief valve Yard crane spreaders are normally equipped with fixed or
manually retractable guide arms.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The main electrical cabinet is mounted on heavy duty rubber
shock absorbers and is well protected being placed on, or within
the mainframe. The actual position depends on headblock design.

Junction boxes are also placed on the end beams.

Junction box
Junction box The directional valves for the telescoping, twistlock and flipper
systems are electrically controlled.
Electrical
cabinet
Correct positioning of the telescoping beams is controlled by
proximity switches or an encoder.

The spreader landed and twistlock locked / unlocked positions

are also indicated by proximity switches.

To monitor the system, (optional ) sensors for oil level and

pressure can be built into the hydraulic system.
Signal lamps
In the event of a system fault, signal lamps mounted on the main
frame or in the crane cab control panel can indicate the fault
(optional ).

For the safe operation of the spreader, signal lamps can be

provided to indicate landed / locked / unlocked. These can be
positioned centrally or at each end of the main frame.

2-5-Oct 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Modular system
The Bromma Group Spreader is available in several different
models. Every model can be equipped with a number of
variable accessories. The specific model and accessories
included in this delivery is stated on Datasheet Chapter 3
Technical Information.

Rail Mounted Gantry Spreaders (Yard Crane

YSX40
Spreaders). YSX45
Rail Mouted Gantry spreaders (Y) are equipped with fixed
guide arms and are available in both 40 ft. (YSX 40) and 45
ft. (YSX45) variants.
YTR40
The Twin lift model also exists in both 40 ft. (YTR 40) and 45 YTR45
ft. (YTR 45) lengths.

The 45 ft. Twin lift spreader can also be delivered with

separating inner attachments. (YTS45) YTS45

Ship to Shore Spreaders SSX40

The Ship to Shore spreaders (S) are equipped with flipper SSX45
arms and are also available in both 40 ft. (SSX 40) and 45 ft.
(SSX 45) variants.

The Twin lift models also exists in both 40 ft. (STR 40) and
45 ft. (STR 45) lengths.
STR 40
STR 45
The 45 ft. Twin lift spreader can also be delivered with
separating inner attachments. (STS 45)

STS 45
Separating
inner
attachments

Bromma Conquip 2-6- Oct 02 rev. 00

 Bromma Group Manual

Options
Twistlock
There are three different twistlock types available.

16061 Twistlock assembly floating ISO STD

Delivered as standard

38076 Twistlock assembly floating INRS

23747 Twistlock assembly floating ISO Split collar

Gearbox
Actuator
Gearbox

Actuator Gearbox

Flipper Arms
The Flipper arms can be solid or made of spring steel.

23850 Flipper arm solid with damper (std.)

23849 Flipper arm spring steel with damper
23848 Flipper arm spring steel with damper INRS

Guide Arms
Yard crane spreaders can be equipped with fixed or manually
retractable guide arms.

Power Pack
The Power Pack can be located in 3 different positions

Accessories
Besides options mentioned above, the spreader can be
equipped with several accessories. The accessories for this
delivery are listed in chapter 3.2 and described in chapter 8.

2-7-Oct 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 2-8- Oct 02 rev. 00

Bromma Group Manual instruction

Descripton of the STS45 Twinlift

spreader
Bromma Adjustable Twinlift Spreader STS 45 can move two
twenty feet containers from a spacing of 0 mm to 1600 mm (0’-
5’) under full load while they are suspended under the twistlocks.
The movement is performed by sturdy cylinders connected to the
tension rods and to the twinlift units, well protected inside the
spreader main frame. The movement can be done at anytime in
the crane cycle which means there is no stopping time to change
the container spacing. The movement is mechanically controlled to
be symmetrical.
The STS45 designed for daily use in the demanding environment
that surrounds a port.

The center section is fitted with four retractable floating twistlock

housings for handling two twenty foot containers simultaneously.
Sufficient clearance is provided beneath the spreader structure to
clear hatch covers and stacking frame obstructions.

The containers can be moved as follows:

· both in (towards one another) synchronised
· both out (apart from one another) synchronised

2- 9 - Dec. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual instruction

The Adjustable Twinlift System

The adjustable twinlift system (see Figure ) consist of the:
· Tie assembly
· Telescopic drive system
· Twinlift units Welded rails

Twinlift units

Twinlift units

Telescopic drive
system

Tie assembly
Main
cylinder
Twinlift unit
The spreader consists of four twinlift units. The units are in Bearing
beam
their lower part attached to the ties.
The twinlift unit slides along welded rails on the spreader main Ties
frame.

Tie assembly
The tie assembly (see Figure ) consists of the:
· two ties
· two main cylinders
· three bearing beams Main
cylinder
The short end of the tie is connected to the cylinder.
The bearing beams supports the tie assembly, tension rods and
main cylinders.
Bearing
The mid part ends of the ties are connected to the twinlift beam
units. When running the cyliders in or out the movement is
transferred to the twinlift units.

Bromma Conquip 2-10 - Dec. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual instruction

Telescopic drive system

Latch The telescopic drive system (see Figure ) consists of the:
cylinder
· two tension rods
Latch
· two latches
Tie
· two latch cylinders
Tension rod The STS45 is equipped with two telescopic systems. One Twin
telescopic mode and one Single telescopic mode.
Twin telescopic mode
Twin box up: Single-telescopic mode
Latch Twin box down: Twin-telescopic mode
cylinder
Latch
Tie

Main cylinder
Tension rod

Tension rod
Single telescopic mode Regular chain

Tie

Latch
Latch cylinder
Latch cylinder Latch

Tie

Main cylinder
Tension rod

Twin-telescopic mode
In Twin-telescopic mode (see Figure). All twin-telescopic
movements are handled by the main cylinders and the ties, as well
as the regular chain telescopic system.

Single-telescopic mode
The regular chain telescopic system is connected in Single-
telescopic mode (see Figure ). The latch is disconnected from
the tie. All single-telescopic movements are handled by the regular
chain telescopic system.

2-11- Dec. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual instruction

Movable twinlift units

Apart from a twin lift spreader, such as the STR and YTR
models, with standard functions for telescoping, twist lock,
flipper, twin boxes and twin twistlock the STS 45 have
movable twinlift units. The movable twinlift units which are held
in pairs by the tie are connected to one tension rod each by
means of a latch operated by a hydraulic cylinder.
The twin telescoping between 40 and 45 foot is now driven by
two cylinders. One for each side driving both the telescopic
beams and the movable twinlift units. So in twin mode, the 20
foot distance between the twistlocks in the end beams and in
the twinlift units, for each side, is fixed as both the tie and the
telescopic beam are connected to the same tension rod.

Cylinder drive
The two cylinders have one main directional control.
Synchronising between the sides is achieved by using a flow
divider. By operating the directional control valves for the
telescoping cylinder the oil from the pump is equally distributed STS45 Directional
Powerpack valves for
to the cylinders.
main
The chain telescopic motor is driven in the same direction as
cylinders
the cylinders.

Latch
A directional control valve placed at the end of each of the two
tension rods operates the latch cylinders.
The valve block has two built in pilot operated check valves
for securing the present position of the latch

Dual pressure system

The hydraulic system in large is a constant pressure system.
The pump has a torque limit adjuster to avoid overloading of
the electrical motor. To reduce noise and building of heat, the
pump has two pressure stages. The lower, 100 bar is for all
normal operation. The higher, 160 bar is for twin telescoping Latch
only. cylinder

Latch

Bromma Conquip 2-12 - Dec. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual instruction

The high pressure is set by the pressure regulator on the pump

itself. The low pressure is set by an external pressure relief valve
which is connected in parallel with the pump regulator via a
directional control valve. By activating the directional control
valve the flow path to the external pressure relief valve is cut and
the pressure is instead given by the pump regulator.

Directional control
valve

Pressure relief
valve for low
pressure

Separate twinlift boxes with a vertical movement that enables

handling of non aligned containers (see figure). In single lift the
parking position for the twinboxes has both a vertical and a
horizontal clearance.
A hydraulic damper combined with the cylinder for raising and
lowering twin units allows fast vertical motion and a down force.

Standard twinlift INRS twinlift

C 110mm 180mm
D 60mm 80mm
E 130mm 130mm

Note:
Z max 15mm when containers
lifted.

2-13- Dec. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual instruction

Sensors

Twin up indicates the parking position when it is safe to lift in

single mode.
If twin down signal is needed it is the inverse of twin up.

Bromma Conquip 2-14 - Dec. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

3. Technical Information
3.1 Data sheet
Spreader type STS 45
Serial No: 12249
General Assy No: 1027815
Container Range 20', 40' & 45'
Dimensions
Weight 12.3 tonnes
Max height transport position 1762 mm
Width 2440 mm
Length when telescoped to minimum 6064 mm
Capacity
Lifting capacity (evenly distributed load) SWL 51 tonnes
Lifting capacity (10% gravity point adjustment) 51 tonnes
Lifting capacity twinlift 2x 25 tonnes
Lifting capacity (lifting lugs main beam) 12.5LT tonnes
Lifting capacity (lifting lugs end beam) 12.5LT tonnes
Other - - tonnes
Operating Movements
Telescoping 20’ to 45 ’ or 45 ’ to 20’ in max. 30 sec.
o
Twistlock rotation locking or unlocking 90 in 1.5 sec.
Flipper operation 180o in 5-7 sec.
Electrical Equipment Electrical wiring
Operating voltage 460 VAC diagram No:
Supply frequency 60 Hz 1027766

Control voltage 120 VAC VDC

Valve voltage 24 VAC VDC
Motor output 7.5 kW
Electrical protection , motor IP66
Control System (See Chapt. 6.3 Electric system) ● SCS2 PLC Relay Other SCS3

Hydraulic Equipment
Working pressure of pump 100/160 bar Hydraulic assy No:
Pump capacity 56 l / min 1027819
Shock valve setting, flipper 200 bar Hydraulic diagram No:
Shock valve setting, telescopic action 110 bar 1027818
Tank capacity 150 l Powerpack No:
Hydraulic oil type ISO VG 48 1027820
Oil in telescopic gearbox 4.5 l
Telescopic gearbox oil type Mobile Gear 360
3-1- Jan 06 Rev. 03 Bromma Conquip
 Bromma Group Manual

Corrosion Protection
Standard Other
Blast cleaning to SA 2 ½ - ISO 8501:1
Interzinc 72 50 µm µm
Intercure 420 70 µm µm
Interfine 629 HS 40 µm µm
Min. coating thickness, total 200 µm µm
Color code RAL2004
Additional Specifications
Ambient temperature range -16 / +40 o
C Atmospheric humidity range 90%
Minimum telescoped position 20 foot 19.6 foot

Guide Arm type:

Flipper arm type: 23849
Special designed flippers. See dwg 1013381 art. no in Chapt. 7.4
Flipper motor type: Char Lynn 500 1005181
Char Lynn 400
Bromma 470 cc
Twistlocks Actuator
Floating ISO std.
Split Collar ISO
Other. See drawing in Chapter 7.4 Additional drawings.

INRS
Lamp assy dwg No: art. No Included in Chapter 7.3
See separate list.
Lamp assy 2 dwg No: art. No Included in Chapter 7.3
See separate list.
Positioning system:
Position sensors
Digital encoder
Additional documents:

Remarks:

Bromma Conquip 3-2- Jan 06 Rev. 03

 Bromma Group Manual

3.2 Accessories included

The list below shows all the available accessories. The ones
marked are included in this delivery and described in chapter 8.
Article Remark Art. No
Breaher bag (Pronal bag) In hydraulic oil tank
Corner rollers Not with INRS 47482
Guide Arm up / down indicator
Hand Pump 46560
Hand Pump connection GE/TWIN 48195
✔
High temp. Indicator /shut off In hydraulic oil tank 76920
✔ HIS (Height Indication System)
Hooks with spring loaded lock
✔ Hour Counter
✔ Indicator lamps See Chapter 7 Main Frame
Landing pin bypass
✔ Low level indicator / shut off In hydraulic oil tank 76920
Low pressure Indicator / shut off 700176
✔ Motor heater In electrical motor 71377 +73715
Service Panel (Control Panel) Pulpit on wheel, no PLC
Service Panel (Control Panel) Pulpit on wheel, with PLC
Service Panel (Hand unit)
Space heater (In electrical cab.) 73556
✔ TTDS Twin Twenty detection system
✔ Twistlock Counter
Twistlock Split Collar Replaces std. Twistlocks 61693, 23747

Additional
accessories:

3.3 Design Calculations

The spreader structure is designed according to DIN 15018 and to the following loading group and
hoisting class which represents a container handling crane.
H2B4
Lifting Cases: The following lifting cases are considered:
● 1. Most frequent lifting case ● The impact and duty factors have been chosen
A symmetrically loaded container of 51 tonne. according to recommendations of:
The permissible stress is determined by analysis
of direct loading and fatigue conditions. The following load combinations have been
Depending on intensity of use the structure is considered:
suitable for: 2 x 106 lifting cycles. LOAD CASE 1
2. Exceptional lifting cases LOAD LOAD COMBINATIONS
Permissible stresses is determined by analysis of Container Crane in use Fatigue check
direct loading only. in use without wind with in
Container weight (ton) 41 41 41
a) A container of 51 tonne weight but loaded Load eccentricity 41
unsymmetrically by 10 % in the longitudinal longitudinally (m) 0 1,22 m 0
direction. LOAD CASE 2 A transversely (m) 0 0,2 m 0
b) A container of 51 tonne weight but loaded Wind speed (m/s) 0 20 0
Pitch angle (°) 5 5 5
unsymmetrically by 10 % Roll angle (°) 0 5 0
in both the longitudinal and lateral direction. State of loading - - Q2
LOAD CASE 2 B Class of utilisation - - U7
Group classification - - A7
● 3. Twinlift position
Mechanical class - - M7
Symmetrically load from two 20´ containers of
25 tonne each.

3-3- Jan 06 Rev. 03 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

3.4 Declaration of conformity

CD
For digital manual:
The declaration of conformity is signed with a digital Serial No.
Spreader type

signature and delivered as a separate file on the cd.

Language
Manual Spreader Manual

For printed manual: 2

SCS Manual
When printing hard copies of the manual, replace this page (If valid)

with a printed copy of the Declaration of conformity file. Drawings, spareparts etc.
(If not enclosed in Spreader
Manual).

Documents Declaration of conformity

(If valid)

Load test certificates

(If valid)

Twistlock certificates
Manuels électroniques : (If valid)

La déclaration de conformité est signée numériquement et

figure sur le CD sous la forme d'un fichier séparé.
Manuels imprimés :
Lorsque vous imprimez le présent manuel, remplacez cette
page par une copie papier du fichier de Déclaration de
conformité.

Para manual digital:

La Declaración de conformidad se firma con una firma digital y
se entrega en un archivo separado dentro del cd.
Para manual impreso:
Al imprimir este manual, sustituir esta página por una copia
impresa de la Declaración de conformidad.

Für digitale Handbücher:

Die Konformitätserklärung wird mit einer digitalen Unterschrift
versehen und ist als separate Datei auf der CD zu finden.
Für ausgedruckte Handbücher:
Wenn Sie das Handbuch ausdrucken, ersetzen Sie diese Seite
mit der gedruckten Datei der Konformitätserklärung.

3-4- Jan 06 Rev. 03 Bromma

Conquip
 mpchan
General Assembly, 1027815 rev. - 12/29/09

F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2

1027815 - General Assembly GENERAL ASSEMBLY ZPMC/PPC 12249
1 1.0 1027816 - Frame FRAME ZPMC/PPC 12249
WITH OPENING HOLE AND
2 2.0 1014501 - Telescopic Beam Unit TELESCOPIC BEAM UNIT FLIPPER MOTOR PROTECTION
COVER
3 1.0 38094 e Welded Component TENSION ROD COMPLETE TYPE 1
4 1.0 38095 d Welded Component TENSION ROD COMPLETE TYPE 2
5 1.0 35635 d Mounting Assy PEDESTAL BEARING -
6 1.0 61730 c Part STANDARD COMPONENTS STD 19,6'
7 2.0 1002949 a Twistlock Assy TWISTLOCK ASSYEMBLY ISO, SOFT SPRING, LEFT
8 2.0 1002950 a Twistlock Assy TWISTLOCK ASSYEMBLY ISO, SOFT SPRING, RIGHT
9 2.0 1017328 - Part CABLE CHAIN ASSY -
10 2.0 1010847 a Part TWIN UNIT ASSY, LEFT STD, SOFT SPRING
11 2.0 1010848 a Part TWIN UNIT ASSY, RIGHT STD, SOFT SPRING
12 1.0 15807 d Part TIE ASSEMBLY -
13 1.0 16473 c Part TELESCOPIC DRIVE SYSTEM
14 1.0 39663 b Part TIE CYLINDER KIT TWIN SHIFT
15 2.0 1006805 - Flipper Arm Assy FLIPPER ASSY, TYPE 1 SPRING STEEL, SPLINES
16 2.0 1006806 - Flipper Arm Assy FLIPPER ASSY, TYPE 2 SPRING STEEL, SPLINES
17 1.0 1027819 - Hydraulic System HYDRAULIC ASSEMBLY ZPMC/PPC 12249
18 1.0 1027766 - Electrical System ZPMC PPC Cristobal SN 12249
19 4.0 46679 d Part MOUNTING ELECTRICAL CABINET
20 1.0 48523 a Part ROOF ASSY. -
21 1.0 1027817 - Decoration DECORATION ZPMC/PPC 12249
22 1.0 1001097 b Part SCS2-ATTACHMENT ASSY HOLES FOR LED-PANEL
23 2.0 1002062 a Part CAN OPEN TBU ATT. ASSY
24 1.0 62667 b Label TWIN STANDARD CABLE & ITEM MARKING
25 1.0 23987 a Part TTDS BOX ASSY SEPARATING TWIN
26 1.0 1002064 a Part SCS2 MOUNTING DETAILS CLAMPS
DIGITAL ENCODER
27 1.0 1005342 b Mounting Assy ASSY
ATTACHMENT
28 1.0 1005984 - Part MOUNTING EL. PLUG ZREP-24-352PN
29 4.0 402002 a Part SENSOR BRACKET (FLIPPER UP)
30 1.0 1006579 - Ladder LADDER ASSEMBLY -
31 1.0 1002701 c Part BUTTON BOX ATT. ASSY
32 7.0 1002063 c Welded Component CAN OPEN ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
33 2.0 23804 d Part HIS ASSEMBLY DETAILS

Page - 1
 mpchan
General Assembly, 1027815 rev. - 12/29/09

F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2

34 3.0 1001444 - Mounting Assy LED-PANEL MOUNT. DET. -

Page - 2
Bromma Group Manual

0-1-may 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

4. Start-up procedures
1. Before connection to any container crane, place the main
frame of the spreader on trestles or similar devices in such a
way that the flipper arms can be lowered.
0.7m

2. Inspect the spreader for visible damage.

3. Check the hydraulic oil level. (sight glass on hydraulic tank).

4. With the connector from the crane disconnected, switch on the

power and confirm the high voltage power is wired to the
pins as indicated on the electrical schematic diagram.

Motor rotation 5. If a service panel (optional) is delivered with the spreader, or is

mark
available from previous shipments, connect it to the electrical
cabinet and continue with the items below. If no service panel is
available, all functions must be carried out from the crane
cabin. With the power off, connect the control supply to the
spreader by attaching the plug from the headblock to the
receptacle on the spreader.

6. Turn the power on in the crane cab, and jog the motor starter
observing the direction of motor rotation which should be
counterclockwise facing the shaft end of the electric motor.
The rotation is marked with an arrow on the motor housing. If
the motor shaft is rotating in the opposite direction, turn the
power off and swap two of the three motor lead wires in the
main electrical box on the spreader.

To change direction of rotation ,

swap two phases in electrical
cabinet

7. Test all functions of the spreader using the switches on the

crane cab panel.(Service panel).
(a) Operate the appropriate switch to move the spreader to
the different length positions.
Lubricate slide rails and twistlock assemblies.
(b) Check that the flippers work by using the switches on

4-1- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

the crane cab panel.(Service panel) M6 screw

8. To run the twistlock test, all four landing pins on a single

container spreader or all eight landing pins in twin mode
must be forced to the upper position. Otherwise they will
block the twistlock rotation both mehcanically and
electrically. On twin lift twistlocks, insert a screwdriver
through the hole at the front and push down on the
handle. The landing pin should move up. Place a M6
screw under the blocking key to hold the landing pin.

Use a claw wrench (pry bar) to raise the outer twistlock

landing pins on the end beams.
Place the claw wrench under the blocking piece and Cylinder
pull it upwards. With the free hand place the head of a
M10 screw under the blocking key. Remove the claw
wrench (pry bar).

When the twistlock testing procedure is completed, do

not forget to remove the M6 and M10 screws from the
twistlock housings.

Claw Blocking
9. Check that the pump operating pressure is set according wrench piece
to the hydraulic schematic. Attach the pressure gauge and
adjust the pump if necessary. (Also check the flow from
the pump at no load with a flow meter). Optional.

10. Check that the twistlock pressure is adjusted according

to the hydraulic schematic. (For reduced twistlock
pressure only).

11. Check hydraulic assembly to ensure there are no oil

leaks.
Head of M10
screw
12. Note that the solenoid valves operating flippers, center
twistlock housings, telescopic motor, and twistlocks can
be manually operated if required. This is achieved by
pushing the end of the solenoid with a small screwdriver.
As the power to the solenoid may be on, the electrical
plug connection must be disconnected first.

Bromma Conquip 4-2- Oct. 02 rev.00

Bromma Group Manual

13. Service and lubrication should be carried out according to

the description in Chapter 6.1, Lubrication instruction.

14. If the service panel has been used during the items above,
disconnect it and with power off, connect the control supply
to spreader by attaching the plug from the headblock to the
receptacle on the spreader.
Ensure that the motor rotation direction is still correct.

15. Make a note in Chapter 9 (Service Notes) about the results

of the start up procedure. If any problems were encountered
please note them and contact Bromma.

4-3- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 4-4- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

5. Handling instructions
5.1 Warnings
When placing a serviced spreader back into operation always
TEST test the spreader functions before lifting loaded containers.
(The twistlock function test can be carried out on an empty
container).

Do not carry out work with the spreader if the current wind
speed is more than 20 m/s (45mph)

When discharging cargo attached with cones always check

that no cones get caught on lifted containers. If that occurs
report immediately to the personnel on deck.

Moored ships taking in cargo can move fore and aft , when
the ship´s center of gravity point moves.

When returning to single lift operation ensure that the center

twistlock housings are in the upper position.*

DO NOT exceed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the

spreader bar. The Safe Working Load is shown on the
nameplate that is permanently affixed to the side frame of the
spreader.

DO NOT walk or stand beneath the spreader bar during

operation.

DO NOT attempt to lift a container that is not level (+/- 5°).

NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD.

DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container,

whether laden or empty, by hand or by tagline.

DO NOT stand between a container and any construction that

many prevent your movement to safety. A definite hazard
exists that could cause serious injury or death by being crushed
between the container and an obstruction ( such as a building
or another container).

* only separarting twinlift spreaders

5-1- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

RISK OF CRUSHING. The STS45 has a risk of crushing

between the movable twin units. **

RISK OF INSTABILITY. The STS45 has the ability to move

the gravity point of the 20’ containers outwards possibly
causing instability. This can create instability and extra load on
the crane ropes and should be thoroughly checked prior to
operation. This situation is particularly severe when lifting
loaded and empty containers at the same time. Due to the risk
of instability the crane must be equipped with load cells.**

DO NOT use the spreader bar for a use that it was not
intended or designed for.

STAY CLEAR of the spreader when in operation.

DO NOT attempt to cycle the lock/unlock mechanism of the

twistlocks while a container is suspended from the spreader.

5.2 Crane Controls

Crane controls can be different depending on the crane
manufacturer and /or crane model. The main spreader
functions are:
- lock/unlock twistlocks
- flipper arms up /down
- Spreader to 20´, 40´ or 45´* position
The twin lift spreaders also have the following functions:
-Center twistlock housings up/down
- Expand/retract center twistlock housings**

5.3 Signal lamps ***

The spreaders can be equipped with signal lamps to indicate
functions such as:
-Spreader landed on container (landing pins up) -Clear
-Twistlocks open -Green
-Twistlocks closed -Red
(Other colours can be used as an option) The left side signal
lamps indicate functions for the two left side twistlocks and the
right side lamps for the two right side twistlocks. In twin lift
spreaders, when using the twin lift function, the left side signal
lamps are valid for the left side container and the right side
lamps are for the right side container.
As an option the signal lamps can be placed in the crane cabin.

* only 45 foot spreaders

**only separating twin lift spreaders
*** option in yard crane spreaders

Bromma Conquip 5-2- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Black
Water side
White
5.3 Flipper Arms
Green The flipper arms can be operated up or down all together. They
Red
can also be operated in pairs as land side/ water side (std) or left
side/right side (optional) .This gives a lot of possibilities in different
lifting situations.
The flipper arms can also be colour coded (optional) to make the
Land side radio communication with personnel on deck easier.

5.4 Hints
Adjust the crane so that one (left or right) side is a bit lower. This
gives the possibility to land one end of the container and
then correct the angle of the container before landing the other
end.

Stabilize swinging cargo by careful leaning against fixed containers

on deck. Demands special caution.

Use the shadow of the container to estimate remaining height to

deck or ground. (Only applicable in sunshine or in electric light).

5-3- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 5-4- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

6. Maintenance
To ensure safe and reliable spreader operation it is important to
perform regular maintenance procedures.

Warnings
If spreader is not used and/or maintained in strict accordance with
these operating and maintenance instructions, Bromma cannot
guarantee the safety or reliability of this equipment.

DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair

or adjustment. Never put any body extremity beneath the
spreader bar.

Warning for crushing injuries

RISK OF CRUSHING. The STS45 has a risk of crushing

between the movable twin units.

MAINTAIN adjustment for all components.

KEEP CLEAR of all moving parts such as linkage and aligning

arms.

DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while

power is on.

DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once adjusted

by qualified personnel. See hydraulic schematic and this manual
for proper pressure adjustments.

MAINTAIN all electrical and hydraulic components for proper

adjustments.

6.1-1- Sept. 07 rev.02 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

6.1 Periodic maintenance procedures

The service intervals specified are for normal operation where
moderate temperature, humidity and atmospheric conditions
prevail. In areas of extreme conditions, the service periods and
lubrication specifications should be altered to meet existing
conditions.

HAZARD! Always disconnect the power supply before work is

carried out !
M8 Screw
After 300 hours or monthly (which occurs first)
This check can be made while the spreader is connected to the Nut
crane.

1. Inspect the spreader for visible damage.

2. Twistlock: Check the nut and the floating mechanism and

ensure that all parts are properly tightened down. Check
that the twistlock pin can be moved easily and that it
indicates the correct position. Twistlock pin

3. Check that all hydraulic tank mountings are tight.

4. Check the hydraulic oil level. (sight glass on hydraulic Floating

distance
tank).
1-2 mm
5. Retighten all screws according to Tightening torques
in Chapter 6.1.3 (Only the first 300 h service).

After 1000 hours or 3 months (which occurs first)

1. Perform the service points as in section above.

2. If adjustment of twistlock is needed:

2.1 Remove the M8 screw from the top of the twistlock.
2.2 To lower the twistlock, loosen the twistlock nut
slightly. To raise the twistlock, tighten the nut.
The distance between the top of twistlock head and
the bottom of guide block 1 -2 mm
2.3 Recheck the float of the twistlock.
2.4 Reinstall the M8 screw.

3. Lubricate and check the various points as per the

lubrication instructions Chapter 6.1.2

4. Check the filter indicator. If the red alarm flag is visible,

change filter inserts.
Bromma Conquip 6.1-2- Sept. 07 rev.02
 Bromma Group Manual

5. Inspect all hoses, hose clips and hose connections.

Defective hydraulic hoses and connections may cause
personal injury if jets of liquid escape under high pressure.

6. Check that all electric connections, sensors, cabeling

and other electrical equipment are undamaged and
properly tightened.

7. Check the electric cabinet sealings and conduit entries

for damage. Check if there is any signs of damp or
moisture inside the cabinet.

8. Check that all glide plates are fixed in their positions.

After 2000 hours or 6 months (which occurs first)
1. Perform the service points as in sections above.

2. Re-tighten all screws on the ties, bearing beams and

roller attachments.

3. Check that the hydraulic pump pressure is correct.

4. Check all sensors. Clean and retighten.

After 4000 hours or annually (which occurs first)

1. Perform the service points as in sections above.

2. Renew oil filter inserts and air breather.

3. Dismantle all twistlocks.

3.1. Inspect all parts. Look for any damage which could
Twistlock nut necessitate their replacement.
3.2 Check that there are no cracks (or other faults) in the
Spherical washer threads of the twistlock pins or heads. Use penetrating
fluid to detect fissures.
3.3 Replace the twistlock pins and nuts if cracks are detected.
3.4 Clean and lubricate all parts.
3.5 Reassemble the twistlocks.

4. Check the telescopic chain. Tighten if it can be moved

Twistlock pin
more than ± 25 mm in the vertical direction.

5. Check that the two bottom rails are not deformed.

After 8000 hours or every second year (which occurs first)

1. Perform the service points in sections above.

2. The twistlock pins and the spherical washers shall be replaced.

3. Renew hydraulic oil.

6.1-3- Sept. 07 rev.02 Bromma Conquip
 Bromma Group Manual

6.1.1 Maintenance actions

This summary table lists maintenance actions to be taken after
certain operating time intervals.
Maintenance actions: Intervals
300 hours 1000 hours 2000 hours 4000 hours 8000 hours
(monthly) (Every 3 months) (Every 6 months) Annually (Every second year)
General
Inspect for visible damage X X X X X
Lubrication*: X X X X
Twistlocks
Tighten, check function X X
Dismantle, inspect, perform crack detection X
Replace pins and spherical washers X

Hydraulic system:
Check for leakage. Check oil level X X X X
Check filter indicator X X
Check hoses and hose connections X X X X
Renew filter inserts and air breather X X
Renew hydraulic oil X

Electric system:
Check cabinet sealings X X X X
Check all connections X X X X

Glide plates
Check X** X**

Telescoping system
Check chain tension X
Check chain elongation X
Check and clean position sensors X X X X

Ties, bearing beams, roller attachment

Tighten X X X

Bottom rails ( 2 pcs ):

Inspect for deformation X X

* Acc. to instructions. See also Lubricants, general recommendations.

** Minimum thickness 17mm

To be able to follow up the history of this spreader it is of great importance to make notes of
all service and replacement of spare parts. This can be done in Chapter 9. Service Notes.

Bromma Conquip 6.1-4- Sept. 07 rev.02

 Bromma Group Manual

6.1.2 Lubrication Instructions

Following the designated lubrication procedures is important for

insuring maximum equipment life.The procedures and lubrication
chart in this section include information on the types of lubricants
used, the location of the lubrication points, lubrication and
methods of application.

Lubricants General Recommendations

Specific recommendations of brand and grade of all lubricants are
only examples due to regional availability, operating conditions
and the continual development of improved products. Where
questions arise, refer to the manufacturer’s specifications and a
reliable supplier.

Grease
Lubricating grease of the proper consistency is to be applied at
frequent intervals with grease guns through the grease fittings or
with brush where applicable. Lithium base NLGI #2 is
recommended.(Example Matrix EP2)

Grease
Based on synthetic oil and compatible with plastics. (Example
Gleitmo 805K). This grease shall be used on glide plates made of
Oilon (green) and gliding surfaces in contact with these plates.
The grease can be odered from Bromma e-commerce site (se
chapter 7.1 How to order spare parts). Cartridge part no: 700755,
1 Kg part no: 700756, 5 Kg part no:700568.

Chain Lubricant
Apply a non-detergent SAE oil to the chain. Use SAE 30 oil
unless the temperature is below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F)
(SAE
20) or above 38 degrees C (100 degrees F) (SAE 40).

6.1-5- Sept. 07 rev.02 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Lubrication poins 2
Lubricate the points shown below at intervals described in
Chapter 6.1 Periodic maintenance procedures.

Twistlocks
1. Inject grease in through grease fittings.
2. Brush grease on spherical bearings.

Glide Plates
Expand spreader to maximum position and apply grease
on bottom side of the telescoping beams.
45 ft. spreaders: Run to 20 ft. position and apply grease
on glide plates on the top side of the telescoping beams.
40 ft. spreaders: Run to 40 ft. position and apply grease
with a long stick on the ceiling in the beam tunnel inside
the main frame. 40´ spreaders

Pedestal
bearing

Twistlocks

Chain

Glide
Plates

Flipper Arm
Gear box

Bromma Conquip 6.1-6- Sept. 07 rev.02

 Bromma Group Manual

Pedestal bearing
Inject grease in grease fitting.

Chain
Run spreader to outer position and spray chain lubricant
along the whole chain.

Telescopic motor.
The telescopic motor is maintenance-free and
permanently sealed when manufactured.

Level
indicator
hole
Flipper Arm Gearboxes
Inject grease through one of the two fittings, until it
wells up from the level indicator hole.

Grease
fittings

Twinlift Units
Apply grease on the cylinder ears and and in the slots
on both sides of the twinlift units.

Lubricate the twinlift twistlocks as mentioned earlier.

6.1-7- Sept. 07 rev.02 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Lubrication points STS45

Lubricate twistlocks as
mentioned earlier

Lubrication points marked with

shall be lubricated with grease based on synthetic oil

compatible with plastics. (Example Gleitmo 805K). This
grease shall be used on glide plates made of Oilon (green) and
gliding surfaces in contact with these plates. Other types of
grease may destroy the glide plates.
Bromma Conquip 6.1-8- Sept. 07 rev.02
 Bromma Group Manual

6.1.3 Tightening torques

To ensure safe and reliable operation it is important that all
screws and fittings specified below are tightened to the
recommended torques.
A torque wrench must be used to obtain the correct torques .
Torque wrench
Screws in Main Beam
80 Nm
30 Nm

200 Nm

80 Nm

50 Nm
200Nm
100 Nm

Screws in Telescopic Beam

9,7 Nm
40 Nm

80 Nm
30 Nm 200 Nm

225 Nm 100 Nm

100 Nm

150 Nm
385 Nm

6.1-9- Sept. 07 rev.02 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Screws and fittings in Twistlocks

100 Nm

95 Nm

Screws and fittings in Powerpack

90-110 Nm

90-110 Nm

81 Nm
320 Nm 90-110 Nm

100 Nm

200-245 Nm

200-245 Nm 90-110 Nm
Bromma Conquip 6.1-10- Sept. 07 rev.02
 Bromma Group Manual

Screws in telescopic drive

10 Nm
10 Nm

.50 Nm

Additional screws on the STS45 twinlift unit

200 Nm

80 Nm

200 Nm

80 Nm

80 Nm 80 Nm

6.1-11- Sept. 07 rev.02 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Additional screws on the STS45 tie assembly

200 Nm

200 Nm

200 Nm

200 Nm

Bromma Conquip 6.1-12- Sept. 07 rev.02

Bromma Group Manual

6.2 Hydraulic System

HAZARD! Always disconnect the power supply before work is

carried out !

The spreader shall only be operated and serviced by authorized

personnel.

Do not loosen any hoses, fittings or other hydraulic components

while the system is under pressure!

Contents:
List of hydraulic components.
( Power Pack and other standard components are listed in
Chapter 7.2 Spare parts list).

Hydraulic assy 1027818

Hydraulic diagram 1027818

6.2-1-Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 mpchan
Hydraulic System, 1027819 rev. - 12/29/09

F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2

1027819 - Hydraulic System HYDRAULIC ASSEMBLY ZPMC/PPC 12249
1 1.0 1027820 a Hydraulic Power Pack POWER PACK ASSY ZPMC/PPC 12249
2 2.0 73119 - Hydraulic Block MANIFOLD BLOCK ART.NR 2005L05
3 4.0 73096 - Hydraulic Valve DIR CONTROL VALVE DG4V-3-2C-MU-H7-61
4 2.0 73096 - Hydraulic Valve DIR CONTROL VALVE DG4V-3-2C-MU-H7-61
6 3.0 1002238 - Part HAND PUMP KIT 70mm high
HYDRAULIC MOTOR CHAR-
9 4.0 1005181 - Hydraulic Motor EATON JMS G7040/81524
LYNN 500CC
11 4.0 57721 c Hydraulic Valve RESTRICTOR GE 10-SR 3/8- SPEC.
12 1.0 24486 b Hydraulic Motor HYDRAULIC MOTOR T131 -
14 2.0 70084 - Hydraulic Component PRESSURE TEST ST 04 RA
15 1.0 700096 - Hydraulic Block VALVE BLOCK 2005S17
16 1.0 701233 - Hydraulic Valve DIR CONTROL VALVE KDG4V-5-2C-50N-H-MU-H7-30
17 1.0 73096 - Hydraulic Valve DIR CONTROL VALVE DG4V-3-2C-MU-H7-61
18 1.0 79661 - Hydraulic Valve DIR CONTROL VALVE DG4V-3-561C-MU-H7-60
19 2.0 K3097 - Hydraulic Valve DIR CONTROL VALVE DG4V-3-6C-MU-H7-60
20 1.0 79808 c Hydraulic Block Valve block with valves SUPPL ART.(2005Q71)
21 2.0 700469 - Hydraulic Block BLOCK WITH PILOT CHECK 2005Q60
25 2.0 79172 - Hydraulic Block VALVE BLOCK 4-T 1031
30 1.0 700766 - Hydraulic Block VALVE BLOCK 1342
33 2.0 76054 - Hydraulic Valve DIR CONTROL VALVE DG4V-5-6CJ-MU-H6-20
34 1.0 700761 - Hydraulic Valve FLOW DIVIDER CASAPPA
35 4.0 76077 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 10-SR 1/2 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
36 4.0 71911 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING RI-B-8-6
37 8.0 71866 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 10-SR 1/4 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
38 16.0 74564 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 10-SR 3/8 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
39 4.0 73802 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING SWVE 12-SR (BANJO)
40 16.0 71871 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 12-SR 3/8 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
41 2.0 71867 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 16-SR 1/2 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
42 2.0 70051 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 16-SR 3/4 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
43 28.0 71877 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 12-SR 1/2 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
44 16.0 71871 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 12-SR 3/8 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
45 8.0 74564 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 10-SR 3/8 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
46 8.0 71866 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 10-SR 1/4 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
47 2.0 70700 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING VSTIR 3/4 in
48 16.0 70052 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 20-SR 3/4 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread

Page - 1
 mpchan
Hydraulic System, 1027819 rev. - 12/29/09

F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2

49 2.0 74566 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 20-SR 1/2 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
50 4.0 71353 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING VSTIR 1/2 in
52 8.0 71863 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING SV-12-SR (BULKHEAD)
53 8.0 70069 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING WSV 10-S
54 2.0 71846 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING EVW 20S
59 4.0 71848 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING EWV 12S
60 1.0 56964 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10 KL 750 P86/P87 20S
61 1.0 58316 w Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10 KL 650 P86/P87 20S
62 2.0 60748 s Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-08 KL 3000 P86/P86 16S
63 4.0 56641 j Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06 KL3740 P86/P86 12S
64 8.0 57631 j Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04/KL1610/P86/P86 10S
65 4.0 56338 p Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06 KL 5000 P86/P87 12S
66 2.0 56520 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL 770 P86/ P87 10S
67 2.0 56824 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL 620 P86/ P87 10S
68 2.0 56522 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL 1400 P86/P87 10S
69 2.0 56521 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL1250 P86/ P87 10S
70 4.0 57789 j Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL 1480 P86/P86 10S
71 4.0 62040 j Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL 800 P86/P86 10S
72 4.0 62312 j Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL 2390 P86/P86 10S
73 4.0 56819 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL 2420 P86/P87 10S
74 4.0 62313 p Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06 KL 860 P86/P87 12S
75 4.0 56361 j Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06 KL 390 P86/P86 12S
76 4.0 60762 h Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06 KL 830 P86/P86 12S
77 4.0 56360 j Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06/KL580/P86/P86 12S
78 8.0 57012 j Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06 KL 1600 P86/P86 12S
79 1.0 63415 e Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10 KL 2200 P86/P86 20S
80 1.0 63416 e Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10 KL 3100 P86/P86 20S
81 1.0 61585 e Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10 KL 3500 P86/P86 20S
82 1.0 63414 e Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10 KL 2500 P86/P86 20S
84 1.0 56964 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10 KL 750 P86/P87 20S
85 1.0 62089 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10 KL 1000 P86/P87 20S
86 2.0 57105 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10 KL 530 P86/P87 20S
87 4.0 56641 j Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06 KL3740 P86/P86 12S
88 2.0 56514 p Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06 KL 400P86/P87 12S
89 2.0 56332 p Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-06 KL 350P86/P87 12S
90 8.0 1001576 - Fastening Components Screw SS MC6S 5x30 BUMAX 88 For hydraulic valves

Page - 2
 mpchan
Hydraulic System, 1027819 rev. - 12/29/09

F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2

91 4.0 1001579 - Fastening Components Screw SS MC6S 6x40 BUMAX 88 For hydraulic valves
SS MC6S 5x100 BUMAX
92 4.0 1001578 - Fastening Components Screw For hydraulic valves
88
SS MC6S 5x100 BUMAX
93 4.0 1001578 - Fastening Components Screw For hydraulic valves
88
94 24.0 1001576 - Fastening Components Screw SS MC6S 5x30 BUMAX 88 For hydraulic valves
SS MC6S 5x100 BUMAX
96 8.0 1001578 - Fastening Components Screw For hydraulic valves
88
97 8.0 1001579 - Fastening Components Screw SS MC6S 6x40 BUMAX 88 For hydraulic valves
100 4.0 1000788 a Fastening Components SCREW MC6S M8x100 A4 KLASS 70
101 4.0 1000747 a Fastening Components WASHER BRB 8,4x16x1,6 A4 ISO 7089
102 4.0 76460 - Fastening Components NUT LOC-KING M8 A4, DIN 985, KLASS 70
103 4.0 701435 - Fastening Components SCREW MC6S 8X 90 A4 CLASS 70
104 4.0 77798 - Fastening Components WASHER BRB 8,4x16x1,6 A4, ISO 7089
105 4.0 76460 - Fastening Components NUT LOC-KING M8 A4, DIN 985, KLASS 70
106 4.0 1000596 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 8x50 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4014
107 4.0 701437 - Fastening Components WASHER NORD-LOCK M8 A4
108 4.0 701467 - Fastening Components SCREW MC6S 8X130 A4 CLASS 70
109 4.0 77798 - Fastening Components WASHER BRB 8,4x16x1,6 A4, ISO 7089
110 4.0 76460 - Fastening Components NUT LOC-KING M8 A4, DIN 985, KLASS 70
111 8.0 1000605 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 8x120 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4014
112 8.0 701437 - Fastening Components WASHER NORD-LOCK M8 A4
115 4.0 76518 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 10x35 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4017
116 4.0 76519 - Fastening Components NUT LOC-KING M10 A4, DIN 985, KLASS 70
117 8.0 76520 - Fastening Components WASHER BRB 10,5x20x2 A4, ISO 7089
COUPLING EVGE 10-SR-JE 3/8
118 2.0 70063 - Hydraulic Coupling -
in
119 2.0 71864 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING SV 10 S
120 2.0 74564 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 10-SR 3/8 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
121 1.0 57038 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL 400 P86/P87 10S
122 1.0 56487 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 KL 1005 P86/P87 10S
125 16.0 70146 - Fastening Components CLAMP 03-320 -
126 8.0 1000590 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 6x90 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4014
127 8.0 701081 - Fastening Components WASHER NORD-LOCK M6 A4
128 8.0 77890 - Fastening Components NUT LOC-KING M6 DIN 985, A4, KLASS 70
129 4.0 700642 - Fastening Components COVER PLATE DEP3 FZB -
130 56.0 70147 - Fastening Components CLAMP 03-325 -

Page - 3
 mpchan
Hydraulic System, 1027819 rev. - 12/29/09

F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2

131 22.0 1000790 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 6x75 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4014
132 4.0 1000582 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 6x40 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4014
133 26.0 701081 - Fastening Components WASHER NORD-LOCK M6 A4
134 13.0 700642 - Fastening Components COVER PLATE DEP3 FZB -
139 1.0 700254 - Hydraulic Hose HOSE PROTECTION
140 180.0 76527 - Hydraulic Oil HYDRAULIC OIL ISO VG 46

Page - 4
 mpchan
Hydraulic Power Pack, 1027820 rev. a 12/29/09

F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2

1027820 a Hydraulic Power Pack POWER PACK ASSY ZPMC/PPC 12249
1 1.0 24229 h Frame FRAME COMPLETE -
2 1.0 79946 a Electrical Motor ELECTRICAL MOTOR 7.5KW/460V/60HZ, Heater 110V
3 1.0 700757 - Hydraulic Pump PUMP A10-45VO DFLR/31
4 1.0 700758 - Welded Component SHAFT COUPLING A28/38.38-16/32X15
5 1.0 38075 a Hydraulic Bellhousing BELLHOUSING PVQ 40 / A10-45 - 7.5KW
6 1.0 700472 - Hydraulic Filter PRESSURE FILTER MDF160
7 1.0 700473 - Hydraulic Filter RETURN FILTER ZT 8ZZ10 BB Y2 1 in
8 1.0 78960 a Hydraulic Filter AIRBREATHER Standard
9 1.0 79957 - Hydraulic Power Pack Oil Level glass w./thermometer FSA 127 1.1/T/12
10 1.0 70855 - Hydraulic Valve CHECK VALVE RHV 20 SR
11 1.0 45965 a Part PLUG -
12 1.0 37577 d Welded Component TANK LID PP
13 1.0 37579 - Part GASKET -
14 1.0 39317 - Part COVER -
15 1.0 38079 d Part COVER -
16 2.0 400250 c Welded Component ROUND BAR D=20 L=93
17 6.0 400725 c Welded Component ROUND BAR D=20 L=79
18 4.0 1000624 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 12x50 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4014
19 8.0 77897 - Fastening Components WASHER BRB 13x24x2 A4, HB200, SMS 70
20 8.0 77891 - Fastening Components NUT LOC-KING M12 DIN 985, A4, KLASS 70
21 2.0 1000625 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 12x60 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4014
Screw M6S-H M12x50 A4 KLASS
22 2.0 1007287 - Fastening Components -
70
23 6.0 701440 - Fastening Components WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 A4
24 4.0 77891 - Fastening Components NUT LOC-KING M12 DIN 985, A4, KLASS 70
25 2.0 1000622 a Fastening Components SCREW M6S 12x30 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4017
26 2.0 77897 - Fastening Components WASHER BRB 13x24x2 A4, HB200, SMS 70
27 2.0 75807 - Fastening Components CUP SPRING 25X12.2X1.5 DIN2093
28 4.0 1000626 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 12x70 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4014
29 8.0 77897 - Fastening Components WASHER BRB 13x24x2 A4, HB200, SMS 70
30 4.0 77891 - Fastening Components NUT LOC-KING M12 DIN 985, A4, KLASS 70
31 20.0 77797 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 8x35 A4, CLASS 70
32 34.0 77798 - Fastening Components WASHER BRB 8,4x16x1,6 A4, ISO 7089
33 12.0 76460 - Fastening Components NUT LOC-KING M8 A4, DIN 985, KLASS 70
34 4.0 1000608 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S-H M10x20 A4 KLASS 70

Page - 1
 mpchan
Hydraulic Power Pack, 1027820 rev. a 12/29/09

F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2

35 4.0 701443 - Fastening Components WASHER NORD-LOCK M10 A4
36 14.0 77851 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 8x25 A4, CLASS 70
37 14.0 77798 - Fastening Components WASHER BRB 8,4x16x1,6 A4, ISO 7089
38 3.0 77851 - Fastening Components SCREW M6S 8x25 A4, CLASS 70
39 3.0 701437 - Fastening Components WASHER NORD-LOCK M8 A4
43 1.0 76079 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING GE20-S 7/8 in-14 UNF
44 1.0 700760 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE42-LR 1 1/2 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
45 1.0 70052 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 20-SR 3/4 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
46 1.0 70856 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING EVGE 20 SR 3/4 in
47 2.0 71908 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING RI-A-20-12
48 1.0 70053 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 20-SR 1 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
49 1.0 70836 - Hydraulic Component PRESSURE TEST ST-1301-20S
50 1.0 71846 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING EVW 20S
51 1.0 76453 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING VSTI 1 in
52 1.0 701236 - Hydraulic Component O-RING 214-12
53 1.0 70700 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING VSTIR 3/4 in
54 2.0 78654 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING 2133-16 1 in-3000
55 2.0 700764 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING 2133-24 1 1/2 in-3000
56 1.0 700626 - Hydraulic Component O-RING 214-16
57 1.0 701047 - Hydraulic Component O-RING 214-24
58 4.0 701443 - Fastening Components WASHER NORD-LOCK M10 A4
59 4.0 701440 - Fastening Components WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 A4
60 1.0 62933 c Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 602-24/KL730 /P623-24/P86-24-4
61 1.0 63366 c Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-12/KL470/P613-12-16/P86-20
62 1.0 57106 l Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-10/KL560/P87/P86 20S
63 4.0 1001487 - Fastening Components SCREW UC6S 3/8"-16UNC 1 1/4" A4 CLASS 70
UC6S 1/2"-13UNC 1 1/2"
64 4.0 1001488 - Fastening Components SCREW Stainless Steel
A4 KLASS70
65 1.0 79958 - Enclosures and Accessories
PLUG 504-24 1 1/2 in
66 1.0 79959 - Fastening Components WASHER 216-24 1 1/2 in
67 1.0 76455 - Enclosures and Accessories
PLUG 504-32 2 in
68 1.0 78204 - Fastening Components WASHER 216-32 2 in
69 1.0 1005209 - Part ROTATION STICKER HYDRAULIC PUMP
70 1.0 700463 - Hydraulic Block PRESSURE CONTROL BLOCK 2005P53
71 1.0 700471 - Hydraulic Valve DIR CONTROL VALVE DG4V-3-24A-MU-H7-60
72 1.0 79970 - Hydraulic Valve RELIEF VALVE RDM2AT 25S10

Page - 2
 mpchan
Hydraulic Power Pack, 1027820 rev. a 12/29/09

F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2

73 1.0 76642 - Enclosures and Accessories
PLUG VSTI R1/4 in
74 2.0 71866 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 10-SR 1/4 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
75 1.0 70940 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING GE 8 S 7/16 in-20 UNF
76 1.0 63023 - Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04 / KL1200 / P86-10S / P8
77 1.0 58315 k Hydraulic Hose HOSE COMPLETE 821-04-KL350 P86/P87 10S
78 4.0 1000645 - Fastening Components SCREW MC6S 5x40 A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4762
79 4.0 1001577 - Fastening Components Screw SS MC6S 5x70 BUMAX 88 For hydraulic valves
80 1.0 79783 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING RI-A-12-4
81 1.0 71866 a Hydraulic Coupling XGE 10-SR 1/4 in-JE Straight coupling G-thread
82 1.0 76453 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING VSTI 1 in
83 1.0 70700 - Hydraulic Coupling COUPLING VSTIR 3/4 in
84 1.0 1002127 - Clamp Kit CLAMP KIT DIA 14
85 1.0 76920 - Hydraulic Component TEMP/LEVEL INDICATOR HMFB-0120-0185-T90

Page - 3
Bromma Group Manual

6.3 Electric System

HAZARD! Always disconnect the power supply before work is

carried out !

The spreader shall only be operated and serviced by authorized

personnel.

Contents:
Spreader Control System SCS2

Circuit diagram 1027766

6.3-1-Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A
BROMMA (M) SDN BHD
19, Jalan Kelebang 1/6, FIZ Kinta
31200 IPOH
MALAYSIA
Email: sales@bromma.com
Tel: +605-2938890

B B

Customer : ZPMC
Plant designation : A1 ZPMC PPC Cristobal
C C
Drawing Number : 1027766
Revision :

KEYWORD
KEYWORD
KEYWORD

KEYWORD
800-334-0115
---SEPARATOR---

---SEPARATOR---
Manufacturer (Company) : BROMMA (M) SDN BHD
ISO
20' 5852
40' 11984
45' 13509

Project name : ZPMC PPC Cristobal

D D
Serial Number : 12249
Type : STS45
Responsible for project : Zamzuree

BROMMA SPREADER STS 45

E E
Created on the : 07/26/2007
The latest revition : 10/05/2009 By : zamzumo Number of pages : 63

Manufacturing site : BMAL

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 1
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 2
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Flyleaf TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of content
Plant des. Location Page Page description Revision note Date Editor
1 Flyleaf 09/02/2009 zamzumo
2 Table of contents: (1 - 30) 10/05/2009 zamzumo
3 Table of contents: (31 - 60) 09/28/2009 zamzumo
4 Table of contents: (61 - 63) 09/28/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 5 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/28/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 6 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 7 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10/05/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 8 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10/05/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 9 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10/05/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 10 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10/05/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 12 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10/05/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 13 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10/05/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 14 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 15 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 16 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 17 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 18 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 19 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 20 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 21 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 22 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 23 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 24 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 25 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 26 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10/05/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 27 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 28 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
A1 X0 29 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 09/02/2009 zamzumo
30 MOUNTING PANEL 09/03/2009 zamzumo

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 2
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 3
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Table of contents: (1 - 30) TOTAL SH.
contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
Table of content
Plant des. Location Page Page description Revision note Date Editor
31 MOUNTING PANEL 09/28/2009 zamzumo
32 MOUNTING PANEL 09/03/2009 zamzumo
33 Pushbutton Box 09/03/2009 zamzumo
34 PLC diagram 10/05/2009 zamzumo
35 I/O card overview 10/05/2009 zamzumo
36 I/O card overview 10/05/2009 zamzumo
37 I/O card overview 10/05/2009 zamzumo
38 I/O card overview 10/05/2009 zamzumo
39 I/O card overview 10/05/2009 zamzumo
40 Pin layout 09/28/2009 zamzumo
41 Spreader layout 09/03/2009 zamzumo
42 Parts list: (1001448 - 1016253) 10/05/2009 zamzumo
43 Parts list: (1016253 - 1001762) 10/05/2009 zamzumo
44 Parts list: (1001762 - 1001400) 10/05/2009 zamzumo
45 Parts list: (1001400 - 1002367) 10/05/2009 zamzumo
46 Parts list: (1002367 - 700188) 10/05/2009 zamzumo
47 Parts list: (1016254 - 1016254) 10/05/2009 zamzumo
48 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
49 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
50 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
51 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
52 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
53 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
54 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
55 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
56 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
57 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
58 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
59 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo
60 CABLE LIST 10/05/2009 zamzumo

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 3
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 4
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Table of contents: (31 - 60) TOTAL SH.
contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
Table of content
Plant des. Location Page Page description Revision note Date Editor
61 Parts list (grouped): (1001448 - 700928) 10/05/2009 zamzumo
62 Parts list (grouped): (700006 - 37524) 10/05/2009 zamzumo
63 Parts list (grouped): (1002266 - 1016254) 10/05/2009 zamzumo

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 4
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 5
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Table of contents: (61 - 63) TOTAL SH.
contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A
-XP1 3 53 54 55 50 51 56 57 58 8 7 39 11 4 9 18 40 48 52

-WXP1 PE 37 38 39 45 47 41 42 43 6 5 40 9 4 7 16 34 44 3

4
9

50
51

T3
8

58

T1
7

T2

PE
56
57
39
52

11
18
40
A1 48
+X1 -X1 :PE :T1 :T2 :T3 :50 :51 :56 :57 :58 :8 :7 :39 :11 :4 :9 :18 :40 :48 :52

Spare / Reserved Pins

B B

T1
T2
8

T3
50
51
-X1 :L 8
-120VAC / +X0/7.00

T2
7 -X1 :N 7
-120VN / +X0/7.00

1 1 2
-X1 :B1+ 201 -24VDC:B1 / +X0/6.01
-P1 h
2 -F2
110A 2
-X1 :L+ 202 -24VDC / +X0/7.00
C T3 -F3 C
15A

8
7
199

199

-X1 :PE
-G1
8 +
1 6
L +
PE 90-255VAC 7
5 ----

PE
GND 24VDC
-
7
8
-
D 2 9 D
A1 N 3 4
+X0 -WHE1 Bn Bu
200

Bn Bk Bu PE
200

-WM1 Power Box

-X1 :- 200 -0VDC:B1 / +X0/6.01

U1 V1 W1
1
-M1 M -R3
3~ -X1 :- 200 -0VDC / +X0/29.01
2
PE
E E

Electrical Motor 1 Motor Reserved

Motor 1 Control Voltage Dummy Socket Spreader
460Vac 60Hz Heater For
Hour Meter 120Vac/Vn Connected Connected
7.5kW Supply Electric Motor 2
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 5
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 6
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A
A1
+X1
201 201
/5.08 / +X1-24VDC:B1 +X1-24VDC:B1 /

200 200
/5.08 / +X1-0VDC:B1 +X1-0VDC:B1 / /7.00

250 -CAN high / /29.01

220 -CAN low / /29.01

EEPROM

B B

RED
BLUE
BLACK

GREEN
200

201
201
200
36 16 26 6

PE

206
216
226
236
C C
-X1 :206 :216 :226 :236 :242 :243 :244 :245 :PE

PE

226
201
250

206
216
236
201
200
220

200
-WB1:XP2 28 26 27 25 1 2 4 3 33

D D
+B1-XPX2 :6 :16 :26 :36 42 43 44 45 30 40 :48 :50 :20

-B1

SD
SC
VCC

GND
GND
GND

+24V
+24V
B-CAN L

B-CAN H
CAN-GND
CAN-open L

MAIN SUPPLY
CAN-open H

NOD ADDRESS

ID0
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4

GND
E E
+B1-XPX2 10 9 19 29 39 49

200
200
200
200
Node Main supply
EEprom . . CAN-open
Address node B1

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 6
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 7
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-B1 COMMON GROUP 1 COMMON GROUP 2

A I 1 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 A
O IO O O O O O O

PIN NO: 44
PIN NO: 21
+B1-XPX1 :44 :31 :41 :43 :42 :21 :3 :2 :11 :1

8
8

10
29

12
13
14

141
27

131
-WB1:XP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B B

A1 -B1 :L :L

10
12
13
27

14
29

131
141
+X1

8
8
8 8 8 8 8 8
+X0/5.08 / -120VAC 8 8 8 -120VAC / +X0/8.00
+X0/6.07 / -0VDC:B1 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 -0VDC:B1 / +X0/8.00
200

-X1 :- :131 :141 :10 :12 :13 :14 :27 :29

131
141
C A1 A1
C
12 14 12 14
-KA1 .01 -KA2 .02
11 11
A2 A2

7
7
+X0/5.08 / -120VN 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 -120VN / +X0/8.00

+X0/5.08 / -24VDC 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 -24VDC / +X0/8.00

202
202
12 14 12 14

-KA1 -KA2
+X0.01 11 1 2 +X0.02 11 1 2
D D

150
151
-R1 -R2

-X1 :150 :151

10
12
13
14
27
29

150
151

200
-WHL1-3 Bu Bk Wh
-WXP1 8 10 11 12 25 27

1 1
-HL1 -HL2
E Green 2 Red 2
E
-XP1 10 12 13 14 27 29

200 200

Twistlock Locked Twistlock Unlocked Twistlock Locked Twistlock Unlocked Spreader Landed Spreader Landed Twin Up Twin Down
Right Lamp Right Lamp Signal Signal Left Signal Right Signal Signal Signal

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 7
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 8
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-B1 COMMON GROUP 3 COMMON GROUP 4

A I 9 I 10 I 11 I 12 I 13 I 14 I 15 I 16 A
O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 8
PIN NO: 35
+B1-XPX1 :8 :26 :16 :6 :7 :35 :4 :5 :25 :15

8
8

16
17
37

32
38

15
115

125
-WB1:XP1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

B B

A1
+X1

37

32
38

17
115

125
-B1 :L :L

16

15
8

8
8 8 8 8 8 8
+X0/7.08 / -120VAC 8 8 8 -120VAC / +X0/9.00

+X0/7.08 / -0VDC:B1 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 -0VDC:B1 / +X0/12.00

-X1 :15 :16 :17 :32 :38 :37 :- :125 :115

C C
125

A1 12 14

-KA3 .07
11
A2
7

+X0/7.08 / -120VN 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 -120VN / +X0/9.00

+X0/7.08 / -24VDC 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 -24VDC / +X0/29.01
202

12 14

-KA3
+X0.07 11
1 2
152

D D
-R3
-X1 :152

15
16
37

17
38

32
152

200

-WHL1-3 Bn
-WXP1 13 14 15 29 32 31
1
-HL3
White 2

E E
-XP1 15 16 17 32 38 37

Telescope In 20ft Telescope In 40ft Telescope In 45ft Twin 20ft Flipper Up HIS Landed Right
Spare
Position Signal Position Signal Position Signal Condition Signal Signal Signal Lamp

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 8
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 9
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-XP1 1 2 19 20 21 22
A A

-WXP1 1 2 17 18 19 20

A1
+X14

13 13
-SB10 -SB11

1
2
20
B B

19
22

21
14 14

-WX14 6 7 8 9

130
140

8
8
A1
C +X1 C

-X1 :1 :2 :130 -B1 :L -X1 :140 -B1 :L -X1 :19 :20 :21 :22

+X0/8.09 / -120VAC 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 -120VAC / +X0/11.00

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
+X0/8.09 / -120VN -120VN / +X0/11.00

7
1
2
20
22

19
21

140

130
-X1 :N :N

D D

7
1
2
7
21

20

19
22

140

130
-WB1:XP1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

+B1-XPX1 :9 :10 :20 :30 :40 :50 :46 :47 :49 :48

E -B1 E
I 17 I 18 I 19 I 20 I 21 I 22 I 23 I 24
O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 9
PIN NO: 50

COMMON GROUP 5 COMMON GROUP 6

Twin Expand Twin Retract Local Expand Local Retract Telescope Expand Telescope Retract Twistlock Unlock Twistlock Lock
Cmd Cmd Cmd Cmd Cmd Cmd Cmd Cmd

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 9
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 10
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A

BN BU
-BE1
B + - B
1
-S81
-BD1
3 BK
2

A2 A2

BROWN
-Y17 -Y18

BROWN
BLUE

GREEN
BLACK

WHITE
A1 A1
PINK
GREY
WHITE

GREEN

BROWN

228
217
207
227
YELLOW

204
208

203
218

202
201
C C
205
215
238
235

237
225

-WS81 BK BU BN
-WY17 BN BU -WY18 BN BU
-WBD1 3 2 1 -WBE1 1 2 3 4 5 6

A1
+X1 -X2 :203 :204 :202 :201 :218 :208 :228 :217 :207 :227 :205 :215 :238 :237 :225 :235

D D
238

201
215

203
204
205
237
235

225

202
218
228
217
207
227

208
-WB1:XP2 13 14 15 16 7 9 8 5 6 10 24 22 29 30 21 23

+B1-XPX2 3 4 2 1 21 11 31 41 18 8 28 17 7 27 5 15 38 37 25 35

-B1

E E
DATA -

DATA +
CLOCK -

CLOCK +

AI 1 REF
AI 2 REF

AI 1 GND
AI 2 GND

PWM 1 IN
PWM 2 IN
PWM 3 IN
PWM 4 IN

PWM 1 OUT
24V SUPPLY

PWM 2 OUT
PWM 3 OUT
PWM 4 OUT
AI 1 SIGNAL
AI 2 SIGNAL
SIGNAL GROUND

Telescope Expand Telescope Expand Linear Pot Low Pressure Absolute

-Y17- -Y18- Rhs Indicator Encoder

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 10
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 11
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-XP1 23 25 34 36 41 42
A A

-WXP1 21 23 30 33 35 36

34
1 1

36
B B

41
42

25

23
-S80 -S82
2 2

-WS80-82 1 2 -WS80-82 3 4

8
8

342
345

A1
C +X1 C

-X1 :23 :25 :34 :342 :L :36 :41 :42 :L :345

+X0/9.08 / -120VAC 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
+X0/9.08 / -120VN -120VN / +X0/13.00

7
25

23
34
41
42

36

342
345

-B1 :N :N

D D
41

7
7

25
36
42

23
34
342
345

-WB1:XP3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

+B1-XPX3 :11 :21 :31 :41 :42 :43 :24 :35 :44 :45

-B1
E I I I I I I I I
E
O 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 O 29 O 30 O 31 O 32

PIN NO: 11
PIN NO: 43

COMMON GROUP 7 COMMON GROUP 8

Twin Up Twin Down Twin 20ft Detection High Pressure Log Pos 1 Return To Return To Low Level
Cmd Cmd Bypass Cmd Indication Cmd Log Pos 1 Cmd Home Position Indicator

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 11
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 12
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

NOTE:
-B1 COMMON GROUP 10
The telescope can be positioned manually by pressing
A the "Extend CMD"(SB10) or "Retract CMD"(SB11). A
I 37 I 38 I 39 I 40
The actual telescope position is stored by pressing the O O O O

"Teach CMD"(SB12) and the corresponding position command (SB13-17).

A1
+X14 201 201 201 +B1-XPX3 :15 :6 :16 :25 :26

201
201
201

201
16 17 18 19 20

201
-WB1:XP3
13 13 13 13
-SB12 -SB13 -SB16 -SB17
14 14 14 14
B B

-WX14 2 1 3 4 5

201
337
338
339
340

A1
+X1
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

-R4 -R5 -R6 -R7

201
303

304
302

305
-X1 :B1+ :B1+ :337 :338 :339 :340

C / -24VDC:B1 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 -24VDC:B1 / +X0/13.01 C

+X0/8.09 / -0VDC:B1 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 -0VDC:B1 / +X0/13.00

-X1 :- :305 :304 :303 :302 :- :-

305
200
337
338
339
200
340

200
304
303
302
D D

200
305
303
Wh

304
302
-WHL5-7 Bu Bk Bn -WHL4 BU BK

1 1 1 1
-HL5 -HL6 -HL7 -HL4
Green 2 Red 2 White 2 Blue 2
-WB1:XP3 11 12 13 14 15

200 200 200 200

+B1-XPX3 :1 :5 :4 :3 :2

-B1
E I I I I
E
O 33 O 34 O 35 O 36

PIN NO: 1
COMMON GROUP 9

Local Teach Local Teach Local Teach Local Teach Twistlock Locked Twistlock Unlocked Landed Left Indicator Fault
.
Cmd 20ft Cmd 40ft Cmd 45ft Cmd Left Lamp Left Lamp Lamp Lamp

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 12
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 13
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

201 201 A1
-XP1 24 26 28 30
A +X14 A
11
-WXP1 22 24 26 28 -SS1
12

200
200
1 3 1 3
+ - + -
-S83 -S84
-WX14 10 11
4 4
-WS83 4 -WS84 4

30

26
28

26

24
201
201

201
307
309
310
B A1 B
+X1 -X1 :310

11
-X1 :B1+ :- :B1+ :- -SS2 -X1 :B1+
12

201
201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201
+X0/12.08 / -24VDC:B1

C 2
C
-X1 :24 :26 :28 :30 -P2
1

200 200 200 200 200 200 200

+X0/12.08 / -0VDC:B1 200 200

7
+X0/11.08 / -120VN

200
309
350

200

307

200
200
330

-B1 :N :- :- :- :+

24
26
28
30

7
D -X1 :307 :309 :350 :330 D

7
24
30

26
28
200
350

200

307
309

-WB1:XP3 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

+B1-XPX4 :36 :49 :48 :47 :46 :8 :7 :10 :9 :40 :50 :20 :30

-B1
E I I I I I I I I
E
O 41 O 42 O 43 O 44 O 45 O 46 O 47 O 48
PIN NO: 8

PIN NO: 36
PIN NO: 10
PIN NO: 40
PIN NO: 20

COMMON GROUP 11

Flipper 1 Flipper
. 2 Flipper 3 Flipper 4 HIS HIS Local Spreader Twistlock
Down Cmd Down Cmd Down Cmd Down Cmd Left Right Stop Counter

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 13
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 14
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A

B B

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
-S1 -S5 -S4 -S8 -S9 -S44 -S12 -S47

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
-Can high X2 / /28.01
-Can low X2 / /28.01

-WS1-S5 A B -WS4-S8 A B -WS9-S44 A B -WS12-S47 A B

C C
220

250

D D

1 2

-R1
250
220

-X2
/15.00 +X2-XP1 4 2 +X2-XP3 4 2 +X2-XP5 4 2 +X2-XP7 4 2 :1 :2
E Node ID: 2 E

Gable end left I I1 I I5 I I2 I I6 I I3 I I7 I I4 I I8

O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

-S1 -S5 -S4 -S8 -S9 -S44 -S12 -S47 CAN-OPEN

Unlocked Locked Unlocked Locked Landed Flipper 1Up Landed Flipper 4 Up INTERFACE
RHSS RHSS RHLS RHLS RHSS RHSS RHLS RHLS SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 14
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 15
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-X2
A /14.00 I O1 I O5 I O2 I O6 I O3 I O7 I O4 I O8 A
O O O O O O O O
Node ID: 2

GND
+VBB
Gable end left
+X2-XP2 4 2 +X2-XP4 4 2 +X2-XP6 4 2 +X2-XP8 4 2 +X2-X0 :3 :5

B B
202

200

-WY15-16 4 2 -WY1-Y2 4 2 -WY11-Y12 4 2

C C

1 1 1 1 1 1
-Y15 -Y16 -Y1 -Y2 -Y11 -Y12
A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2
/28.00 / -VBB X2

/28.01 / -GND X2

D D

E E

-Y15 -Y16 -Y1 -Y2 -Y11 -Y12 CAN-OPEN

Unlock Lock Flipper 1 Flipper 1 Flipper 4 Flipper 4 Spare Spare INTERFACE
RHS RHS Up Down Up Down SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 15
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 16
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A

B B
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
-S3 -S7 -S2 -S6 -S11 -S46 -S10 -S45

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2
-Can high X3 / /28.02
-Can low X3 / /28.02

-WS3-S7 A B -WS2-S6 A B -WS11-S46 A B -W10-S45 A B

C C
250
220

D D

1 2

-R2
250
220

-X3 +X3-XP1 4 2 +X3-XP3 4 2 +X3-XP5 4 2 +X3-XP7 4 2 +X3-X0 :1 :2

E /17.00 Node ID: 3 E

Gable end right I I1 I I5 I I2 I I6 I I3 I I7 I I4 I I8

O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

-S3 -S7 -S2 -S6 -S11 -S46 -S10 -S45 CAN-OPEN

Unlocked Locked Unlocked Locked Landed Flipper Up Landed Flipper Up INTERFACE
LHLS LHLS LHSS LHSS LHLS LHLS LHSS LHSS SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 16
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 17
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-X3
/16.00 I O1 I O5 I O2 I O6 I O3 I O7 I O4 I O8
O O O O O O O O
A Node ID: 3 A

GND
+VBB
Gable end right
+X3-XP2 4 2 +X3-XP4 4 2 +X3-XP6 4 2 +X3-XP8 4 2 +X3-X0 :3 :5

B B

-WY7-Y8 4 2 -WY3-Y4 4 2 -WY9-Y10 4 2

202

200

1 1 1 1 1 1
-Y7 -Y8 -Y3 -Y4 -Y9 -Y10
C A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2 C
/28.02 / -VBB X3

/28.02 / -GND X3

D D

E E

-Y7 -Y8 -Y3 -Y4 -Y9 -Y10 CAN-OPEN

Unlock Lock Flipper 2 Flipper 2 Flipper 3 Flipper 3 Spare Spare INTERFACE
LHS LHS Up Down Up Down SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 17
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 18
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A

B B

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
-S24 -S28 -S32 -S36 -S27 -S31 -S35 -S39
-Can high X4 / /28.03
-Can low X4 / /28.03

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

C -WTWIN4 1 2 3 4 -WTWIN7 1 2 3 4 C
220

250

D D

-X4 +X4-XP1 4 2 +X4-XP3 4 2 +X4-XP5 4 2 +X4-XP7 4 2 +X4-X0 :1 :2

/19.00 Node ID: 4
E E

Centre landside I In 1 I In 5 I In 2 I In 6 I In 3 I In 7 I In 4 I In 8
O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

-S24 -S28 -S32 -S36 -S27 -S31 -S35 -S39 CAN-OPEN

Twin Unlocked Twin Locked Twin Landed Twin Up Twin Unlocked Twin Locked Twin Landed Twin Up INTERFACE
RHSS RHSS RHSS RHSS LHSS LHSS LHSS LHSS SUPPLY

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 18
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 19
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X4
/18.00 I Out 1 I Out 5 I Out 2 I Out 6 I Out 3 I Out 7 I Out 4 I Out 8
O O O O O O O O
Node ID: 4
A A

GND
+VBB
Centre landside
+X4-XP2 4 2 +X4-XP4 4 2 +X4-XP6 4 2 +X4-XP8 4 2 +X4-X0 :3 :5

B B
202

200

C -WY25-Y26 4 2 -WY27-Y28 4 2 C

1 1 1 1
-Y25 -Y26 -Y27 -Y28
A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2
/28.03 / -VBB X4

/28.03 / -GND X4

D D

E E

-Y25 -Y26 -Y27 -Y28 CAN-OPEN

Twin Twin Twin Twin Spare Spare Spare Spare INTERFACE
Up Down Unlock Lock SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 19
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 20
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A

B B

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
-S25 -S29 -S33 -S37 -S26 -S30 -S34 -S38
-Can high X5 / /28.04
-Can low X5 / /28.05

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

-WTWIN5 1 2 3 4 -WTWIN6 1 2 3 4

C C
220

250

D D

-X5 +X5-XP1 4 2 +X5-XP3 4 2 +X5-XP5 4 2 +X5-XP7 4 2

/21.00 +X5-X0 :1 :2
E Node ID: 5 E

Centre waterside I In 1 I In 5 I In 2 I In 6 I In 3 I In 7 I In 4 I In 8
O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

-S25 -S29 -S33 -S37 -S26 -S30 -S34 -S38 CAN-OPEN

Twin Unlocked Twin Locked Twin Landed Twin Up Twin Unlocked Twin Locked Twin Landed Twin Up INTERFACE
RHLS RHLS RHLS RHLS LHLS LHLS LHLS LHLS SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 20
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 21
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X5
/20.00 I Out 1 I Out 5 I Out 2 I Out 6 I Out 3 I Out 7 I Out 4 I Out 8
O O O O O O O O
Node ID: 5
A A

GND
+VBB
Centre waterside
+X5-XP2 4 2 +X5-XP4 4 2 +X5-XP6 4 2 +X5-XP8 4 2 +X5-X0 :3 :5

B B
202

200

C C
/28.04 / -VBB X5

/28.04 / -GND X5

D D

E E

CAN-OPEN
Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare INTERFACE
SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 21
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 22
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A

B B

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + -
-S112 -S100 -S102 -S160
-Can high X6 / /28.06
-Can low X6 / /28.06

4 4 4 4

-WS112 4 -WTWIN9 1 2 3

C C
220

250

D D

-X6
/23.00 +X6-XP1 4 2 +X6-XP3 4 2 +X6-XP5 4 2 +X6-XP7 4 2 +X6-X0 :1 :2
E Node ID: 6 E

Centre waterside I In 1 I In 5 I In 2 I In 6 I In 3 I In 7 I In 4 I In 8
O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

CAN-OPEN
Twin In "0" Gap Twin Hook Twin Hook Twin Attached
Spare Spare Spare Spare INTERFACE
Position Left Connected Left Disconnected Left Left
SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 22
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 23
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X6
/22.00 I Out 1 I Out 5 I Out 2 I Out 6 I Out 3 I Out 7 I Out 4 I Out 8
O O O O O O O O
Node ID: 6
A A

GND
+VBB
Centre waterside
+X6-XP2 4 2 +X6-XP4 4 2 +X6-XP6 4 2 +X6-XP8 4 2 +X6-X0 :3 :5

B B
202

200

-WY41 4

1
C -Y41 C
B 2
/28.05 / -VBB X6

/28.05 / -GND X6

D D

E E

-Y41 CAN-OPEN
High Pressure Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare INTERFACE
Valve SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 23
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 24
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A

B B
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
-S113 -S118 -S101 -S103 -S161 -S119

4 4 4 4 4 4
-CAN high X7 / /28.07
-CAN low X7 / /28.07

-WS113 A B -WTWIN10 1 2 3 -WS119 4

C C
220

250

D D

-X7
/25.00 +X7-XP1 4 2 +X7-XP3 4 2 +X7-XP5 4 2 +X7-XP7 4 2 +X7-X0 :1 :2
Node ID: 7
E E
Centre landside I In 1 I In 5 I In 2 I In 6 I In 3 I In 7 I In 4 I In 8
O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

CAN-OPEN
Twin in "0" Gap 40ft Twin Hook Twin Hook Twin Attach 45ft
Spare Spare INTERFACE
Position Right Limit Connect Right Disconnect Right Right Limit
SUPPLY

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 24
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 25
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X7
/24.00 I Out 1 I Out 5 I Out 2 I Out 6 I Out 3 I Out 7 I Out 4 I Out 8
O O O O O O O O
Node ID: 7
A A

GND
+VBB
Centre landside
+X7-XP2 4 2 +X7-XP4 4 2 +X7-XP6 4 2 +X7-XP8 4 2 +X7-X0 :3 :5

B B
202

200

-WY45-Y46 4 2 -WY55-Y56 4 2 -WY43-Y44 4 2 -WY53-Y54 4 2

C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-Y45 -Y46 -Y55 -Y56 -Y43 -Y44 -Y53 -Y54
B 2 A 2 A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2

D D
/28.07 / -VBB X7

/28.06 / -GND X7

E E

-Y45- -Y46- -Y55- -Y56- -Y43- -Y44- -Y53- -Y54- CAN-OPEN

Twin Expand
. Twin Retract
. Twin Expand Twin Retract Twin Latch Twin Unlatch Twin .Latch Twin Unlatch
. INTERFACE
.
LHS LHS RHS RHS LHS LHS RHS RHS SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 25
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 26
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A

B B

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + -
-S93 -S91 -S92 -S90 -S94 -S95 -S96

4 4 4 4 4 4 4

-WS90-91 4 2 -WS92-93 4 2 -WS94 4 -WS95-96 4 2

C C
-Can high X13 / /28.08
-Can low X13 / /28.08
220

250

D D

-X13 +X13-XP1 4 2 +X13-XP3 4 2 +X13-XP5 4 2 +X13-XP7 4 2 +X13-X0 :1 :2

E /27.00 Node ID: 13 E

Middle landside I I1 I I5 I I2 I I6 I I3 I I7 I I4 I I8
O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

-S93- -S91- -S92- -S90- -S94- -S95- -S96- CAN-OPEN

TTDS TTDS TTDS TTDS TTDS Spare TTDS TTDS INTERFACE
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 26
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 27
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X13
/26.00 I O1 I O5 I O2 I O6 I O3 I O7 I O4 I O8
O O O O O O O O
Node ID: 13
A A

GND
+VBB
Middle landside
+X13-XP2 4 2 +X13-XP4 4 2 4 2 +X13-XP6 4 2 +X13-X0 :3 :5

B B
202

200

C C
/28.08 / -VBB X13

/28.08 / -GND X13

D D

E E

CAN-OPEN
Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare INTERFACE
SUPPLY
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
- STS45 27
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 28
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A A

-GND X7 / /25.09
-VBB X7 / /25.09
-CAN high X7 / /24.09
-CAN low X7 / /24.09

-VBB X2 / /15.09
-GND X2 / /15.09
-Can high X2 / /14.09
-Can low X2 / /14.09
-VBB X3 / /17.09
-GND X3 / /17.09
-Can high X3 / /16.09
-Can low X3 / /16.09
-VBB X4 / /19.09
-GND X4 / /19.09
-Can high X4 / /18.09
-Can low X4 / /18.09
-VBB X5 / /21.09
-GND X5 / /21.09
-Can high X5 / /20.09
-Can low X5 / /20.09
-VBB X6 / /23.09
-GND X6 / /23.09
-Can high X6 / /22.09
-Can low X6 / /22.09
-VBB X13 / /27.09
-GND X13 / /27.09
-Can high X13 / /26.09
-Can low X13 / /26.09

B B

red
blue
brown
white
red
blue
brown
white
red
blue
brown
white
red
blue
brown
white
red
blue
brown
white
-WX2 -WX3 -WX4 -WX5 -WX6

blue
red
brown
white
red
blue
brown
white

-WX7 -WX13

202
200
220
202
200
250
220
200
250
220
200
250
220
202
200
250
220
200
250
220
202
200
250
220

250
202
202
202
A1
C C
+X100
10amp 10amp 10amp 10amp 10amp 10amp 10amp
-X100 :1 :11 :22 :21 :2 :12 :24 :23 :3 :13 :26 :25 :4 :14 :28 :27 :5 :15 :30 :29 :6 :16 :32 :31 :7 :17 :34 :33

202 202 202 202 202 202 202

+X1-VBB / +X0/29.01

200 200 200 200 200 200 200

+X1-GND / +X0/29.01

250 250 250 250 250 250 250

+X1-CAN high / +X0/29.01
D D
220 220 220 220 220 220
+X1-CAN low / +X0/29.01

E E

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 28
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 29
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Terminal for Can high and Can low

A A
even number on top.
Marking 21-40.

B B

Terminal fuses Terminal GND

Marking 1-10 Marking 11-20

A1
C C
+X100

-X100 :8 :18 :36 :35 :9 :19 :38 :37 :10 :20 :40 :39
202 202 202 202
+X0/28.08 / +X1-VBB 202

200 200 200 200 200

+X0/28.08 / +X1-GND

250 250 250 250

+X0/28.08 / +X1-CAN high

220 220 220 220

+X0/28.08 / +X1-CAN low

D D

-WX100:1 White Brown -WX100:2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

200
200
200
202
202
202
202

220
250
200

A1
+X1
220
+X0/6.07 / +X0-CAN low -X1 :- :- :- :- :L+ :L+ :L+ :L+

E 250 E
+X0/6.07 / +X0-CAN high
200 200 200 200
200
+X0/5.08 / -0VDC

202 202 202 202

+X0/8.09 / -24VDC

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 29
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 30
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo A1 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007 X0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CABINET X1
A A

B 25 X 80 B

=A1+X0/13.08
T1 T2 T3
F2 F3

=A1+X0/5.00

-P1 -KA1-KA2-KA3
-P2

0Vdc

120Vn
24Vdc

120Vac
C Prime C
40 X 80

40 X 80

40 X 80
Power

G1
K1 K2 K3

Power supply
D D

60 X 80

E E

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 30
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 31
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: MOUNTING PANEL TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CABINET X1
A A

GLAND CABLE
A
1 M63 WXP1
2 M20 WM1
B B
3 M20 WHE1
4 M32 WB1:XP1

5 M32 WB1:XP2

6 M32 WB1:XP3

7 M25 (DIX2 X 6) WS81 + WHL4

8 M25 (DIX2 X 6) WHL1-3 + WHL5-7

9 M25 (DIX2 X 6) WY17 + WY18

10 M25 (DIX2 X 6) WS83 + WS84

C C
11 M32 WX14
12 M32 WX100:1
13 M20 WS80-82
14 M20 WBE1

15 M16 WBD1

16 PG EEPROM EEPROM

D D

E E

12 13 14 15

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 31
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 32
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: MOUNTING PANEL TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A
Junction Box X100 A

CAN High

GLAND CABLE 24V GND CAN Low

1 M16 WX100:2
2 M16 WX2

B 3 M16 WX3 B

4 M16 WX4
5 M16 WX5
6 M16 WX6
7 M16 WX7
8 M16 WX13
C C
9 M16 BLIND PLUG
10 M16 BLIND PLUG
11 M16 BLIND PLUG
Sheild CANopen cable
12 M16 BLIND PLUG
13 M16 BLIND PLUG

D 14 M25 WX100:1 D

15 M25 BLIND PLUG

15
14

1 2 3 4 5 6

E E

7 8 9 10 11 12 13

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 32
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 33
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: MOUNTING PANEL TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PUSH BUTTON BOX

A A
X14

Teach Spreader
in stop
B B

SB12 SS1

Expand Retract
cmd cmd

C SB10 SB11 C

20 ft. 30 ft.
cmd/ teach cmd/ teach

SB13 PLUG

D D

40 ft. 45 ft
cmd/ teach cmd/teach

SB16 SB17

E E
Art. no. 2345678

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 33
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 34
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Pushbutton Box TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NODE I/O TYPE PIN NR. DESCRIPTION NODE I/O TYPE PIN NR. DESCRIPTION

-B1 1 Digital output :44 Twistlock LockedRight Lamp -B1 25 Digital input :21 Twin UpCmd

-B1 2 Digital output :41 Twistlock UnlockedRight Lamp -B1 26 Digital input :31 Twin DownCmd

-B1 3 Digital output Twistlock LockedSignal -B1 27 Digital input :41 Twin 20ft Detection Bypass Cmd

-B1 4 Digital output 3 Twistlock UnlockedSignal -B1 28 Digital input :42 High PressureIndication

-B1 5 Digital output :21 Spreader LandedLeft Signal -B1 29 Digital input :24 Log Pos 1Cmd

-B1 6 Digital output 5 Spreader LandedRight Signal -B1 30 Digital input :35 Return ToLog Pos 1 Cmd

-B1 7 Digital output 6 Twin UpSignal -B1 31 Digital input :44 Return ToHome Position

-B1 8 Digital output 7 Twin DownSignal -B1 32 Digital input :45 Low LevelIndicator

-B1 9 Digital output :8 Telescope In 20ftPosition Signal -B1 33 Digital input :5 Local TeachCmd

-B1 10 Digital output 9 Telescope In 40ftPosition Signal -B1 34 Digital input :4 Local Teach20ft Cmd

-B1 11 Digital output 10 Telescope In 45ftPosition Signal -B1 35 Digital input :3 Local Teach40ft Cmd

-B1 12 Digital output 11 Twin 20ftCondition Signal -B1 36 Digital input :2 Local Teach45ft Cmd

-B1 13 Digital output :35 Flipper UpSignal -B1 37 Digital output :15 Twistlock LockedLeft Lamp

-B1 14 Digital output 13 HISSignal -B1 38 Digital output 37 Twistlock UnlockedLeft Lamp

-B1 15 Digital output 14 Landed RightLamp -B1 39 Digital output 38 Landed LeftLamp

-B1 16 Digital output 15 Spare -B1 40 Digital output 39 Indicator FaultLamp

-B1 17 Digital input :10 Twin ExpandCmd -B1 41 Digital input :49 Flipper 1Down Cmd

-B1 18 Digital input :20 Twin RetractCmd -B1 42 Digital input :48 Flipper 2Down Cmd

-B1 19 Digital input :30 Local ExpandCmd -B1 43 Digital input :47 Flipper 3Down Cmd

-B1 20 Digital input :40 Local RetractCmd -B1 44 Digital input :46 Flipper 4Down Cmd

-B1 21 Digital input :46 Telescope ExpandCmd -B1 45 Digital input :7 HISLeft

-B1 22 Digital input :47 Telescope RetractCmd -B1 46 Digital input :9 HIS Right

-B1 23 Digital input :49 Twistlock UnlockCmd -B1 47 Digital input :50 Local SpreaderStop

-B1 24 Digital input :48 Twistlock LockCmd -B1 48 Digital output :30 TwistlockCounter

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 34
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 35
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: PLC diagram TOTAL SH.
I/0 OVERVIEW contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 Twistlock Locked Telescope In 20ft Twin Expand Twin Up Local Teach Flipper 1
Right Lamp Position Signal Cmd Cmd Cmd Down Cmd

Twistlock Unlocked Telescope In 40ft Twin Retract Twin Down Local Teach Flipper 2
Right Lamp Position Signal Cmd Cmd 20ft Cmd Down Cmd

Twistlock Locked Telescope In 45ft Local Expand Twin 20ft Detection Local Teach Flipper 3
Signal Position Signal Cmd Bypass Cmd 40ft Cmd Down Cmd

Twistlock Unlocked Twin 20ft Local Retract High Pressure Local Teach Flipper 4
Signal Condition Signal Cmd Indication 45ft Cmd Down Cmd

Spreader Landed Flipper Up Telescope Expand Log Pos 1 Twistlock Locked HIS
Left Signal Signal Cmd Cmd Left Lamp Left

Spreader Landed HIS Telescope Retract Return To Twistlock Unlocked HIS

Right Signal Signal Cmd Log Pos 1 Cmd Left Lamp Right

Twin Up Landed Right Twistlock Unlock Return To Landed Left Local Spreader
Signal Lamp Cmd Home Position Lamp Stop

Twin Down Twistlock Lock Low Level Indicator Fault Twistlock

Spare
Signal Cmd Indicator Lamp Counter

120Vac Output / 120Vac Output / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input /
24Vdc Input / White
Black Black Orange Orange Orange
120Vac Output / 120Vac Output / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input /
24Vdc Input / White
Black Black Orange Orange Orange
120Vac Output / 120Vac Output / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input /
24Vdc Input / White
Black Black Orange Orange Orange
120Vac Output / 120Vac Output / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input /
24Vdc Input / White
Black Black Orange Orange Orange
120Vac Output / 120Vac Output / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input /
24Vdc Output / Red 24Vdc Input / White
Black Black Orange Orange
120Vac Output / 120Vac Output / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input /
24Vdc Output / Red 24Vdc Input / White
Black Black Orange Orange
120Vac Output / 120Vac Output / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input /
24Vdc Output / Red 24Vdc Input / White
Black Black Orange Orange
120Vac Output / 120Vac Output / 120Vac Input / 120Vac Input /
24Vdc Output / Red 24Vdc Output / Red
Black Black Orange Orange

XP1 XP2 XP3

-B1

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 35
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 36
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: I/O card overview TOTAL SH.
I/0 OVERVIEW contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 CAN-Open I/O
-X2 -X3
Gable end left Gable end right

INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS

Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8 Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8
2 -S47 Flipper 4 Up RHLS 2 Spare 2 -S45 Flipper Up LHSS 2 Spare

4 -S12 Landed RHLS 4 Spare 4 -S10 Landed LHSS 4 Spare

Connector 5 Connector 6 Connector 5 Connector 6

2 -S44 Flipper 1Up RHSS 2 -Y12 Flipper 4 Down 2 -S46 Flipper Up LHLS 2 -Y10 Flipper 3 Down

4 -S9 Landed RHSS 4 -Y11 Flipper 4 Up 4 -S11 Landed LHLS 4 -Y9 Flipper 3 Up

Connector 3 Connector 4 Connector 3 Connector 4

2 -S8 Locked RHLS 2 -Y2 Flipper 1 Down 2 -S6 Locked LHSS 2 -Y4 Flipper 2 Down

4 -S4 Unlocked RHLS 4 -Y1 Flipper 1 Up 4 -S2 Unlocked LHSS 4 -Y3 Flipper 2 Up

Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 1 Connector 2

2 -S5 Locked RHSS 2 -Y16 Lock RHS 2 -S7 Locked LHLS 2 -Y8 Lock LHS

4 -S1 Unlocked RHSS 4 -Y15 Unlock RHS 4 -S3 Unlocked LHLS 4 -Y7 Unlock LHS

Module ID: 2 Module ID: 3

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 36
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 37
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: I/O card overview TOTAL SH.
I/0 OVERVIEW contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 CAN-Open I/O
-X4 -X5
Centre landside Centre waterside

INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS

Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8 Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8
2 -S39 Twin Up LHSS 2 Spare 2 -S38 Twin Up LHLS 2 Spare

4 -S35 Twin Landed LHSS 4 Spare 4 -S34 Twin Landed LHLS 4 Spare

Connector 5 Connector 6 Connector 5 Connector 6

2 -S31 Twin Locked LHSS 2 Spare 2 -S30 Twin Locked LHLS 2 Spare

4 -S27 Twin Unlocked LHSS 4 Spare 4 -S26 Twin Unlocked LHLS 4 Spare

Connector 3 Connector 4 Connector 3 Connector 4

2 -S36 Twin Up RHSS 2 -Y28 Twin Lock 2 -S37 Twin Up RHLS 2 Spare

4 -S32 Twin Landed RHSS 4 -Y27 Twin Unlock 4 -S33 Twin Landed RHLS 4 Spare

Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 1 Connector 2

2 -S28 Twin Locked RHSS 2 -Y26 Twin Down 2 -S29 Twin Locked RHLS 2 Spare

4 -S24 Twin Unlocked RHSS 4 -Y25 Twin Up 4 -S25 Twin Unlocked RHLS 4 Spare

Module ID: 4 Module ID: 5

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 37
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 38
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: I/O card overview TOTAL SH.
I/0 OVERVIEW contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 CAN-Open I/O
-X6 -X7
Centre waterside Centre landside

INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS

Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8 Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8
2 Spare 2 Spare 2 Spare 2 -Y54- Twin Unlatch RHS

4 Spare 4 Spare 4 45ft Limit 4 -Y53- Twin Latch RHS

Connector 5 Connector 6 Connector 5 Connector 6

2 Spare 2 Spare 2 Spare 2 -Y44- Twin Unlatch LHS

4 Twin Attached Left 4 Spare 4 Twin Attach Right 4 -Y43- Twin Latch LHS

Connector 3 Connector 4 Connector 3 Connector 4

2 Twin Hook Disconnected Left 2 Spare 2 Twin Hook Disconnect Right 2 -Y56- Twin Retract RHS

4 Twin Hook Connected Left 4 Spare 4 Twin Hook Connect Right 4 -Y55- Twin Expand RHS

Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 1 Connector 2

2 Spare 2 Spare 2 40ft Limit 2 -Y46- Twin Retract LHS

4 Twin In "0" Gap Position Left 4 -Y41 High Pressure Valve 4 Twin in "0" Gap Position Right 4 -Y45- Twin Expand LHS

Module ID: 6 Module ID: 7

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 38
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 39
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: I/O card overview TOTAL SH.
I/0 OVERVIEW contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 CAN-Open I/O
-X13
Middle landside

INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS

Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8 Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8
2 -S96- TTDS Sensor 2 Spare 2 2

4 -S95- TTDS Sensor 4 Spare 4 4

Connector 5 Connector 6 Connector 5 Connector 6

2 Spare 2 Spare 2 2

4 -S94- TTDS Sensor 4 Spare 4 4

Connector 3 Connector 4 Connector 3 Connector 4

2 -S90- TTDS Sensor 2 Spare 2 2

4 -S92- TTDS Sensor 4 Spare 4 4

Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 1 Connector 2

2 -S91- TTDS Sensor 2 Spare 2 2

4 -S93- TTDS Sensor 4 Spare 4 4

Module ID: 13 Module ID:

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 39
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 40
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: I/O card overview TOTAL SH.
I/0 OVERVIEW contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A Spreader Connector A

PIN CONFIGURATION

10 11
B 9 B
8 12

PIN NUMBER
PIN NUMBER
7 31 32 13
33

WIRE NUMBER ON CRANE

WIRE NUMBER ON CRANE
30

WIRE NUMBER ON SPREADER

WIRE NUMBER ON SPREADER
6 DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
46 34 14 1 1 33 33 36
1 Twin Expand Cmd Log Position 1 Cmd
29 47 2 2 2 Twin Retract Cmd 31 31 37 HIS Signal
5 45 35 48 PE 3 32 32 38
Equiptment Ground Flipper Up Signal
55 48 15 4 4 4 Reserved (Spreader Connected) 40 40 39 Dummy Socket Connected (HB)
28
5 Not Connected 34 34 40 Reserved (Beam Lock Cmd)
56 36
C 44 54 6 Not Connected 35 35 41 Return To Position 1 C
4
5 5 7 120Vac, 60Hz Neutral 36 36 42 Return To Home Position
58 16
27 49 6 6 8 120Vac, 60Hz Control 43 Not Connected
37 7 7 9 Reserved (Spreader Holding) 44 Not Connected
53 57 10
3 8 8 Twistlocks Locked Signal 45 Not Connected
43 17
26 9 9 11 Spreader Connected (Existing) 46 Not Connected
50
38 10 10 12 Twistlocks Unlocked Signal 47 Not Connected
2 52 11 11 13 Spreader Landed Left 44 44 48 Spare
25 51 18 12 12 14 Spreader Landed Right 49 Not Connected
39
13 13 15 Telescope In 20ft Position 46 46 50 Motor Heater Supply 120Vac
1 42 14 14 16 Telescope In 40ft Position 47 47 51 Motor Heater Supply 120Vn
40 19
D 15 15 17 Telescope In 45ft Position 3 3 52 Spare D
41
24 16 16 18 Reserved (Beam Locked Signal) 37 37 53 Electric Motor 1 (T1)
20
17 17 19 Telescope Expand Cmd 38 38 54 Electric Motor 1 (T2)
23 21 18 18 20 Telescope Retract Cmd 39 39 55 Electric Motor 1 (T3)
22
19 19 21 Twistlock Unlock Cmd 41 41 56 Reserved (Electric Motor 2, T1)
20 20 22 Twistlock Lock Cmd 42 42 57 Reserved (Electric Motor 2, T2)
21 21 23 Twin Up Cmd 43 43 58 Reserved (Electric Motor 2, T3)
22 22 24 Flipper 1 Down Cmd 45 All Pins Locked (HB)
23 23 25 Twin Down Cmd
Pyle National 24 24 26 Flipper 2 Down Cmd
25 25 27 Twin Up Signal
E 26 26 28 Flipper 3 Down Cmd E
ZREP-24-352PN 27 27 29 Twin Down Signal
28 28 30 Flipper 4 Down Cmd
31 Not Connected
Male Insert (For Spreader) 29 29 32 Twin 20ft Condition
33 Not Connected
Socket On Spreader 30 30 34 TTDS 20ft Detection Bypass Cmd
35 Not Connected

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 40
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 41
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Pin layout TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A
LANDSIDE A

LHLS
RHLS S25 UNLOCKED S26 UNLOCKED X14
S29 LOCKED S30 LOCKED
HL1,HL2,HL3 HL4 S33 LANDED S34 LANDED HL5,HL6,HL7 Flipper 3
Flipper 4 S4 UNLOCKED
S37 TWIN UP S38 TWIN UP
S8 LOCKED S3 UNLOCKED
S12 LANDED X5 X6 S7 LOCKED
S47 FLIPPER 4 UP S11 LANDED
S46 FLIPPER 3 UP
WARNING ADVERTENCIA ADVERTENCIA WARNING

B G R W B G R W B
FLIPPER 1 Y1-Y2
FLIPPER 4 Y11-Y12
TWISTLOCK Y15-Y16 Pulley side

X3
Gear side
X2 Y3-Y4 FLIPPER 2
Y9-Y10 FLIPPER 3
Y7-Y8 TWISTLOCK
ADVERTENCIA WARNING WARNING ADVERTENCIA

C X4 X7 C
S1 UNLOCKED
S2 UNLOCKED
S5 LOCKED X4 AND X7 S24 UNLOCKED S27 UNLOCKED S6 LOCKED
S9 LANDED Y25-Y26 TWIN UP/DOWN S28 LOCKED S31 LOCKED X1 ELECTRICAL
Flipper 1 S10 LANDED Flipper 2
S44 FLIPPER 1 UP Y27-Y28 TWIN TWISTLOCK S32 LANDED S35 LANDED CABINET S45 FLIPPER 2 UP
Y43-Y44 TWIN LEGS HOOK LEFT S36 TWIN UP S39 TWIN UP
X13
RHSS TTDS S90
Y53-Y54 TWIN LEGS HOOK RIGHT
TTDS S91 LHSS
Y45-Y46 TWIN EXPAND/RETRACT LEFT SIDE
TTDS S92
Y55-Y56 TWIN EXPAND/RETRACT RIGHT SIDE
TTDS S93
TTDS S94 SOCKET XP1
TTDS S95
D D
TTDS S96 PYLE NATIONAL
SEASIDE
ZREP-24-352PN
Pulley side Gear side

LEFT DRAWBAR RIGHT DRAWBAR

E E
S100 S102 S160 S101 S103 S161
S119
S118 S113
DRAWBAR DRAWBAR

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

- STS45 41
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 42
F The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Spreader layout TOTAL SH.
F
- 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
- zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:44
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE 07/26/2007
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UNIT ITEM QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0 -BE1 1 =A1+X0/10.07 1001448 ABS. ENCODER HENGSTLER ACURO AC58/1212EK.72SBB.KO 0 566 237 10-30V/10M

X1 -HINK_X1 20 =A1+X0/5.04 76441 ALTERNATE JUMPER 280-409 WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 280-409 280-409

X1 -KA3 1 =A1+X0/8.07 79908 AUXILIARY CONTACTOR RELECO OEM C10A10X115A 115VAC 1 SWITCHING

X1 -KA2 1 =A1+X0/7.02 79908 AUXILIARY CONTACTOR RELECO OEM C10A10X115A 115VAC 1 SWITCHING

X1 -KA1 1 =A1+X0/7.01 79908 AUXILIARY CONTACTOR RELECO OEM C10A10X115A 115VAC 1 SWITCHING

X1 -F2 1 =A1+X0/5.07 79369 BLADE FUSE 10A Littelfuse ELFA AB 33-051-41

X1 -F3 1 =A1+X0/5.07 79582 BLADE FUSE 15A Littelfuse ELFA AB 33-051-58 33-051-58

X1 -F3 1 =A1+X0/5.07 79367 BLADE FUSE ATTACHMENT WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 282-696 282-696 TERMINAL

X1 -F2 1 =A1+X0/5.07 79367 BLADE FUSE ATTACHMENT WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 282-696 282-696 TERMINAL

X100 -HINK_X100 1 =A1+X0/29.08 1019885 CABINET X100 CANopen 1019885 1019885 STS,YTS Spreader 10 fuse

X0 -WX2 15 =A1+X0/28.00 1001860 CABLE LAPPKABEL MILTRONIC 060516 060516 CAN-OPEN 3X2X0.25+3X1.0

X0 -WXP1 6 =A1+X0/11.01 700206 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC TPE/PUR 49G2,5 BROMMA 07 98 13 49x2,5mm² PUR

X0 -WX3 15 =A1+X0/28.01 1001860 CABLE LAPPKABEL MILTRONIC 060516 060516 CAN-OPEN 3X2X0.25+3X1.0

X0 -WX4 7 =A1+X0/28.03 1001860 CABLE LAPPKABEL MILTRONIC 060516 060516 CAN-OPEN 3X2X0.25+3X1.0

X0 -WS80-82 6 =A1+X0/11.04 76291 CABLE ÖLFLEX -400P 10 05 91 5x1,5mm² PUR

X0 -WX5 7 =A1+X0/28.04 1001860 CABLE LAPPKABEL MILTRONIC 060516 060516 CAN-OPEN 3X2X0.25+3X1.0

X0 -WM1 6 =A1+X0/5.01 70996 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC ÖLFLEX -500P 10 05 61 4x2,5mm² PUR

X0 -WX6 7 =A1+X0/28.05 1001860 CABLE LAPPKABEL MILTRONIC 060516 060516 CAN-OPEN 3X2X0.25+3X1.0

X0 -WX7 7 =A1+X0/28.06 1001860 CABLE LAPPKABEL MILTRONIC 060516 060516 CAN-OPEN 3X2X0.25+3X1.0

X0 -WX13 7 =A1+X0/28.07 1001860 CABLE LAPPKABEL MILTRONIC 060516 060516 CAN-OPEN 3X2X0.25+3X1.0

X0 -WX14 7 =A1+X0/12.01 76427 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC ÖLFLEX 855P 07 23 33 12x1,5mm² PUR

X0 -WHE1 7 =A1+X0/5.02 76126 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC ÖLFLEX -500P 10 06 12 3x1,5mm² PUR

X0 -WX100:1 5 =A1+X0/29.04 1001860 CABLE LAPPKABEL MILTRONIC 060516 060516 CAN-OPEN 3X2X0.25+3X1.0

X0 -WX100:2 5 =A1+X0/29.06 79347 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC ÖLFLEX 400P 10 05 09 12x2.5mm² PUR

X1 -HINK_X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 72075 CABLE CHANNEL 25X80 RITTAL RITTAL 21165

X1 -HINK_X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 700191 CABLE CHANNEL 40X80 RITTAL 21166

X1 -HINK_X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 72074 CABLE CHANNEL 60X80 RITTAL RITTAL 21167

X0 -WS95-96 1 =A1+X0/26.07 700959 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2 RKWT/LED A4-3-90/1M 404917 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS90-91 1 =A1+X0/26.01 700959 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2 RKWT/LED A4-3-90/1M 404917 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS92-93 1 =A1+X0/26.03 700959 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2 RKWT/LED A4-3-90/1M 404917 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS94 1 =A1+X0/26.05 79290 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0M LUMBERG MILTRONIC RSWT 4-RKWT 4-165/1.0M 40 54 61 M12 2xANGLE

X0 -WY11-Y12 1 =A1+X0/15.05 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

X0 -WY15-16 1 =A1+X0/15.01 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

X0 -WY53-Y54 1 =A1+X0/25.07 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

X0 -WY27-Y28 1 =A1+X0/19.03 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

X0 -WY43-Y44 1 =A1+X0/25.05 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

X0 -WY3-Y4 1 =A1+X0/17.03 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 42
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 43
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Parts list: (1001448 - 1016253) TOTAL SH.
Part List contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
UNIT ITEM QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0 -WY7-Y8 1 =A1+X0/17.01 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

X0 -WY25-Y26 1 =A1+X0/19.01 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

X0 -WY9-Y10 1 =A1+X0/17.05 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

X0 -WY1-Y2 1 =A1+X0/15.03 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,

X0 -WS9-S44 1 =A1+X0/14.05 79903 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2-RKWT/LED A 4-3-90/2.0M 40 49 18 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS3-S7 1 =A1+X0/16.01 79903 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2-RKWT/LED A 4-3-90/2.0M 40 49 18 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS1-S5 1 =A1+X0/14.01 79903 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2-RKWT/LED A 4-3-90/2.0M 40 49 18 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS12-S47 1 =A1+X0/14.07 79903 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2-RKWT/LED A 4-3-90/2.0M 40 49 18 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS11-S46 1 =A1+X0/16.05 79903 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2-RKWT/LED A 4-3-90/2.0M 40 49 18 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS4-S8 1 =A1+X0/14.03 79903 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2-RKWT/LED A 4-3-90/2.0M 40 49 18 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS2-S6 1 =A1+X0/16.03 79903 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2-RKWT/LED A 4-3-90/2.0M 40 49 18 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -W10-S45 1 =A1+X0/16.07 79903 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2-RKWT/LED A 4-3-90/2.0M 40 49 18 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS113 1 =A1+X0/24.01 700960 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2 RKWT/LED A4-3-90/2,5M 40 49 21 M12 Twin cable Prox.

X0 -WS112 1 =A1+X0/22.01 79294 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M LUMBERG MILTRONIC RSWT 4-RKWT 4-165/2,5M 40 49 06 M12 2xANGLE

X0 -WY45-Y46 1 =A1+X0/25.01 701219 CABLE CONNECTOR 2M MPM OEM E001088-200 M12 ANGLE TWIN SUPPRESSORS 24VDC

X0 -WY55-Y56 1 =A1+X0/25.03 701219 CABLE CONNECTOR 2M MPM OEM E001088-200 M12 ANGLE TWIN SUPPRESSORS 24VDC

X0 -WY41 1 =A1+X0/23.01 79332 CABLE CONNECTOR 3,0M MURRELEKTRONIK BALLUFF 33115 M12 SUPPRESSOR 24VDC ANGLE

X0 -WS119 1 =A1+X0/24.07 79295 CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M RSWT 4-RKWT 4-165/3.5M 40 49 07 M12 2xANGLE

X0 -WY18 1 =A1+X0/10.02 77000 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M MURR BALLUFF 3124338 3112007 SUPPRESSOR 24VDC ZDIOD

X0 -WY17 1 =A1+X0/10.01 77000 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M MURR BALLUFF 3124338 3112007 SUPPRESSOR 24VDC ZDIOD

X0 -WS81 1 =A1+X0/10.06 70395 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M MILTRONIC MILTRONIC RKWT 4-165/5 40 51 89 M12 ANGLE FEMALE open end

X0 -WHL4 1 =A1+X0/12.08 70396 CABLE CONNECTOR 10M LUMBERG MILTRONIC RKWT 5-228/10M 40 51 92 M12 ANGLE FEMALE open end

X0 -WBD1 1 =A1+X0/10.05 77043 CABLE CONNECTOR 10M SHIELDED REGAR REGAR 6101 PUR SHIELDED FOR LINEAR POTENTIAL SENSORS

X0 -WTWIN9 1 =A1+X0/22.03 1002209 CABLE CONNECTOR 10m OEM OEM AUTOMATIC MULTICABLE 1TWIN+1 ANGLE M12+3XM12 ANGLE

X0 -WTWIN10 1 =A1+X0/24.03 1002209 CABLE CONNECTOR 10m OEM OEM AUTOMATIC MULTICABLE 1TWIN+1 ANGLE M12+3XM12 ANGLE

X0 -WHL1-3 1 =A1+X0/7.01 79581 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M LUMBERG IFM E10965 E10965 5x0.34mm, female angle, 30VAC / 36VDC

X0 -WHL5-7 1 =A1+X0/12.05 79581 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M LUMBERG IFM E10965 E10965 5x0.34mm, female angle, 30VAC / 36VDC

X1 -HINK_X1 50 =A1+X0/5.04 75381 CABLE RK1.5mm2 RED

X1 -HINK_X1 50 =A1+X0/5.04 76577 CABLE RK 1.5 BLUE TÄLJE EL-PRODUKTER AB RK 1.5 BLÅ

X1 -HINK_X1 10 =A1+X0/5.04 76131 CABLE RK 2.5 YELLOW/GREEN PE MILTRONIC AB 02-034-92 11 01 48

X0 -WS84 1 =A1+X0/13.06 79581 CABLECONECTORX0,34 10m LUMBERG IFM ELECTRONIC AB E10965

X0 -WS83 1 =A1+X0/13.05 79581 CABLECONECTORX0,34 10m LUMBERG IFM ELECTRONIC AB E10965

X0 -X5 1 =A1+X0/20.00 1001762 CAN-OPEN SLAVE 8I80 IFM-ELECTRONIC IFM-ELECTRONIC CR9011 CR9011

X0 -X13 1 =A1+X0/26.00 1001762 CAN-OPEN SLAVE 8I80 IFM-ELECTRONIC IFM-ELECTRONIC CR9011 CR9011

X0 -X4 1 =A1+X0/18.00 1001762 CAN-OPEN SLAVE 8I80 IFM-ELECTRONIC IFM-ELECTRONIC CR9011 CR9011

X0 -X7 1 =A1+X0/24.00 1001762 CAN-OPEN SLAVE 8I80 IFM-ELECTRONIC IFM-ELECTRONIC CR9011 CR9011

X0 -X3 1 =A1+X0/16.00 1001762 CAN-OPEN SLAVE 8I80 IFM-ELECTRONIC IFM-ELECTRONIC CR9011 CR9011

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 43
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 44
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Parts list: (1016253 - 1001762) TOTAL SH.
Part List contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
UNIT ITEM QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0 -X6 1 =A1+X0/22.00 1001762 CAN-OPEN SLAVE 8I80 IFM-ELECTRONIC IFM-ELECTRONIC CR9011 CR9011

X0 -X2 1 =A1+X0/14.00 1001762 CAN-OPEN SLAVE 8I80 IFM-ELECTRONIC IFM-ELECTRONIC CR9011 CR9011

X0 -Cabinet X1 4 =A1+X0/5.04 1007512 DIX M25 2X6MM

X0 -Cabinet X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 78692 EARTH BRAID 250mm ELFA ELFA AB 55 090 54 55-097-57

X0 -Cabinet X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 700928 EARTH-RAIL 12/3 ABB Nordkomp. ABB Nordkomp. SK117905-12 SK117905-12

X1 -1 1 =A1+X0/6.03 700006 EEPROM CC-SYSTEM CC SERVICES AB

X1 -F3 1 =A1+X0/5.07 79583 ENDPLATE 282-333 HELLERMANN TYTON AB 282-333

X1 -F2 1 =A1+X0/5.07 79583 ENDPLATE 282-333 HELLERMANN TYTON AB 282-333

X0 -Cabinet X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 1008577 Electrical Cabinet With IP65 Bromma Bromma

X1 -R5 1 =A1+X0/12.06 1026699 End-and intermediate plate WAGO WAGO 280-326 280-326 Used with PN 1014207

X1 -R3 1 =A1+X0/8.07 1026699 End-and intermediate plate WAGO WAGO 280-326 280-326 Used with PN 1014207

X1 -R4 1 =A1+X0/12.05 1026699 End-and intermediate plate WAGO WAGO 280-326 280-326 Used with PN 1014207

X1 -R7 1 =A1+X0/12.08 1026699 End-and intermediate plate WAGO WAGO 280-326 280-326 Used with PN 1014207

X1 -R6 1 =A1+X0/12.07 1026699 End-and intermediate plate WAGO WAGO 280-326 280-326 Used with PN 1014207

X1 -R2 1 =A1+X0/7.02 1026699 End-and intermediate plate WAGO WAGO 280-326 280-326 Used with PN 1014207

X1 -R1 1 =A1+X0/7.01 1026699 End-and intermediate plate WAGO WAGO 280-326 280-326 Used with PN 1014207

X1 -HINK_X1 100 =A1+X0/5.04 79921 FERRULE 2.5 ISOL WEIDMÜLLER AB WEIDMÜLLER AB 10-00900436-1 9004360000

X1 -HINK_X1 100 =A1+X0/5.04 701313 FERRULES 1.0 ISOL WAGO WAGO 216-233 216-233

X1 -HINK_X1 100 =A1+X0/5.04 79919 FERULLE 1.5 ISOL WEIDMÜLLER AB WEIDMÜLLER AB 10-00900429-1 9004340000

X0 -Cabinet X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 70929 GLAND MS PG11 5-10mm MILTRONIC MILTRONIC AB SKINTOP-MS11 12 07 82

X14 -HINK_X1 1 =A1+X0/12.00 70931 GLAND MS PG16 10-14mm MILTRONIC MILTRONIC AB SKINTOP-MS16 12 07 84

X0 -Cabinet X1 2 =A1+X0/5.04 701016 GLAND MS-M16 4.5-10mm SKINTOP MILTRONIC SKINTOP MS-M16 12 58 11 M16x1.5

X0 -Cabinet X1 3 =A1+X0/5.04 701017 GLAND MS-M20 7-13mm SKINTOP MILTRONIC SKINTOP MS-M20 12 58 12 M20x1.5

X0 -Cabinet X1 4 =A1+X0/5.04 701018 GLAND MS-M25 9-17mm SKINTOP MILTRONIC SKINTOP MS-M25 12 58 13 M25x1.5

X0 -Cabinet X1 5 =A1+X0/5.04 701019 GLAND MS-M32 11-21mm SKINTOP MILTRONIC SKINTOP MS-M32 12 58 14 M32x1.5

X0 -Cabinet X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 1015861 GLAND MS-M63 34-45MM SKINTOP/Miltronic

X0 -Cabinet X1 2 =A1+X0/5.04 1001909 GLAND NUT LAPP MILTRONIC 121261 FOR GLAND M16

X0 -Cabinet X1 5 =A1+X0/5.04 1001912 GLAND NUT LAPP MILTRONIC 121264 FOR GLAND M32

X0 -Cabinet X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 1001911 GLAND NUT LAPP MILTRONIC 121263 FOR GLAND M25

X0 -Cabinet X1 3 =A1+X0/5.04 1001910 GLAND NUT LAPP MILTRONIC 121262 FOR GLAND M20

X0 -Cabinet X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 1015862 GLAND NUT FOR GLAND M63 SKINTOP/Miltronicc

X1 -P1 1 =A1+X0/5.00 701654 HOUR COUNTER 440VAC/60Hz BAUSER GYCOM SVENSKA AB 632, 440VAC/60Hz 632 A2, 440VAC/60Hz

X0 -B1 1 =A1+X0/6.02 38905 IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS² CC-SYSTEM CC-SYSTEM SEE DRAWING 38905

X0 -B1 22 =A1+X0/6.02 1001748 INPUT MODULE 0-120VAC DELCON DELCON G4/SLI120CRP G4/SLI120CRP Sek: 0-60VDC 50mA

X0 -B1 5 =A1+X0/6.02 78601 INPUT MODULE DC OPTO22 ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB G4IDC5 G4 IDC 5 24 VDC

X14 -HINK_X1 1 =A1+X0/12.00 700172 JUNCTION BOX 8 HOLES TELEMECANIQUE SCHNEIDER XAPA2108 XAPA 2108

X0 -HL1 1 =A1+X0/7.01 1001400 LED LAMPS EKTA EKTA E5813.GRW E5813.GRW 24VDC M12 GREEN, RED, WHITE

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 44
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 45
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Parts list: (1001762 - 1001400) TOTAL SH.
Part List contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
UNIT ITEM QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0 -HL5 1 =A1+X0/12.05 1001400 LED LAMPS EKTA EKTA E5813.GRW E5813.GRW 24VDC M12 GREEN, RED, WHITE

X0 -HL4 1 =A1+X0/12.08 1001403 LED LAMPS EKTA EKTA E5811.B E5811.B 24VDC M12 BLUE

X1 -HINK_X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 70024 MARKING 1-50 -X2 WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 209-566 209-566

X0 -WTWIN6 1 =A1+X0/20.05 1017442 Multi Cable Separated Twin

X0 -WTWIN5 1 =A1+X0/20.01 1017442 Multi Cable Separated Twin

X0 -WTWIN4 1 =A1+X0/18.01 1017442 Multi Cable Separated Twin

X0 -WTWIN7 1 =A1+X0/18.05 1017442 Multi Cable Separated Twin

X0 -B1 15 =A1+X0/6.02 1001750 OUTPUT MODULE 0-240VAC DELCON DELCON G4/SLO5TR G4/SLO5TR Sek: 0-24VAC 3A

X0 -B1 5 =A1+X0/6.02 78603 OUTPUT MODULE DC OPTO22 ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB G40DC5 G4 ODC 5 24VDC 4A

X1 -G1 1 =A1+X0/5.06 1001859 POWER SUPPLY 90-275V/25VDC PRIMEPOWER OEM-AUTOMATIC 0036515 30A/0-400Hz

X0 -S81 1 =A1+X0/10.06 700176 PRESSURE GUARD 0-10V DANFOSS OEM-AUTOMATIC 060G1777 3374084907

X0 -S4 1 =A1+X0/14.03 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S30 1 =A1+X0/20.06 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S5 1 =A1+X0/14.02 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S31 1 =A1+X0/18.06 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S6 1 =A1+X0/16.04 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S32 1 =A1+X0/18.03 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S7 1 =A1+X0/16.02 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S33 1 =A1+X0/20.03 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S8 1 =A1+X0/14.04 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S34 1 =A1+X0/20.07 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S9 1 =A1+X0/14.05 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S35 1 =A1+X0/18.07 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S112 1 =A1+X0/22.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S36 1 =A1+X0/18.04 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S113 1 =A1+X0/24.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S10 1 =A1+X0/16.07 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S37 1 =A1+X0/20.04 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S11 1 =A1+X0/16.05 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S118 1 =A1+X0/24.02 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S38 1 =A1+X0/20.08 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S119 1 =A1+X0/24.07 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S12 1 =A1+X0/14.07 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S160 1 =A1+X0/22.05 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S161 1 =A1+X0/24.05 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S39 1 =A1+X0/18.08 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S24 1 =A1+X0/18.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 45
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 46
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Parts list: (1001400 - 1002367) TOTAL SH.
Part List contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
UNIT ITEM QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0 -S44 1 =A1+X0/14.06 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S45 1 =A1+X0/16.08 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S25 1 =A1+X0/20.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S46 1 =A1+X0/16.06 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S47 1 =A1+X0/14.08 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S26 1 =A1+X0/20.05 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S27 1 =A1+X0/18.05 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S1 1 =A1+X0/14.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S28 1 =A1+X0/18.02 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S2 1 =A1+X0/16.03 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S3 1 =A1+X0/16.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X0 -S29 1 =A1+X0/20.02 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)

X1 -P2 1 =A1+X0/13.08 76140 PULSECOUNTER 190.07 24V DC BAUSER METRIC AB 632 A.2 24VDC 24-2032-25DC

X14 -SB17 1 =A1+X0/12.04 1001018 PUSH button BLACK TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AP21 XB5-AP21 Complete with 1NO block, silicon cover,

X14 -SB16 1 =A1+X0/12.03 1001018 PUSH button BLACK TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AP21 XB5-AP21 Complete with 1NO block, silicon cover,

X14 -SB13 1 =A1+X0/12.02 1001018 PUSH button BLACK TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AP21 XB5-AP21 Complete with 1NO block, silicon cover,

X14 -SB10 1 =A1+X0/9.03 1001018 PUSH button BLACK TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AP21 XB5-AP21 Complete with 1NO block, silicon cover,

X14 -SB12 1 =A1+X0/12.01 1001018 PUSH button BLACK TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AP21 XB5-AP21 Complete with 1NO block, silicon cover,

X14 -SB11 1 =A1+X0/9.04 1001018 PUSH button BLACK TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AP21 XB5-AP21 Complete with 1NO block, silicon cover,

X1 -HINK_X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 71986 RAIL DIN 35 HELLERMANN TYTON AB TS 35 C/20

X1 -KA3 1 =A1+X0/8.07 79905 RELAY SOCKET 1-SWITCHING RELECO OEM-AUTOMATIC AB S-10 S-10 Relay socket 1switching

X1 -KA2 1 =A1+X0/7.02 79905 RELAY SOCKET 1-SWITCHING RELECO OEM-AUTOMATIC AB S-10 S-10 Relay socket 1switching

X1 -KA1 1 =A1+X0/7.01 79905 RELAY SOCKET 1-SWITCHING RELECO OEM-AUTOMATIC AB S-10 S-10 Relay socket 1switching

X0 -R1 1 =A1+X0/14.09 1002390 RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W Elfa Elfa 60-103-83 60-103-83

X0 -R2 1 =A1+X0/16.09 1002390 RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W Elfa Elfa 60-103-83 60-103-83

X0 -B1 1 =A1+X0/6.02 37524 SCS² PLC Bromma CC-System

X0 -WB1:XP1 1 =A1+X0/7.00 1002266 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR BROMMA ÖLFLEX 855P 1002266 With Deutsch 50p and rubber boot

X0 -WB1:XP2 1 =A1+X0/10.01 1002267 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR BROMMA ÖLFLEX 855P 1002267 With Deutsch 50p and rubber boot

X0 -WB1:XP3 1 =A1+X0/11.01 1002268 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR BROMMA ÖLFLEX 855P 1002268 With Deutsch 50p and rubber boot

X1 -SS2 1 =A1+X0/13.07 70536 SIGNPLATE (+GRAVERING) TELEMECANIQUE IDEALGRAVYR AB GRAVERING ENL BILAGA

X1 -HINK_X1 1 =A1+X0/5.04 76924 STRIPS T30R L=150 HELLERMANN TYTON AB T30R L=150MM SVART

X0 -XP1 1 1006197 Socket (58P) Pyle National Pyle National ZREP-24-352PN ZREP-24-352PN Male Insert

X14 -HINK_X1 1 =A1+X0/12.00 1002234 Teach box Lable BROMMA 1002234 English

X14 -SS1 1 =A1+X0/13.07 1000715 Trigger action button red TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AS8445 XB5-AS8445 Red Ø40, complete with 1NO and 1NC block

X1 -SS2 1 =A1+X0/13.07 1000715 Trigger action button red TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AS8445 XB5-AS8445 Red Ø40, complete with 1NO and 1NC block

X0 -S83 1 =A1+X0/13.05 700188 ULTRA SONIC SENSOR SIEMENS 3RG6014-3AF00 600->6000mm

X0 -S84 1 =A1+X0/13.06 700188 ULTRA SONIC SENSOR SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RG6014-3AF00 600->6000mm

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 46
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 47
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Parts list: (1002367 - 700188) TOTAL SH.
Part List contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
UNIT ITEM QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0 -WY1-Y2 1 =A1+X0/15.03 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

X0 -WY7-Y8 1 =A1+X0/17.01 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

X0 -WY53-Y54 1 =A1+X0/25.07 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

X0 -WY15-16 1 =A1+X0/15.01 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

X0 -WY27-Y28 1 =A1+X0/19.03 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

X0 -WY25-Y26 1 =A1+X0/19.01 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

X0 -WY43-Y44 1 =A1+X0/25.05 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

X0 -WY9-Y10 1 =A1+X0/17.05 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

X0 -WY11-Y12 1 =A1+X0/15.05 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

X0 -WY3-Y4 1 =A1+X0/17.03 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 47
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 48
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Parts list: (1016254 - 1016254) TOTAL SH.
Part List contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-W10-S45 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 A =A1+X3-XP7 4 =A1+X0-S10 4 1 =A1+X0/16.07

=A1+X0-W10-S45 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 B =A1+X3-XP7 2 =A1+X0-S45 2 1 =A1+X0/16.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 1 =A1+X1-B1 :L =A1+B1-XPX1 :44 1 =A1+X0/7.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 2 =A1+X1-X1 :131 =A1+B1-XPX1 :31 1 =A1+X0/7.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 3 =A1+X1-X1 :141 =A1+B1-XPX1 :41 1 =A1+X0/7.02

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 4 =A1+X1-X1 :10 =A1+B1-XPX1 :43 1 =A1+X0/7.03

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 5 =A1+X1-X1 :12 =A1+B1-XPX1 :42 1 =A1+X0/7.04

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 6 =A1+X1-B1 :L =A1+B1-XPX1 :21 1 =A1+X0/7.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 7 =A1+X1-X1 :13 =A1+B1-XPX1 :3 1 =A1+X0/7.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 8 =A1+X1-X1 :14 =A1+B1-XPX1 :2 1 =A1+X0/7.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 9 =A1+X1-X1 :27 =A1+B1-XPX1 :11 1 =A1+X0/7.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 10 =A1+X1-X1 :29 =A1+B1-XPX1 :1 1 =A1+X0/7.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 11 =A1+X1-B1 :L =A1+B1-XPX1 :8 1 =A1+X0/8.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 12 =A1+X1-X1 :15 =A1+B1-XPX1 :26 1 =A1+X0/8.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 13 =A1+X1-X1 :16 =A1+B1-XPX1 :16 1 =A1+X0/8.02

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 14 =A1+X1-X1 :17 =A1+B1-XPX1 :6 1 =A1+X0/8.03

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 15 =A1+X1-X1 :32 =A1+B1-XPX1 :7 1 =A1+X0/8.04

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 16 =A1+X1-B1 :L =A1+B1-XPX1 :35 1 =A1+X0/8.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 17 =A1+X1-X1 :38 =A1+B1-XPX1 :4 1 =A1+X0/8.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 18 =A1+X1-X1 :37 =A1+B1-XPX1 :5 1 =A1+X0/8.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 19 =A1+X1-X1 :125 =A1+B1-XPX1 :25 1 =A1+X0/8.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 20 =A1+X1-X1 :115 =A1+B1-XPX1 :15 1 =A1+X0/8.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 21 =A1+X1-X1 :N =A1+B1-XPX1 :9 1 =A1+X0/9.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 22 =A1+X1-X1 :1 =A1+B1-XPX1 :10 1 =A1+X0/9.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 23 =A1+X1-X1 :2 =A1+B1-XPX1 :20 1 =A1+X0/9.02

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 24 =A1+X1-X1 :130 =A1+B1-XPX1 :30 1 =A1+X0/9.03

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 25 =A1+X1-X1 :140 =A1+B1-XPX1 :40 1 =A1+X0/9.04

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 26 =A1+X1-X1 :N =A1+B1-XPX1 :50 1 =A1+X0/9.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 27 =A1+X1-X1 :19 =A1+B1-XPX1 :46 1 =A1+X0/9.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 28 =A1+X1-X1 :20 =A1+B1-XPX1 :47 1 =A1+X0/9.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 29 =A1+X1-X1 :21 =A1+B1-XPX1 :49 1 =A1+X0/9.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002266 30 =A1+X1-X1 :22 =A1+B1-XPX1 :48 1 =A1+X0/9.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 31

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 48
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 49
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 32

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 33

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 34

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 35

=A1+X0-WB1:XP1 PE

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 1 =A1+X1-X1 :242 =A1+B1-XPX2 42 1 =A1+X0/6.04

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 2 =A1+X1-X1 :243 =A1+B1-XPX2 43 1 =A1+X0/6.04

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 3 =A1+X1-X1 :245 =A1+B1-XPX2 45 1 =A1+X0/6.04

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 4 =A1+X1-X1 :244 =A1+B1-XPX2 44 1 =A1+X0/6.04

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 5 =A1+X1-X2 :217 =A1+B1-XPX2 17 1 =A1+X0/10.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 6 =A1+X1-X2 :207 =A1+B1-XPX2 7 1 =A1+X0/10.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 7 =A1+X1-X2 :218 =A1+B1-XPX2 18 1 =A1+X0/10.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 8 =A1+X1-X2 :228 =A1+B1-XPX2 28 1 =A1+X0/10.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 9 =A1+X1-X2 :208 =A1+B1-XPX2 8 1 =A1+X0/10.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 10 =A1+X1-X2 :227 =A1+B1-XPX2 27 1 =A1+X0/10.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 11

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 12

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 13 =A1+X1-X2 :203 =A1+B1-XPX2 3 1 =A1+X0/10.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 14 =A1+X1-X2 :204 =A1+B1-XPX2 4 1 =A1+X0/10.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 15 =A1+X1-X2 :202 =A1+B1-XPX2 2 1 =A1+X0/10.02

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 16 =A1+X1-X2 :201 =A1+B1-XPX2 1 1 =A1+X0/10.02

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 17

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 18

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 19

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 20

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 21 =A1+X1-X2 :225 =A1+B1-XPX2 25 1 =A1+X0/10.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 22 =A1+X1-X2 :215 =A1+B1-XPX2 15 1 =A1+X0/10.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 23 =A1+X1-X2 :235 =A1+B1-XPX2 35 1 =A1+X0/10.09

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 24 =A1+X1-X2 :205 =A1+B1-XPX2 5 1 =A1+X0/10.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 25 =A1+X1-X1 :236 =A1+B1-XPX2 :36 1 =A1+X0/6.03

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 26 =A1+X1-X1 :216 =A1+B1-XPX2 :16 1 =A1+X0/6.02

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 27 =A1+X1-X1 :226 =A1+B1-XPX2 :26 1 =A1+X0/6.03

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 28 =A1+X1-X1 :206 =A1+B1-XPX2 :6 1 =A1+X0/6.02

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 49
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 50
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 29 =A1+X1-X2 :238 =A1+B1-XPX2 38 1 =A1+X0/10.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 30 =A1+X1-X2 :237 =A1+B1-XPX2 37 1 =A1+X0/10.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 31

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 32

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002267 33 =A1+X1-X1 :PE =A1+B1-XPX2 :48 1 =A1+X0/6.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 34

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 35

=A1+X0-WB1:XP2 PE

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 1 =A1+X1-B1 :N =A1+B1-XPX3 :11 1 =A1+X0/11.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 2 =A1+X1-X1 :23 =A1+B1-XPX3 :21 1 =A1+X0/11.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 3 =A1+X1-X1 :25 =A1+B1-XPX3 :31 1 =A1+X0/11.02

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 4 =A1+X1-X1 :34 =A1+B1-XPX3 :41 1 =A1+X0/11.03

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 5 =A1+X1-X1 :342 =A1+B1-XPX3 :42 1 =A1+X0/11.04

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 6 =A1+X1-B1 :N =A1+B1-XPX3 :43 1 =A1+X0/11.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 7 =A1+X1-X1 :36 =A1+B1-XPX3 :24 1 =A1+X0/11.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 8 =A1+X1-X1 :41 =A1+B1-XPX3 :35 1 =A1+X0/11.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 9 =A1+X1-X1 :42 =A1+B1-XPX3 :44 1 =A1+X0/11.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 10 =A1+X1-X1 :345 =A1+B1-XPX3 :45 1 =A1+X0/11.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 11 =A1+X1-X1 :- =A1+B1-XPX3 :1 1 =A1+X0/12.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 12 =A1+X1-X1 :305 =A1+B1-XPX3 :5 1 =A1+X0/12.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 13 =A1+X1-X1 :304 =A1+B1-XPX3 :4 1 =A1+X0/12.02

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 14 =A1+X1-X1 :303 =A1+B1-XPX3 :3 1 =A1+X0/12.03

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 15 =A1+X1-X1 :302 =A1+B1-XPX3 :2 1 =A1+X0/12.04

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 16 =A1+X1-X1 :B1+ =A1+B1-XPX3 :15 1 =A1+X0/12.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 19 =A1+X1-R6 1 =A1+B1-XPX3 :25 1 =A1+X0/12.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 18

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 18 =A1+X1-R5 1 =A1+B1-XPX3 :16 1 =A1+X0/12.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 20

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 21 =A1+X1-B1 :N =A1+B1-XPX4 :36 1 =A1+X0/13.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 22 =A1+X1-X1 :24 =A1+B1-XPX4 :49 1 =A1+X0/13.01

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 23 =A1+X1-X1 :26 =A1+B1-XPX4 :48 1 =A1+X0/13.02

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 24 =A1+X1-X1 :28 =A1+B1-XPX4 :47 1 =A1+X0/13.03

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 25 =A1+X1-X1 :30 =A1+B1-XPX4 :46 1 =A1+X0/13.04

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 50
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 51
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 26 =A1+X1-B1 :- =A1+B1-XPX4 :8 1 =A1+X0/13.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 27 =A1+X1-X1 :307 =A1+B1-XPX4 :7 1 =A1+X0/13.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 28 =A1+X1-B1 :- =A1+B1-XPX4 :10 1 =A1+X0/13.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 29 =A1+X1-X1 :309 =A1+B1-XPX4 :9 1 =A1+X0/13.06

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 30 =A1+X1-B1 :- =A1+B1-XPX4 :40 1 =A1+X0/13.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 31 =A1+X1-X1 :350 =A1+B1-XPX4 :50 1 =A1+X0/13.07

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 32 =A1+X1-B1 :+ =A1+B1-XPX4 :20 1 =A1+X0/13.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 33 =A1+X1-X1 :330 =A1+B1-XPX4 :30 1 =A1+X0/13.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 20 =A1+X1-R7 1 =A1+B1-XPX3 :26 1 =A1+X0/12.08

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR 1002268 17 =A1+X1-R4 1 =A1+B1-XPX3 :6 1 =A1+X0/12.05

=A1+X0-WB1:XP3 PE

=A1+X0-WBD1 CABLE CONNECTOR 10M SHIELDED 77043 3 =A1+X1-X2 :218 =A1+X0-BD1 3 1 =A1+X0/10.05

=A1+X0-WBD1 CABLE CONNECTOR 10M SHIELDED 77043 2 =A1+X1-X2 :208 =A1+X0-BD1 2 1 =A1+X0/10.05

=A1+X0-WBD1 CABLE CONNECTOR 10M SHIELDED 77043 1 =A1+X1-X2 :228 =A1+X0-BD1 1 1 =A1+X0/10.05

=A1+X0-WBE1 1 =A1+X1-X2 :205 =A1+X0-BE1 001 =A1+X0/10.07

=A1+X0-WBE1 2 =A1+X1-X2 :215 =A1+X0-BE1 002 =A1+X0/10.07

=A1+X0-WBE1 3 =A1+X1-X2 :238 =A1+X0-BE1 003 =A1+X0/10.07

=A1+X0-WBE1 4 =A1+X1-X2 :237 =A1+X0-BE1 004 =A1+X0/10.08

=A1+X0-WBE1 5 =A1+X1-X2 :225 =A1+X0-BE1 006 =A1+X0/10.08

=A1+X0-WBE1 6 =A1+X1-X2 :235 =A1+X0-BE1 007 =A1+X0/10.09

=A1+X0-WHE1 CABLE 76126 Bn =A1+X1-X1 :50 =A1+X0-R3 1 7 =A1+X0/5.02

=A1+X0-WHE1 CABLE 76126 Bu =A1+X1-X1 :51 =A1+X0-R3 2 7 =A1+X0/5.02

=A1+X0-WHE1 PE

=A1+X0-WHL4 BN

=A1+X0-WHL4 WH

=A1+X0-WHL4 CABLE CONNECTOR 10M 70396 BK =A1+X1-X1 :340 =A1+X0-HL4 1 1 =A1+X0/12.08

=A1+X0-WHL4 CABLE CONNECTOR 10M 70396 BU =A1+X1-X1 :- =A1+X0-HL4 2 1 =A1+X0/12.08

=A1+X0-WHL4 GY

=A1+X0-WHL1-3 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M 79581 Bk =A1+X1-X1 :150 =A1+X0-HL1 1 1 =A1+X0/7.01

=A1+X0-WHL1-3 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M 79581 Wh =A1+X1-X1 :151 =A1+X0-HL2 1 1 =A1+X0/7.02

=A1+X0-WHL1-3 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M 79581 Bn =A1+X1-X1 :152 =A1+X0-HL3 1 1 =A1+X0/8.07

=A1+X0-WHL1-3 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M 79581 Bu =A1+X1-X1 :- =A1+X0-HL1 2 1 =A1+X0/7.01

=A1+X0-WHL5-7 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M 79581 Bu =A1+X1-X1 :- =A1+X0-HL5 2 1 =A1+X0/12.05

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 51
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 52
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WHL5-7 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M 79581 Bk =A1+X1-X1 :337 =A1+X0-HL5 1 1 =A1+X0/12.05

=A1+X0-WHL5-7 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M 79581 Wh =A1+X1-X1 :338 =A1+X0-HL6 1 1 =A1+X0/12.06

=A1+X0-WHL5-7 CABLE CONNECTOR X0,34 10M 79581 Bn =A1+X1-X1 :339 =A1+X0-HL7 1 1 =A1+X0/12.07

=A1+X0-WM1 CABLE 70996 Bn =A1+X1-X1 :T1 =A1+X0-M1 U1 6 =A1+X0/5.01

=A1+X0-WM1 CABLE 70996 Bk =A1+X1-X1 :T2 =A1+X0-M1 V1 6 =A1+X0/5.01

=A1+X0-WM1 CABLE 70996 Bu =A1+X1-X1 :T3 =A1+X0-M1 W1 6 =A1+X0/5.01

=A1+X0-WM1 CABLE 70996 PE =A1+X1-X1 :PE =A1+X0-M1 PE 6 =A1+X0/5.02

=A1+X0-WS81 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M 70395 BN =A1+X1-X2 :227 =A1+X0-S81 BN 1 =A1+X0/10.06

=A1+X0-WS81 WH

=A1+X0-WS81 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M 70395 BU =A1+X1-X2 :207 =A1+X0-S81 BU 1 =A1+X0/10.06

=A1+X0-WS81 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M 70395 BK =A1+X1-X2 :217 =A1+X0-S81 BK 1 =A1+X0/10.06

=A1+X0-WS81 GY

=A1+X0-WS83 CABLECONECTORX0,34 10m 79581 4 =A1+X1-X1 :307 =A1+X0-S83 4 1 =A1+X0/13.05

=A1+X0-WS84 CABLECONECTORX0,34 10m 79581 4 =A1+X1-X1 :309 =A1+X0-S84 4 1 =A1+X0/13.06

=A1+X0-WS94 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0M 79290 4 =A1+X0-S94 4 =A1+X13-XP5 4 1 =A1+X0/26.05

=A1+X0-WS94 2

=A1+X0-WS94 3

=A1+X0-WS112 1

=A1+X0-WS112 2

=A1+X0-WS112 3

=A1+X0-WS112 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M 79294 4 =A1+X0-S112 4 =A1+X6-XP1 4 1 =A1+X0/22.01

=A1+X0-WS113 1

=A1+X0-WS113 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M 700960 A =A1+X7-XP1 4 =A1+X0-S113 4 1 =A1+X0/24.01

=A1+X0-WS113 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M 700960 B =A1+X7-XP1 2 =A1+X0-S118 4 1 =A1+X0/24.02

=A1+X0-WS113 3

=A1+X0-WS119 1

=A1+X0-WS119 2

=A1+X0-WS119 3

=A1+X0-WS119 CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M 79295 4 =A1+X0-S119 4 =A1+X7-XP7 4 1 =A1+X0/24.07

=A1+X0-WS1-S5 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 A =A1+X2-XP1 4 =A1+X0-S1 4 1 =A1+X0/14.01

=A1+X0-WS1-S5 A

=A1+X0-WS1-S5 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 B =A1+X2-XP1 2 =A1+X0-S5 4 1 =A1+X0/14.02

=A1+X0-WS1-S5 3

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 52
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 53
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WS2-S6 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 A =A1+X3-XP3 4 =A1+X0-S2 4 1 =A1+X0/16.03

=A1+X0-WS2-S6 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 B =A1+X3-XP3 2 =A1+X0-S6 4 1 =A1+X0/16.04

=A1+X0-WS2-S6 B

=A1+X0-WS2-S6 3

=A1+X0-WS3-S7 1

=A1+X0-WS3-S7 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 A =A1+X3-XP1 4 =A1+X0-S3 4 1 =A1+X0/16.01

=A1+X0-WS3-S7 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 B =A1+X3-XP1 2 =A1+X0-S7 4 1 =A1+X0/16.02

=A1+X0-WS3-S7 3

=A1+X0-WS4-S8 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 A =A1+X2-XP3 4 =A1+X0-S4 4 1 =A1+X0/14.03

=A1+X0-WS4-S8 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 B =A1+X2-XP3 2 =A1+X0-S8 4 1 =A1+X0/14.04

=A1+X0-WS4-S8 B

=A1+X0-WS4-S8 3

=A1+X0-WS9-S44 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 B =A1+X2-XP5 2 =A1+X0-S44 4 1 =A1+X0/14.06

=A1+X0-WS9-S44 2

=A1+X0-WS9-S44 3

=A1+X0-WS9-S44 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 A =A1+X2-XP5 4 =A1+X0-S9 4 1 =A1+X0/14.05

=A1+X0-WS11-S46 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 B =A1+X3-XP5 2 =A1+X0-S46 4 1 =A1+X0/16.06

=A1+X0-WS11-S46 2

=A1+X0-WS11-S46 3

=A1+X0-WS11-S46 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 A =A1+X3-XP5 4 =A1+X0-S11 4 1 =A1+X0/16.05

=A1+X0-WS12-S47 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 A =A1+X2-XP7 4 =A1+X0-S12 4 1 =A1+X0/14.07

=A1+X0-WS12-S47 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m 79903 B =A1+X2-XP7 2 =A1+X0-S47 4 1 =A1+X0/14.08

=A1+X0-WS80-82 CABLE 76291 1 =A1+X1-X1 :342 =A1+X0-S80 2 6 =A1+X0/11.04

=A1+X0-WS80-82 CABLE 76291 2 =A1+X1-X1 :L =A1+X0-S80 1 6 =A1+X0/11.04

=A1+X0-WS80-82 CABLE 76291 3 =A1+X1-X1 :L =A1+X0-S82 1 6 =A1+X0/11.08

=A1+X0-WS80-82 CABLE 76291 4 =A1+X1-X1 :345 =A1+X0-S82 2 6 =A1+X0/11.08

=A1+X0-WS80-82 PE

=A1+X0-WS90-91 1

=A1+X0-WS90-91 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 700959 4 =A1+X13-XP1 4 =A1+X0-S93 4 1 =A1+X0/26.01

=A1+X0-WS90-91 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 700959 2 =A1+X13-XP1 2 =A1+X0-S91 4 1 =A1+X0/26.02

=A1+X0-WS90-91 3

=A1+X0-WS92-93 1

=A1+X0-WS92-93 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 700959 4 =A1+X13-XP3 4 =A1+X0-S92 4 1 =A1+X0/26.03

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 53
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 54
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WS92-93 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 700959 2 =A1+X13-XP3 2 =A1+X0-S90 4 1 =A1+X0/26.04

=A1+X0-WS92-93 3

=A1+X0-WS95-96 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 700959 2 =A1+X13-XP7 2 =A1+X0-S96 4 1 =A1+X0/26.08

=A1+X0-WS95-96 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 700959 4 =A1+X13-XP7 4 =A1+X0-S95 4 1 =A1+X0/26.07

=A1+X0-WS95-96 2

=A1+X0-WS95-96 3

=A1+X0-WTWIN4 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 1 =A1+X4-XP1 4 =A1+X0-S24 4 1 =A1+X0/18.01

=A1+X0-WTWIN4 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 2 =A1+X4-XP1 2 =A1+X0-S28 4 1 =A1+X0/18.02

=A1+X0-WTWIN4 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 3 =A1+X4-XP3 4 =A1+X0-S32 4 1 =A1+X0/18.03

=A1+X0-WTWIN4 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 4 =A1+X4-XP3 2 =A1+X0-S36 4 1 =A1+X0/18.04

=A1+X0-WTWIN5 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 1 =A1+X5-XP1 4 =A1+X0-S25 4 1 =A1+X0/20.01

=A1+X0-WTWIN5 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 2 =A1+X5-XP1 2 =A1+X0-S29 4 1 =A1+X0/20.02

=A1+X0-WTWIN5 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 3 =A1+X5-XP3 4 =A1+X0-S33 4 1 =A1+X0/20.03

=A1+X0-WTWIN5 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 4 =A1+X5-XP3 2 =A1+X0-S37 4 1 =A1+X0/20.04

=A1+X0-WTWIN6 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 1 =A1+X5-XP5 4 =A1+X0-S26 4 1 =A1+X0/20.05

=A1+X0-WTWIN6 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 2 =A1+X5-XP5 2 =A1+X0-S30 4 1 =A1+X0/20.06

=A1+X0-WTWIN6 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 3 =A1+X5-XP7 4 =A1+X0-S34 4 1 =A1+X0/20.07

=A1+X0-WTWIN6 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 4 =A1+X5-XP7 2 =A1+X0-S38 4 1 =A1+X0/20.08

=A1+X0-WTWIN7 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 1 =A1+X4-XP5 4 =A1+X0-S27 4 1 =A1+X0/18.05

=A1+X0-WTWIN7 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 2 =A1+X4-XP5 2 =A1+X0-S31 4 1 =A1+X0/18.06

=A1+X0-WTWIN7 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 3 =A1+X4-XP7 4 =A1+X0-S35 4 1 =A1+X0/18.07

=A1+X0-WTWIN7 Multi Cable Separated Twin 1017442 4 =A1+X4-XP7 2 =A1+X0-S39 4 1 =A1+X0/18.08

=A1+X0-WTWIN9 CABLE CONNECTOR 10m 1002209 1 =A1+X6-XP3 4 =A1+X0-S100 4 1 =A1+X0/22.03

=A1+X0-WTWIN9 CABLE CONNECTOR 10m 1002209 2 =A1+X6-XP3 2 =A1+X0-S102 4 1 =A1+X0/22.04

=A1+X0-WTWIN9 CABLE CONNECTOR 10m 1002209 3 =A1+X6-XP5 4 =A1+X0-S160 4 1 =A1+X0/22.05

=A1+X0-WTWIN9 4

=A1+X0-WTWIN10 CABLE CONNECTOR 10m 1002209 1 =A1+X7-XP3 4 =A1+X0-S101 4 1 =A1+X0/24.03

=A1+X0-WTWIN10 CABLE CONNECTOR 10m 1002209 2 =A1+X7-XP3 2 =A1+X0-S103 4 1 =A1+X0/24.04

=A1+X0-WTWIN10 CABLE CONNECTOR 10m 1002209 3 =A1+X7-XP5 4 =A1+X0-S161 4 1 =A1+X0/24.05

=A1+X0-WTWIN10 4

=A1+X0-WX2 CABLE 1001860 white =A1+X2-X0 :2 =A1+X100-X100 :21 15 =A1+X0/14.09

=A1+X0-WX2 CABLE 1001860 brown =A1+X2-X0 :1 =A1+X100-X100 :22 15 =A1+X0/14.09

=A1+X0-WX2 green

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 54
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 55
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WX2 yellow

=A1+X0-WX2 grey

=A1+X0-WX2 pink

=A1+X0-WX2 CABLE 1001860 red =A1+X2-X0 :5 =A1+X100-X100 :1 15 =A1+X0/15.09

=A1+X0-WX2 CABLE 1001860 blue =A1+X2-X0 :3 =A1+X100-X100 :11 15 =A1+X0/15.09

=A1+X0-WX2 black

=A1+X0-WX2 gn/ye

=A1+X0-WX3 CABLE 1001860 white =A1+X3-X0 :2 =A1+X100-X100 :23 15 =A1+X0/16.09

=A1+X0-WX3 CABLE 1001860 brown =A1+X3-X0 :1 =A1+X100-X100 :24 15 =A1+X0/16.09

=A1+X0-WX3 green

=A1+X0-WX3 yellow

=A1+X0-WX3 grey

=A1+X0-WX3 pink

=A1+X0-WX3 CABLE 1001860 red =A1+X3-X0 :5 =A1+X100-X100 :2 15 =A1+X0/17.09

=A1+X0-WX3 CABLE 1001860 blue =A1+X3-X0 :3 =A1+X100-X100 :12 15 =A1+X0/17.09

=A1+X0-WX3 black

=A1+X0-WX3 gn/ye

=A1+X0-WX4 CABLE 1001860 white =A1+X4-X0 :2 =A1+X100-X100 :25 7 =A1+X0/18.09

=A1+X0-WX4 CABLE 1001860 brown =A1+X4-X0 :1 =A1+X100-X100 :26 7 =A1+X0/18.09

=A1+X0-WX4 green

=A1+X0-WX4 yellow
=A1+X0-WX4 grey

=A1+X0-WX4 pink

=A1+X0-WX4 CABLE 1001860 red =A1+X4-X0 :5 =A1+X100-X100 :3 7 =A1+X0/19.09

=A1+X0-WX4 CABLE 1001860 blue =A1+X4-X0 :3 =A1+X100-X100 :13 7 =A1+X0/19.09

=A1+X0-WX4 black

=A1+X0-WX4 gn/ye

=A1+X0-WX5 CABLE 1001860 white =A1+X5-X0 :2 =A1+X100-X100 :27 7 =A1+X0/20.09

=A1+X0-WX5 CABLE 1001860 brown =A1+X5-X0 :1 =A1+X100-X100 :28 7 =A1+X0/20.09

=A1+X0-WX5 green

=A1+X0-WX5 yellow

=A1+X0-WX5 grey

=A1+X0-WX5 pink

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 55
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 56
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WX5 CABLE 1001860 red =A1+X5-X0 :5 =A1+X100-X100 :4 7 =A1+X0/21.09

=A1+X0-WX5 CABLE 1001860 blue =A1+X5-X0 :3 =A1+X100-X100 :14 7 =A1+X0/21.09

=A1+X0-WX5 black

=A1+X0-WX5 gn/ye

=A1+X0-WX6 CABLE 1001860 white =A1+X6-X0 :2 =A1+X100-X100 :29 7 =A1+X0/22.09

=A1+X0-WX6 CABLE 1001860 brown =A1+X6-X0 :1 =A1+X100-X100 :30 7 =A1+X0/22.09

=A1+X0-WX6 green

=A1+X0-WX6 yellow

=A1+X0-WX6 grey

=A1+X0-WX6 pink

=A1+X0-WX6 CABLE 1001860 red =A1+X6-X0 :5 =A1+X100-X100 :5 7 =A1+X0/23.09

=A1+X0-WX6 CABLE 1001860 blue =A1+X6-X0 :3 =A1+X100-X100 :15 7 =A1+X0/23.09

=A1+X0-WX6 black

=A1+X0-WX6 gn/ye

=A1+X0-WX7 CABLE 1001860 white =A1+X7-X0 :2 =A1+X100-X100 :31 7 =A1+X0/24.09

=A1+X0-WX7 CABLE 1001860 brown =A1+X7-X0 :1 =A1+X100-X100 :32 7 =A1+X0/24.09

=A1+X0-WX7 green

=A1+X0-WX7 yellow
=A1+X0-WX7 grey

=A1+X0-WX7 pink

=A1+X0-WX7 CABLE 1001860 red =A1+X7-X0 :5 =A1+X100-X100 :16 7 =A1+X0/25.09

=A1+X0-WX7 CABLE 1001860 blue =A1+X7-X0 :3 =A1+X100-X100 :6 7 =A1+X0/25.09

=A1+X0-WX7 black

=A1+X0-WX7 gn/ye

=A1+X0-WX13 CABLE 1001860 white =A1+X13-X0 :2 =A1+X100-X100 :33 7 =A1+X0/26.09

=A1+X0-WX13 CABLE 1001860 brown =A1+X13-X0 :1 =A1+X100-X100 :34 7 =A1+X0/26.09

=A1+X0-WX13 green

=A1+X0-WX13 yellow

=A1+X0-WX13 grey

=A1+X0-WX13 pink

=A1+X0-WX13 CABLE 1001860 red =A1+X13-X0 :5 =A1+X100-X100 :7 7 =A1+X0/27.09

=A1+X0-WX13 CABLE 1001860 blue =A1+X13-X0 :3 =A1+X100-X100 :17 7 =A1+X0/27.09

=A1+X0-WX13 black

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 56
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 57
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WX13 gn/ye

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 1 =A1+X1-X1 :B1+ =A1+X14-SB12 13 7 =A1+X0/12.01

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 2 =A1+X1-X1 :305 =A1+X14-SB12 14 7 =A1+X0/12.01

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 3 =A1+X1-X1 :304 =A1+X14-SB13 14 7 =A1+X0/12.02

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 4 =A1+X1-X1 :303 =A1+X14-SB16 14 7 =A1+X0/12.03

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 5 =A1+X1-X1 :302 =A1+X14-SB17 14 7 =A1+X0/12.04

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 6 =A1+X1-X1 :130 =A1+X14-SB10 14 7 =A1+X0/9.03

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 7 =A1+X1-B1 :L =A1+X14-SB10 13 7 =A1+X0/9.03

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 8 =A1+X1-X1 :140 =A1+X14-SB11 14 7 =A1+X0/9.04

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 9 =A1+X1-B1 :L =A1+X14-SB11 13 7 =A1+X0/9.04

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 10 =A1+X1-X1 :310 =A1+X14-SS1 12 7 =A1+X0/13.07

=A1+X0-WX14 CABLE 76427 11 =A1+X1-X1 :B1+ =A1+X14-SS1 11 7 =A1+X0/13.07

=A1+X0-WX14 PE

=A1+X0-WX100:1 CABLE 1001860 White =A1+X100-X100 :39 =A1+B1-XPX2 :20 5 =A1+X0/29.04

=A1+X0-WX100:1 CABLE 1001860 Brown =A1+X100-X100 :40 =A1+B1-XPX2 :50 5 =A1+X0/29.04

=A1+X0-WX100:1 GREEN

=A1+X0-WX100:1 YELLOW

=A1+X0-WX100:1 GREY

=A1+X0-WX100:1 PINK

=A1+X0-WX100:1 RED

=A1+X0-WX100:1 BLUE

=A1+X0-WX100:1 BLACK

=A1+X0-WX100:1 GN/YE

=A1+X0-WX100:2 CABLE 79347 1 =A1+X100-X100 :20 =A1+X1-X1 :- 5 =A1+X0/29.04

=A1+X0-WX100:2 CABLE 79347 2 =A1+X100-X100 :20 =A1+X1-X1 :- 5 =A1+X0/29.04

=A1+X0-WX100:2 CABLE 79347 3 =A1+X100-X100 :20 =A1+X1-X1 :- 5 =A1+X0/29.04

=A1+X0-WX100:2 CABLE 79347 4 =A1+X100-X100 :20 =A1+X1-X1 :- 5 =A1+X0/29.04

=A1+X0-WX100:2 CABLE 79347 5 =A1+X100-X100 :10 =A1+X1-X1 :L+ 5 =A1+X0/29.03

=A1+X0-WX100:2 CABLE 79347 6 =A1+X100-X100 :10 =A1+X1-X1 :L+ 5 =A1+X0/29.03

=A1+X0-WX100:2 CABLE 79347 7 =A1+X100-X100 :10 =A1+X1-X1 :L+ 5 =A1+X0/29.03

=A1+X0-WX100:2 CABLE 79347 8 =A1+X100-X100 :10 =A1+X1-X1 :L+ 5 =A1+X0/29.03

=A1+X0-WX100:2 9

=A1+X0-WX100:2 10

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 57
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 58
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WX100:2 11

=A1+X0-WX100:2 PE

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 1 =A1+X1-X1 :1 =A1+X0-XP1 1 6 =A1+X0/9.01

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 2 =A1+X1-X1 :2 =A1+X0-XP1 2 6 =A1+X0/9.02

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 3 =A1+X1-X1 :52 =A1+X0-XP1 52 6 =A1+X0/5.09

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 4 =A1+X1-X1 :4 =A1+X0-XP1 4 6 =A1+X0/5.08

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 5 =A1+X1-X1 :7 =A1+X0-XP1 7 6 =A1+X0/5.05

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 6 =A1+X1-X1 :8 =A1+X0-XP1 8 6 =A1+X0/5.05

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 7 =A1+X1-X1 :9 =A1+X0-XP1 9 6 =A1+X0/5.08

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 8 =A1+X1-X1 :10 =A1+X0-XP1 10 6 =A1+X0/7.03

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 9 =A1+X1-X1 :11 =A1+X0-XP1 11 6 =A1+X0/5.07

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 10 =A1+X1-X1 :12 =A1+X0-XP1 12 6 =A1+X0/7.04

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 11 =A1+X1-X1 :13 =A1+X0-XP1 13 6 =A1+X0/7.05

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 12 =A1+X1-X1 :14 =A1+X0-XP1 14 6 =A1+X0/7.06

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 13 =A1+X1-X1 :15 =A1+X0-XP1 15 6 =A1+X0/8.01

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 14 =A1+X1-X1 :16 =A1+X0-XP1 16 6 =A1+X0/8.02

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 15 =A1+X1-X1 :17 =A1+X0-XP1 17 6 =A1+X0/8.03

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 16 =A1+X1-X1 :18 =A1+X0-XP1 18 6 =A1+X0/5.08

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 17 =A1+X1-X1 :19 =A1+X0-XP1 19 6 =A1+X0/9.05

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 18 =A1+X1-X1 :20 =A1+X0-XP1 20 6 =A1+X0/9.06

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 19 =A1+X1-X1 :21 =A1+X0-XP1 21 6 =A1+X0/9.07

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 20 =A1+X1-X1 :22 =A1+X0-XP1 22 6 =A1+X0/9.08

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 21 =A1+X1-X1 :23 =A1+X0-XP1 23 6 =A1+X0/11.01

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 22 =A1+X1-X1 :24 =A1+X0-XP1 24 6 =A1+X0/13.01

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 23 =A1+X1-X1 :25 =A1+X0-XP1 25 6 =A1+X0/11.02

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 24 =A1+X1-X1 :26 =A1+X0-XP1 26 6 =A1+X0/13.02

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 25 =A1+X1-X1 :27 =A1+X0-XP1 27 6 =A1+X0/7.07

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 26 =A1+X1-X1 :28 =A1+X0-XP1 28 6 =A1+X0/13.03

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 27 =A1+X1-X1 :29 =A1+X0-XP1 29 6 =A1+X0/7.08

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 28 =A1+X1-X1 :30 =A1+X0-XP1 30 6 =A1+X0/13.04

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 29 =A1+X1-X1 :32 =A1+X0-XP1 32 6 =A1+X0/8.04

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 30 =A1+X1-X1 :34 =A1+X0-XP1 34 6 =A1+X0/11.03

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 31 =A1+X1-X1 :37 =A1+X0-XP1 37 6 =A1+X0/8.06

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 58
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 59
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 32 =A1+X1-X1 :38 =A1+X0-XP1 38 6 =A1+X0/8.05

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 33 =A1+X1-X1 :36 =A1+X0-XP1 36 6 =A1+X0/11.05

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 34 =A1+X1-X1 :40 =A1+X0-XP1 40 6 =A1+X0/5.08

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 35 =A1+X1-X1 :41 =A1+X0-XP1 41 6 =A1+X0/11.06

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 36 =A1+X1-X1 :42 =A1+X0-XP1 42 6 =A1+X0/11.07

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 37 =A1+X1-X1 :T1 =A1+X0-XP1 53 6 =A1+X0/5.01

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 38 =A1+X1-X1 :T2 =A1+X0-XP1 54 6 =A1+X0/5.01

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 39 =A1+X1-X1 :T3 =A1+X0-XP1 55 6 =A1+X0/5.01

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 40 =A1+X1-X1 :39 =A1+X0-XP1 39 6 =A1+X0/5.06

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 41 =A1+X1-X1 :56 =A1+X0-XP1 56 6 =A1+X0/5.03

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 42 =A1+X1-X1 :57 =A1+X0-XP1 57 6 =A1+X0/5.03

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 43 =A1+X1-X1 :58 =A1+X0-XP1 58 6 =A1+X0/5.03

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 44 =A1+X1-X1 :48 =A1+X0-XP1 48 6 =A1+X0/5.08

=A1+X0-WXP1 45

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 45 =A1+X1-X1 :50 =A1+X0-XP1 50 6 =A1+X0/5.02

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 47 =A1+X1-X1 :51 =A1+X0-XP1 51 6 =A1+X0/5.02

=A1+X0-WXP1 48

=A1+X0-WXP1 CABLE 700206 PE =A1+X1-X1 :PE =A1+X0-XP1 3 6 =A1+X0/5.00

=A1+X0-WY17 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M 77000 BN =A1+X1-X2 :203 =A1+X0-Y17 A1 1 =A1+X0/10.01

=A1+X0-WY17 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M 77000 BU =A1+X1-X2 :204 =A1+X0-Y17 A2 1 =A1+X0/10.01

=A1+X0-WY17 G/Y

=A1+X0-WY18 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M 77000 BN =A1+X1-X2 :202 =A1+X0-Y18 A1 1 =A1+X0/10.02

=A1+X0-WY18 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M 77000 BU =A1+X1-X2 :201 =A1+X0-Y18 A2 1 =A1+X0/10.02

=A1+X0-WY18 G/Y

=A1+X0-WY41 CABLE CONNECTOR 3,0M 79332 4 =A1+X6-XP2 4 =A1+X0-Y41 1 1 =A1+X0/23.01

=A1+X0-WY41 2

=A1+X0-WY41 3

=A1+X0-WY41 4

=A1+X0-WY41 5

=A1+X0-WY1-Y2 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X2-XP4 4 =A1+X0-Y1 1 1 =A1+X0/15.03

=A1+X0-WY1-Y2 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X2-XP4 2 =A1+X0-Y2 1 1 =A1+X0/15.04

=A1+X0-WY3-Y4 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X3-XP4 4 =A1+X0-Y3 1 1 =A1+X0/17.03

=A1+X0-WY3-Y4 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X3-XP4 2 =A1+X0-Y4 1 1 =A1+X0/17.04

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 59
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 60
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
CABLE TYPE ART. NR. CORE FROM TERMINAL No. TO TERMINAL No. LENGTH SHEET
=A1+X0-WY7-Y8 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X3-XP2 4 =A1+X0-Y7 1 1 =A1+X0/17.01

=A1+X0-WY7-Y8 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X3-XP2 2 =A1+X0-Y8 1 1 =A1+X0/17.02

=A1+X0-WY9-Y10 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X3-XP6 4 =A1+X0-Y9 1 1 =A1+X0/17.05

=A1+X0-WY9-Y10 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X3-XP6 2 =A1+X0-Y10 1 1 =A1+X0/17.06

=A1+X0-WY11-Y12 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X2-XP6 4 =A1+X0-Y11 1 1 =A1+X0/15.05

=A1+X0-WY11-Y12 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X2-XP6 2 =A1+X0-Y12 1 1 =A1+X0/15.06

=A1+X0-WY11-Y12 A

=A1+X0-WY11-Y12 PE

=A1+X0-WY15-16 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X2-XP2 4 =A1+X0-Y15 1 1 =A1+X0/15.01

=A1+X0-WY15-16 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X2-XP2 2 =A1+X0-Y16 1 1 =A1+X0/15.02

=A1+X0-WY25-Y26 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X4-XP2 4 =A1+X0-Y25 1 1 =A1+X0/19.01

=A1+X0-WY25-Y26 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X4-XP2 2 =A1+X0-Y26 1 1 =A1+X0/19.02

=A1+X0-WY25-Y26 BU

=A1+X0-WY25-Y26 PE

=A1+X0-WY27-Y28 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X4-XP4 4 =A1+X0-Y27 1 1 =A1+X0/19.03

=A1+X0-WY27-Y28 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X4-XP4 2 =A1+X0-Y28 1 1 =A1+X0/19.04

=A1+X0-WY27-Y28 BU

=A1+X0-WY27-Y28 PE

=A1+X0-WY43-Y44 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X7-XP6 4 =A1+X0-Y43 1 1 =A1+X0/25.05

=A1+X0-WY43-Y44 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X7-XP6 2 =A1+X0-Y44 1 1 =A1+X0/25.06

=A1+X0-WY43-Y44 BU

=A1+X0-WY43-Y44 PE

=A1+X0-WY45-Y46 CABLE CONNECTOR 2M 701219 4 =A1+X7-XP2 4 =A1+X0-Y45 1 1 =A1+X0/25.01

=A1+X0-WY45-Y46 CABLE CONNECTOR 2M 701219 2 =A1+X7-XP2 2 =A1+X0-Y46 1 1 =A1+X0/25.02

=A1+X0-WY53-Y54 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 4 =A1+X7-XP8 4 =A1+X0-Y53 1 1 =A1+X0/25.07

=A1+X0-WY53-Y54 1016253;1016254
CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M;VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION 2 =A1+X7-XP8 2 =A1+X0-Y54 1 1 =A1+X0/25.08

=A1+X0-WY53-Y54 BU

=A1+X0-WY53-Y54 PE

=A1+X0-WY55-Y56 CABLE CONNECTOR 2M 701219 4 =A1+X7-XP4 4 =A1+X0-Y55 1 1 =A1+X0/25.03

=A1+X0-WY55-Y56 CABLE CONNECTOR 2M 701219 2 =A1+X7-XP4 2 =A1+X0-Y56 1 1 =A1+X0/25.04

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 60
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 61
CHECKED BY: TOTAL SH.
Cable List The design and/or constructions CABLE LIST 63
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 UNIT QTY BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0 1 1001448 ABS. ENCODER HENGSTLER ACURO AC58/1212EK.72SBB.KO 0 566 237 10-30V/10M

X1 20 76441 ALTERNATE JUMPER 280-409 WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 280-409 280-409
X1 3 79908 AUXILIARY CONTACTOR RELECO OEM C10A10X115A 115VAC 1 SWITCHING
X1 1 79369 BLADE FUSE 10A Littelfuse ELFA AB 33-051-41
X1 1 79582 BLADE FUSE 15A Littelfuse ELFA AB 33-051-58 33-051-58
X1 2 79367 BLADE FUSE ATTACHMENT WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 282-696 282-696 TERMINAL
X100 1 1019885 CABINET X100 CANopen 1019885 1019885 STS,YTS Spreader 10 fuse
X0 6 70996 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC ÖLFLEX -500P 10 05 61 4x2,5mm² PUR
X0 7 76126 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC ÖLFLEX -500P 10 06 12 3x1,5mm² PUR
X0 6 76291 CABLE ÖLFLEX -400P 10 05 91 5x1,5mm² PUR
X0 7 76427 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC ÖLFLEX 855P 07 23 33 12x1,5mm² PUR
X0 5 79347 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC ÖLFLEX 400P 10 05 09 12x2.5mm² PUR
X0 6 700206 CABLE LAPP MILTRONIC TPE/PUR 49G2,5 BROMMA 07 98 13 49x2,5mm² PUR
X0 70 1001860 CABLE LAPPKABEL MILTRONIC 060516 060516 CAN-OPEN 3X2X0.25+3X1.0
X1 1 72075 CABLE CHANNEL 25X80 RITTAL RITTAL 21165
X1 1 700191 CABLE CHANNEL 40X80 RITTAL 21166
X1 1 72074 CABLE CHANNEL 60X80 RITTAL RITTAL 21167
X0 3 700959 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0 LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2 RKWT/LED A4-3-90/1M 404917 M12 Twin cable Prox.
X0 1 79290 CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0M LUMBERG MILTRONIC RSWT 4-RKWT 4-165/1.0M 40 54 61 M12 2xANGLE
X0 10 1016253 CABLE CONNECTOR 1.5M MURR MURR 7000-40221-635 0150 7000-40221-635 0150 M12, MALE ANGLE,
X0 8 79903 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2-RKWT/LED A 4-3-90/2.0M 40 49 18 M12 Twin cable Prox.
X0 1 79294 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M LUMBERG MILTRONIC RSWT 4-RKWT 4-165/2,5M 40 49 06 M12 2xANGLE
X0 1 700960 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M LUMBERG MILTRONIC ASB 2 RKWT/LED A4-3-90/2,5M 40 49 21 M12 Twin cable Prox.
X0 2 701219 CABLE CONNECTOR 2M MPM OEM E001088-200
M12 ANGLE TWIN SUPPRESSORS 24VDC
X0 1 79332 CABLE CONNECTOR 3,0M MURRELEKTRONIK BALLUFF 33115 M12 SUPPRESSOR 24VDC ANGLE
X0 1 79295 CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M RSWT 4-RKWT 4-165/3.5M 40 49 07 M12 2xANGLE
X0 1 70395 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M MILTRONIC MILTRONIC RKWT 4-165/5 40 51 89 M12 ANGLE FEMALE open end
X0 2 77000 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M MURR BALLUFF 3124338 3112007 SUPPRESSOR 24VDC ZDIOD
X0 1 70396 CABLE CONNECTOR 10M LUMBERG MILTRONIC RKWT 5-228/10M 40 51 92 M12 ANGLE FEMALE open end
X0 1 77043 CABLE CONNECTOR 10M SHIELDED REGAR REGAR 6101 PUR SHIELDED FOR LINEAR POTENTIAL SENSORS
X0 2 1002209 CABLE CONNECTOR 10m OEM OEM AUTOMATIC MULTICABLE 1TWIN+1 ANGLE M12+3XM12 ANGLE
X1 50 75381 CABLE RK1.5mm2 RED
X1 50 76577 CABLE RK 1.5 BLUE TÄLJE EL-PRODUKTER AB RK 1.5 BLÅ
X1 10 76131 CABLE RK 2.5 YELLOW/GREEN PE MILTRONIC AB 02-034-92 11 01 48
X0 4 79581 CABLECONECTORX0,34 10m LUMBERG IFM ELECTRONIC AB E10965
X0 7 1001762 CAN-OPEN SLAVE 8I80 IFM-ELECTRONIC IFM-ELECTRONIC CR9011 CR9011
X0 4 1007512 DIX M25 2X6MM
X0 1 78692 EARTH BRAID 250mm ELFA ELFA AB 55 090 54 55-097-57
X0 1 700928 EARTH-RAIL 12/3 ABB Nordkomp. ABB Nordkomp. SK117905-12 SK117905-12
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
STS45 61
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
Parts list (grouped) the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 62
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Parts list (grouped): (1001448 - 700928) TOTAL SH.
contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 UNIT QTY BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X1 1 700006 EEPROM CC-SYSTEM CC SERVICES AB

X1 2 79583 ENDPLATE 282-333 HELLERMANN TYTON AB 282-333
X0 1 1008577 Electrical Cabinet With IP65 Bromma Bromma
X1 7 1026699 End-and intermediate plate WAGO WAGO 280-326 280-326 Used with PN 1014207
X1 100 79921 FERRULE 2.5 ISOL WEIDMÜLLER AB WEIDMÜLLER AB 10-00900436-1 9004360000
X1 100 701313 FERRULES 1.0 ISOL WAGO WAGO 216-233 216-233
X1 100 79919 FERULLE 1.5 ISOL WEIDMÜLLER AB WEIDMÜLLER AB 10-00900429-1 9004340000
X0 1 70929 GLAND MS PG11 5-10mm MILTRONIC MILTRONIC AB SKINTOP-MS11 12 07 82
X14 1 70931 GLAND MS PG16 10-14mm MILTRONIC MILTRONIC AB SKINTOP-MS16 12 07 84
X0 2 701016 GLAND MS-M16 4.5-10mm SKINTOP MILTRONIC SKINTOP MS-M16 12 58 11 M16x1.5
X0 3 701017 GLAND MS-M20 7-13mm SKINTOP MILTRONIC SKINTOP MS-M20 12 58 12 M20x1.5
X0 4 701018 GLAND MS-M25 9-17mm SKINTOP MILTRONIC SKINTOP MS-M25 12 58 13 M25x1.5
X0 5 701019 GLAND MS-M32 11-21mm SKINTOP MILTRONIC SKINTOP MS-M32 12 58 14 M32x1.5
X0 1 1015861 GLAND MS-M63 34-45MM SKINTOP/Miltronic
X0 2 1001909 GLAND NUT LAPP MILTRONIC 121261 FOR GLAND M16
X0 3 1001910 GLAND NUT LAPP MILTRONIC 121262 FOR GLAND M20
X0 1 1001911 GLAND NUT LAPP MILTRONIC 121263 FOR GLAND M25
X0 5 1001912 GLAND NUT LAPP MILTRONIC 121264 FOR GLAND M32
X0 1 1015862 GLAND NUT FOR GLAND M63 SKINTOP/Miltronicc
X1 1 701654 HOUR COUNTER 440VAC/60Hz BAUSER GYCOM SVENSKA AB 632, 440VAC/60Hz 632 A2, 440VAC/60Hz
X0 1 38905 IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS² CC-SYSTEM CC-SYSTEM SEE DRAWING 38905
X0 22 1001748 INPUT MODULE 0-120VAC DELCON DELCON G4/SLI120CRP G4/SLI120CRP Sek: 0-60VDC 50mA
X0 5 78601 INPUT MODULE DC OPTO22 ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB G4IDC5 G4 IDC 5 24 VDC
X14 1 700172 JUNCTION BOX 8 HOLES TELEMECANIQUE SCHNEIDER XAPA2108 XAPA 2108
X0 2 1001400 LED LAMPS EKTA EKTA E5813.GRW E5813.GRW 24VDC M12 GREEN, RED, WHITE
X0 1 1001403 LED LAMPS EKTA EKTA E5811.B E5811.B 24VDC M12 BLUE
X1 1 70024 MARKING 1-50 -X2 WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 209-566 209-566
X0 4 1017442 Multi Cable Separated Twin
X0 15 1001750 OUTPUT MODULE 0-240VAC DELCON DELCON G4/SLO5TR G4/SLO5TR Sek: 0-24VAC 3A
X0 5 78603 OUTPUT MODULE DC OPTO22 ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB G40DC5 G4 ODC 5 24VDC 4A
X1 1 1001859 POWER SUPPLY 90-275V/25VDC PRIMEPOWER OEM-AUTOMATIC 0036515 30A/0-400Hz
X0 1 700176 PRESSURE GUARD 0-10V DANFOSS OEM-AUTOMATIC 060G1777 3374084907
X0 38 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH (F) IFM IFM IIA3015BBPKG/US II5910 24VDC M30 15mm (f)
X1 1 76140 PULSECOUNTER 190.07 24V DC BAUSER METRIC AB 632 A.2 24VDC 24-2032-25DC
X14 6 1001018 PUSH button BLACK TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AP21 XB5-AP21
Complete with 1NO block, silicon cover,
X1 1 71986 RAIL DIN 35 HELLERMANN TYTON AB TS 35 C/20
X1 3 79905 RELAY SOCKET 1-SWITCHING RELECO OEM-AUTOMATIC AB S-10 S-10 Relay socket 1switching
X0 2 1002390 RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W Elfa Elfa 60-103-83 60-103-83
X0 1 37524 SCS² PLC Bromma CC-System
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
STS45 62
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
Parts list (grouped) the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249 63
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Parts list (grouped): (700006 - 37524) TOTAL SH.
contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 UNIT QTY BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0 1 1002266 SCS² XP1 36p CABLE CONNECTOR BROMMA ÖLFLEX 855P 1002266 With Deutsch 50p and rubber boot
X0 1 1002267 SCS² XP2 36p CABLE CONNECTOR BROMMA ÖLFLEX 855P 1002267 With Deutsch 50p and rubber boot
X0 1 1002268 SCS² XP3 36p CABLE CONNECTOR BROMMA ÖLFLEX 855P 1002268 With Deutsch 50p and rubber boot
X1 1 70536 SIGNPLATE (+GRAVERING) TELEMECANIQUE IDEALGRAVYR AB GRAVERING ENL BILAGA
X1 1 76924 STRIPS T30R L=150 HELLERMANN TYTON AB T30R L=150MM SVART
X0 1 1006197 Socket (58P) Pyle National Pyle National ZREP-24-352PN ZREP-24-352PN Male Insert
X1 14 70013 TERMINAL (BLUE) WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 280-651 280-651
X1 137 70012 TERMINAL (GREY) WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 280-641 280-641
X1 10 70034 TERMINAL END PLATE HELLERMANN TYTON AB 280-313
X1 10 70018 TERMINAL END STOP TS35 WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 249-117 249-117
X1 20 70016 TERMINAL JUMPER WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 280-402 280-402
X1 4 70017 TERMINAL PE WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 280-637 280-637
X1 7 1014207 TERMINAL RESISTOR
X1 10 70015 TERMINAL SEPARATOR 280-348 WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 280-348 280-318
X14 1 1002234 Teach box Lable BROMMA 1002234 English
X1 2 1000715 Trigger action button red TELEMEC SCHNEIDER XB5-AS8445 XB5-AS8445
Red Ø40, complete with 1NO and 1NC block
X0 2 700188 ULTRA SONIC SENSOR SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RG6014-3AF00 600->6000mm
X0 10 1016254 VALVE PLUG 24VDC SUPPRESION MURR MURR 7000-41561-636 000 7000-41561-636 000 M12, 5 POLE

MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

STS45 63
This drawing is copyright, and is SERIAL NO.
ZPMC PPC Cristobal CONT.
Parts list (grouped) the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. 12249
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Parts list (grouped): (1002266 - 1016254) TOTAL SH.
contained therein, may not be copied 63
or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY: PLANT (=) : PLOTTED: DRAWING NO. REV.
CREATED: 10/05/2009 09:45 zamzumo 10/06/2009 08:45
consent of the owner.
DRAWING DATE: UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1027766
07/26/2007
 Spreader Control System
2:nd generation
2
SCS

Rev 1.0 2004-12-08

 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 2(55)

1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................3
1.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS ..........................................................................................................................3
1.4 DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................3
2 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................................4
2.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................4
2.2 THE NODES ..............................................................................................................................................................5
3 SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1 BOOT PROGRAM .......................................................................................................................................................6
3.2 SYSTEM PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................................6
3.3 SPREADER PROGRAM ...............................................................................................................................................6
4 HARDWARE OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................7
4.1 I/O LED’S ................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2 DISPLAY ...................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2.1 Event categories.............................................................................................................................................8
4.2.2 Message format..............................................................................................................................................8
4.2.3 Priority of displayed messages ......................................................................................................................9
4.3 GROUND CONNECTION .............................................................................................................................................9
4.4 THE X1 AND X3 CONNECTORS .................................................................................................................................9
4.4.1 X1 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................10
4.4.2 X3 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................11
4.5 THE X2 CONNECTOR ..............................................................................................................................................13
4.5.1 Main Supply .................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.2 CAN .............................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.3 Address Key .................................................................................................................................................14
4.5.4 Analogue Inputs ...........................................................................................................................................15
4.5.5 PWM Outputs...............................................................................................................................................15
4.5.6 External Spreader Memory..........................................................................................................................15
4.5.7 RS 485 and SSI.............................................................................................................................................16
4.5.8 Additional Jumper Group ............................................................................................................................16
4.6 THE X4 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................17
4.6.1 AnyBus .........................................................................................................................................................18
4.6.2 Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs ....................................................................................................................18
4.7 THE X5 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................19
4.7.1 RS-232..........................................................................................................................................................19
4.8 THE REDUNDANCY FUNCTION ...............................................................................................................................19
4.9 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................................................................20
4.9.1 Mapping of I/O ............................................................................................................................................20
4.10 SPREADER STOP ................................................................................................................................................21
4.11 FAULT FINDING TABLE ......................................................................................................................................22
5 SOFTWARE TOOLS................................................................................................................................................23
5.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................23
5.2 ABE.......................................................................................................................................................................23
5.3 BMS ......................................................................................................................................................................23
6 MISCELLANEOUS ..................................................................................................................................................24

Manual 2  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 3(55)

6.1 DATA SHEET ...........................................................................................................................................................24

6.2 DIMENSIONS...........................................................................................................................................................25
7 APPENDIX A (ERROR MESSAGES) ....................................................................................................................26

1 General

1.1 Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the surveillance and maintenance operators of the Bromma
SCS2. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.

1.2 References
Location where to find the latest revision of this document: http://www.bromma.com/backyard/

1.3 Dictionary and abbreviations

ABE Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic. See separate manual for details.
BMS Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2. See separate manual for details.
Boot program The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
CAN Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
PWM Pulse Width Modulator.
Spreader Program The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
SCS2 Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
System Program The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
SSI Synchronous Serial Interface – sensor interface

1.4 Document layout

Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.
Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning.

Manual 3  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 4(55)

2 Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.

SCS2 includes the following features:

A bus system able to handle 528 I/O ports (programmable input or output).
Up to four analogue inputs with 12 bit resolution.
Four PWM outputs for proportional solenoids.
One general purpose RS485 channel OR SSI channel.
Communication with the help of a standard spreader cable — no screening, no twisted pair.
A system that withstands the repeated shocks and vibrations suffered by spreaders.
A system able to operate in tropical heat and arctic cold.
Choice of different field bus interfaces (ProfiBus, Interbus-S, Device Net….)
Optional duty cycle input

2.1 General

As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:

Crane Node1 A device directly interfacing with the crane’s control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.

Crane-Spreader Communications Link A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane
control system and the spreader.

Spreader Node A device that interfaces directly with the spreader’s sensors, supports discrete
signals, and acts as the Master node.

Sensors and Switches Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.

The system is divided into several hardware units called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the

1
For details regarding separate dedicated crane fieldbus gateway, see separate manual
Manual 4  2004 Bromma Conquip AB
File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 5(55)

number of I/O needed. The nodes are all equals, both in software as well as in hardware. This reduces spare parts and
enables easy-to-change procedures.
The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:
0 is the master called B1
1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.

Crane
I/O
Slave A1 ... Slave A4

2
CAN network (BCAN) SCS

I/O B1 Master B2 Slave ... B8 Slave

Spreader

Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.

2.2 The Nodes

The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master, but can also
have distributed functions such as regulators.

Manual 5  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 6(55)

3 Software
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.

3.1 Boot Program

When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.

The Boot program is responsible for

Initialising hardware
Checking that all the system Programs match.
Checking that the emergency stop and redundancy settings are correct
Performing a program downloads.

3.2 System program

After the Boot program is finished, the System program will run, until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Executing the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC via the com-port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Handling in the event log
Reading and writing I/O

3.3 Spreader Program

The Spreader Program is the program logic that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see chapter 5.2 for
a brief description.

Manual 6  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 7(55)

4 Hardware Overview
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node. The different parts are explained in the following chapter.

Bus/AI RS232 Display &

I/O LED (X4) (X5) Power
X1- I/O X2- I/O, bus X3- I/O 1-48 LEDS
Connector & supply Connector
Connector

4.1 I/O LED’s

The I/O LED’s indicate the current status of the corresponding I/O module. The LED is powered from the secondary (5V)
of the module.

4.2 Display
The display shows three pages of information where each page has a maximum of 8 characters. Each page is shown for 1
second. The pages show the following:
Node ID and System program version. Format: <Node ID><Version>.
Elapsed time running since power on. Format: DDD HHMM where DDD is the number of days, HH the number of hours
and MM the number of minutes.
Message page. The message page shows numeric information only, which has to be translated into comprehensive plain
text manually. The meaning of this page is explained in the rest of this section.

There are also four red LED’s in the bottom of the display window indicating the supply voltage level. Four different
levels are indicated and the ideal voltage is when all LED’s are lit.

LED1 – 11V, FAIL

LED2 – 14V, WARNING 2
LED3 – 17V, WARNING
LED4 – 21V, OK

It is not recommended to run the system below the OK level though it still seems to work fine. Attached devices may
malfunction at lower voltages thus making the system unreliable. The green LED is the “power on” indicator.

Manual 7  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 8(55)

4.2.1 Event categories

There are three categories of information displayed on the event page: information, warning and error.

Type Prefix Example Note

Error E E102 Any error message would shut down the system. All outputs are
turned off and the program is halted. Error messages will begin with
an E.

Warning W W60 Warning shows information about the system status that is of high
importance. The system keeps on running. Warning messages will
begin with a W.

Information I I59 Information shows progress in the system. Examples of information

that could qualify to be displayed as information:
Program load status (how many percent are completed), version
verification info, BMS connected, etc. Informational messages will
begin with an I.

Information

4.2.2 Message format

The display can show 8 characters. These are used in the following format:

LTTTSSSS

L = Level type
TTT = Message type
SSSS = Sub type

Example:
E102 => Error in initialising the hardware
W61 1 => Warning indicating that a twistlock is indicating locked and unlocked. The sub code indicates that it is corner 1.
I59 => Information that the system has started.

Level type
The level type can be one of the following: I = Information, W = Warning, E = Error

Message type
The message type represents the cause of the message. Examples of message types are System started, Wrong system
version and I/O error.
All these types are described in appendix A.

Sub type
The sub type is used to specify more detailed information about the message type. The sub types have different meanings
for all message types. For example does sub type 14 together with message type 47 mean I/O error on digital port 14
instead of just I/O error.
These sub types are described in appendix A.

Manual 8  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 9(55)

4.2.3 Priority of displayed messages

Only the latest event is displayed at a time. When the display shows a warning and an event occurs which would show
information, the warning has higher priority and is thereby left on the display. The same relationship goes for error-
information and error-warning.
Priority in descending order:
Error
Warning
Information

Note that warnings are cleared from the display after at least 10 messages of informational type have passed and the
warning message is older than 15 minutes. Error messages are cleared by resetting the system.

4.3 Ground connection

The node chassis must be properly connected to protective earth. A grounding bolt is placed on the right hand side of the
node for this purpose.

4.4 The X1 and X3 connectors

There are 48 digital ports on a node. Each port can be configured as either input or output via software. The ports 1 to 44
are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. Each group has a “Common” junction. See the connector part for more
detailed information. Ports 45 to 48 are single I/O.

Manual 9  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 10(55)

4.4.1 X1 I/O connector

Front view of X1 connector

Name Description X1 pin number
I/O-1 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_0 31
I/O-2 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_1 41
I/O-3 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_2 43
I/O-4 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_3 42
Common/Supply 1 Common junction for I/O-1 to I/O-4 44

I/O-5 General purpose input or output / Locked_0 3

I/O-6 General purpose input or output / Locked_1 2
I/O-7 General purpose input or output / Locked_2 11
I/O-8 General purpose input or output / Locked_3 1
Common/Supply 2 Common junction for I/O-5 to I/O-8 21

I/O-9 General purpose input or output 26

I/O-10 General purpose input or output 16
I/O-11 General purpose input or output 6
I/O-12 General purpose input or output 7
Common/Supply 3 Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12 8

I/O-13 General purpose input or output 4

I/O-14 General purpose input or output 5
I/O-15 General purpose input or output 25
I/O-16 General purpose input or output 15
Common/Supply 4 Common junction for I/O-13 to I/O-16 35

I/O-17 General purpose input or output / Landed_left_0 10

I/O-18 General purpose input or output / Landed_left_1 20
I/O-19 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_0 30
I/O-20 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_1 40
Common/Supply 5 Common junction for I/O-17 to I/O-20 9

I/O-212 General purpose input or output / Lock_left 46

I/O-22 General purpose input or output / Lock_right 47
I/O-23 General purpose input or output / Unlock_left 49
I/O-24 General purpose input or output / Unlock_right 48
Common/Supply 6 Common junction for I/O-21 to I/O-24 50

2
Redundancy remark.
I/O signals 21 – 24 are affected by the redundancy safety functionality. See chapter 4.8

Manual 10  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 11(55)

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.

X1 - Pin number Link configuration X1 - Pin number Link configuration

12 17
13 18
14 19
22 27
23 28
24 29
32 37
33 39
34 38
45 36

4.4.2 X3 I/O connector

Front view of X3 connector

Name Description X3 pin number

I/O-25 General purpose input or output 21
I/O-26 General purpose input or output 31
I/O-27 General purpose input or output 41
I/O-28 General purpose input or output 42
Common/Supply 7 Common junction for I/O-25 to I/O-28 11

I/O-29 General purpose input or output 24

I/O-30 General purpose input or output 35
I/O-31 General purpose input or output 44
I/O-32 General purpose input or output 45
Common/Supply 8 Common junction for I/O-29 to I/O-32 43

I/O-33 General purpose input or output 5

I/O-34 General purpose input or output 4
I/O-35 General purpose input or output 3
I/O-36 General purpose input or output 2
Common/Supply 9 Common junction for I/O-33 to I/O-36 1

I/O-37 General purpose input or output 6

I/O-38 General purpose input or output 16
I/O-39 General purpose input or output 25
I/O-40 General purpose input or output 26

Manual 11  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 12(55)

Name Description X3 pin number

Common/Supply 10 Common junction for I/O-37 to I/O-40 15

I/O-41 General purpose input or output 49

I/O-42 General purpose input or output 48
I/O-43 General purpose input or output 47
I/O-44 General purpose input or output 46
Common/Supply 11 Common junction for I/O-41 to I/O-44 36

I/O-45 General purpose input or output 7

Common/Supply 12 Common junction for I/O-45 8

I/O-46 General purpose input or output 9

Common/Supply 13 Common junction for I/O-46 10

I/O-47 General purpose input or output 50

Common/Supply 14 Common junction for I/O-47 40

I/O-48 General purpose input or output 30

Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48 20

To make linking of common supplies easier the X3 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.

X3 - Pin number Link configuration X3 - Pin number Link configuration

12 17
13 18
14 19
22 27
23 28
32 29
33 37
34 38
39

Manual 12  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 13(55)

4.5 The X2 connector

The X2 connector has a jumper group to be used for supply voltage to the different analogue sensors.

Front view of X2 connector

4.5.1 Main Supply

24Volt AC or DC power supply for the node. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single
pins. DC voltage can be applied either way.

Name Pin number in connector

24INA X2/42
24INA X2/43
24INB X2/45
24INB X2/44

4.5.2 CAN
The two CAN nets are placed in the X2 connector. The first net use Bromma CAN (BCAN) voltage levels and the second
net use standard CAN voltage levels. The standard CAN net has to be terminated with external resistors.

Name Pin number in connector

CAN High 1 X2/30
CAN Low 1 X2/40
CAN High 2 / Reserved3 X2/50
CAN Low 2 / Reserved3 X2/20
CAN GND 2/ Reserved3 X2/48

3
CAN channel is std CAN for CAN-Open installations
Manual 13  2004 Bromma Conquip AB
File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 14(55)

4.5.3 Address Key

All nodes must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins ID0 – ID4 where pins being connected to the ground
pin corresponds to ”zeroes” and pins left unconnected are considered ”ones”.

Name Pin number in connector

ID4 X2/49
ID3 X2/39
ID2 X2/29
ID1 X2/19
ID0 X2/9
Ground X2/10

Configuration
Since all nodes are the same in reference to the software as well as hardware you have to configure them to carry different
roles. Setting the address key configures the role of the node. The address key has two other functions as well, enabling
Spreader stop and enabling redundancy block. These functions are described in chapters 4.10 and 4.8.

The address key setting is described in the following table:

Key input Node Spreader Redundancy block and Pins to be linked together in Node number identifier
stop
name override of landing X2 connector when viewing Display and
pins Log
00000 Test 10,9,19,29,39,49
00001 A1 No No 10,19,29,39,49 8
00010 A2 No No 10,9,29,39,49 9
00011 A3 No No 10,29,39,49 10
00100 A4 No No 10,9,19,39,49 11
00101 B1 Yes Yes 10,19,39,49 0
00110 B1 Yes No 10,9,39,49 0
00111 B1 No Yes 10,39,49 0
01000 B1 No No 10,9,19,29,49 0
01001 B2 Yes Yes 10,19,29,49 1
01010 B2 Yes No 10,9,29,49 1
01011 B2 No Yes 10,29,49 1
01100 B2 No No 10,9,19,49 1
01101 B3 No No 10,19,49 2
01110 B4 No No 10,9,49 3
01111 B5 No No 10,49 4
10000 B6 No No 10,9,19,29,39 5
10001 B7 No No 10,19,29,39 6
10010 B8 No No 10,9,29,39 7
10011- Not
11110 Used
11111 Test None

Example
Here are three examples of how to set the address key:
A node with id B1 without redundancy block or emergency stop has the address key 01000.
A node with id B2 with both redundancy block and emergency stop has the address key 01001.
A node with id A2 (cannot have redundancy block or emergency stop enabled) has the address key 00010.

Manual 14  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 15(55)

4.5.4 Analogue Inputs

There are two analogue inputs on each node via the X2 connector (the other two are via the X4 connector). Each signal
has its own 10V-reference voltage output, ground reference and sensor signal that should be connected to the sensor
device.

Name Pin number in connector

Analogue in 1 X2/18
10Vref 1 X2/28
Signal ground 1 X2/8

Analogue in 2 X2/17
10Vref 2 X2/27
Signal ground 2 X2/7

4.5.5 PWM Outputs

There are four PWM outputs for driving external loads, for example proportional hydraulic valves. Each output has two
connections, one in and one out. The load should be connected between these, since it is a current loop.

Name Pin number in connector

PWM out 1 X2/3
PWM in 1 X2/4

PWM out 2 X2/2

PWM in 2 X2/1

PWM out 3 X2/21

PWM in 3 X2/11

PWM out 4 X2/31

PWM in 4 X2/41

4.5.6 External Spreader Memory

An external EEPROM memory can be mounted on the spreader for spreader id and/or user defined purpose. The memory
is connected as below.

Name Pin number in connector Cable

10V supply X2/36 Red
Serial data X2/16 Blue
Serial clock X2/26 Green
Signal ground X2/6 Black

Manual 15  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 16(55)

4.5.7 RS 485 and SSI

The RS 485 connection can be used for external sensors or user defined purpose. The SSI connection can be used with
external sensors with up to 25 bits data length. The hardware and the pins in connector X2 are shared between RS 485
and SSI. Therefore it is only possible to use one of these connections at a time.

When used as a RS 485 the following pins are used:

Name Pin number in connector
Channel A X2/38
Channel B X2/37

When used as SSI the following pins are used:

Name Pin number in connector
Clock+ X2/38
Clock- X2/37
Data+ X2/15
Data- X2/25

4.5.8 Additional Jumper Group

To make linking of common supplies easier the X2 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.

X2 - Pin number Link configuration

22
23
32
33
34

Manual 16  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 17(55)

4.6 The X4 Connector

The X4 connector can be configured for field bus operation or one of three alternative functions. The alternatives are a RS
232 serial port, two additional analogue inputs or a duty cycle input. The function is selected by connecting different pin
headers to connector CN103. To find these pin headers the SCS2 node must be opened. The figure below shows the
relative placement of the pin headers. In each pin header the pins are number 1 to 5 or 1 to 10. In the figure a pin with a
circle to the left is number one in that header.

Field bus operation is selected by connecting the field bus connector on the Anybus card with pin header CN103. The RS
232 serial port is selected by connecting CN100 and CN103. The two additional analogue inputs are selected by
connecting CN105 and CN103. Finally the duty cycle input is selected by connecting CN104 with CN103.

Front view of connectors inside node.

Manual 17  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 18(55)

4.6.1 AnyBus
The AnyBus connector is used to interface any of the fieldbus types used apart from BCAN.

Name Pin number in connector

A-Line X4/2
B-Line X4/1
GND-BUS X4/3

4.6.2 Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs

These two analogue inputs use the same ground and 10 V reference voltages as the two analogue inputs in connector X2.
The input range is either 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA. The 0 to 20 mA range is selected for channel 1 by jumpering pin
number 1 and 2 in CN106 and for channel 2 by jumering pin number 4 and 5 in CN106. If no jumpers are added on
CN106 the voltage range, 0 to 10 V range is selected as default. In the 0 to 20 mA range a 500 Ohm resistor is used
internally and therefore the current being measured must be capable of driving 20 mA at 10 V to utilise the full 0 to 20
mA range.

Name Pin number in connector

GND X5/1
GND X5/2
Analogue Input 1 X5/5
Analogue Reference 10 V X5/3
Analogue Input 2 X5/4

Manual 18  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 19(55)

4.7 The X5 Connector

4.7.1 RS-232
The RS-232 connector, called BMS port, is located to the right of the node and is used only for this purpose.

Name Pin number in connector

TxD X5/1
RxD X5/2
RTS X5/5
CTS X5/3
GND X5/4

4.8 The Redundancy Function

For safety reasons the hardware is designed to override the operator commands in some occasions. This is to prevent the
operator from making wrong commands by accident when the spreader is not landed, prohibiting dangerous results.

C D
B

A E
The commands either from a remote node on the network or the local node itself.
The CPU and the system software as well as the application specific software (Spreader program).
The redundancy block of hardware static logic. The block has two functions, to make sure the twistlocks are energised
correctly at boot and to prevent the software from changing between lock and unlock when not landed during operation.
At boot the redundancy block checks the sensor status and determines if the twistlock valves are to be energised and in
what direction. After a correct landing and a transition between lock/unlock the redundancy block goes passive only
preventing the software to change between lock and unlock unless the Spreader is properly landed. In this state the
redundancy can be viewed as two relay contacts, where only one contact is closed at a time permitting the twistlock
outputs. The only way of overriding the logic of the redundancy block is to energise a specific I/O (landed override) on
that particular node.
The outputs to the lock/unlock valves
The sensor signals from landed, locked and unlocked.

To enable the redundancy the address key on B1 or B2 is used, this then automatically means you have to use input 48 as
Landed override to be able to override the hardware logic. The landed override signal sets the spreader in landed mode
and thereby temporarily disables the redundancy block.

Manual 19  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 20(55)

4.9 Field bus Connections.

Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the AnyBus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.

The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.

4.9.1 Mapping of I/O

OUT IN
Byte 0-63 Byte 0-63
Project Project
specific specific
outputs inputs

Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display; hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.

4.9.1.1 Spreader diagnostic area.

Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)

Manual 20  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 21(55)

4.9.1.2 System diagnostic area.

This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
Byte 8 => Node ID
Byte 9-10 => Row Number (of source code)
Byte 11-16 => Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 17-18 => sequential counter

The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

4.10 Spreader Stop

A Spreader stop function can be used in the system.

This is performed by enabling Spreader stop using the address key on B1 or B2 and connecting the signal from the
spreader stop button to digital port 47 on the corresponding node (B1 or B2).

The spreader stop configuration must correspond to the spreader stop setting in the spreader program. This means that if
and only if the spreader stop on a node is enabled, digital port 47 must be connected to the Spreader Stop component in
the spreader program.

Manual 21  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 22(55)

4.11 Fault Finding table

Symptom What to do Comment

Power Supply
Node won’t start. No text appears in Measure the main supply. The voltage The green and all red LED’s in the
the display after power-on. should exceed 17V AC or DC. display should be lit.

RS-232
BMS system can not communicate Probe TxD and RxD lines with Data lines should show square waves
with the node. oscilloscope while trying to between –10V to +10V relative to
communicate. GND pin.

CAN
The node can not communicate with Probe bus lines with oscilloscope.
the other nodes. CAN high should show square waves
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.

Digital Ports
Input signal fault Check if LED indicator on I/O module The LED should be lit when current
responds to sensor signal. flows through the module.
Check the Common connection for
correct supply.
Output signal fault Check if LED indicator on I/O module The LED should be lit when the circuit
responds to command. is closed.
Check the load for proper connection The load should be connected between
and grounding. the modules out pin and ground.
Check for broken fuse on the I/O
module.
Check the Common connection for The supply voltage depends on the
correct supply. type of load. 220V,110V,24V or other.

Node ID
The node stops at start-up with Node Measure the voltage of all ID pins. 5V This can indicate that the node has
Id displayed. represent ones and 0V represents wrong id strapped telling the node to
zeroes. The measures should indicate participate in the system with wrong
the expected id. role.

Analogue Inports
Analogue input signal appears to be Check the reference voltage relative to There should be exactly 10V
faulty. the GND. difference between them.
Check if the node chassis is properly This is very important in an AC driven
grounded to the spreader. system.

PWM Outports
PWM output appears to be faulty. Check the load for errors.
Try another load.

Manual 22  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 23(55)

5 Software tools

5.1 Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.

5.2 ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.

5.3 BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.

Manual 23  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 24(55)

6 Miscellaneous

6.1 Data sheet

Parameter Note Min Max Unit

Operating voltage Pin X2 42-44 17 40 V AC/DC

Current consumption Depending on number and type of I/O modules 300 800 mA
Power monitoring Level and quality measurement of voltage.
Indicated via LED’s. (faults stored in log)
0
Temperature Operating temperature -40 +85 C
Internal temperature monitoring
IP67
EMC conformity In accordance with 89/336/EEC:
EN 50081-2: 1993
EN 50082-2: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 6: 1996
EN 61000-4-8:1993
ENV 50204: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 4: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 2: 1995
Controller 32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz
Memory Program 1.4Mb
Log/NVRAM 128kb
External EEPROM 256byte
Time 1*realtime clock
PWM current output 4*Current controlled. Short circuit protected. 0 2,5 A
Analogue inputs 12 bit resolution voltage/current 0 10 V
10V reference voltage output
SSI serial 300 kHz
I/O 48 programmable Voltage depending on type of module used. 12 230 V AC/DC
Galvanic isolation. LED indication.
SC/OL protected 3A.
Scan time System scan time 50 ms
Node scan time 5 ms
Serial interfaces BCAN – Bromma CAN based bus
RS485 – Asynchronous for sensors etc.
RS232 – For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
Diagnostics System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
8 character display for messages & information
Power level via LED’s
Event and error log
FB programming Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions

Manual 24  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 25(55)

6.2 Dimensions

Figure 1 All dimensions in mm

Manual 25  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 26(55)

7 Appendix A (Error messages)

The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). It is the same information in both interfaces and is explained in this appendix in the table below.

Nu level Description of code Description of sub code Consequence Hints

m.l
cod
e
0
1 WARNING Failed reading temperature .
2 spare 0 .
3 spare 1 .
4 spare 2 .
5 spare 3 .
6 ERROR Two different PCs' trying to Id of one of the node System is brought into Ensure that only
download to the system connected to the PC failsafe mode. one PC is
downloading
7 spare 4 .
8 spare 5 .
9 spare 6 .
10 spare 7 .
11 spare 8 .
12 ERROR Program memory failure, HW . System is brought into failsafe mode.
fault
13 ERROR No response from slave when . System is brought into Ensure that all
initialising system failsafe mode. slave are
powered up &
correctly
addressed
14 ERROR Boot sequence failed . System is brought into Restart system
failsafe mode.
15 spare 9 .
16 spare 10 .
17 spare 11 .
18 spare 12 .
19 spare 13 .
20 ERROR Downloading error, connection . System is brought into reload program
broken failsafe mode.
21 spare 14 .
22 ERROR Memory collides when . System is brought into recompile and
downloading program failsafe mode. download
program again
23 spare 15 .

Manual 26  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 27(55)

24 spare 16 .
25 spare 17 .
26 spare 18 .
27 spare 19 .
28 WARNING No data in program/system . System cannot start Contact Bromma
memory
29 spare 20 .
30 WARNING Checksum of memory corrupt .
31 ERROR HW fault on memory . System is brought into Contact Bromma
failsafe mode. if problem
persists
32 spare 21 .
33 spare 22 .
34 ERROR System init. Display. This error The error codes during the system boot phase that have caused the
code accumalates and displays system to go into failsafe mode
the errors ocurred during the
system boot, since no reporting
is done until the system has
started.
35 ERROR System failed in reading . System is brought into reload and
spreader program from memory failsafe mode. restart
36 ERROR No spreader program residing in . System is brought into download
memory failsafe mode. program
37 ERROR System failed to run spreader . System is brought into reload proram
program failsafe mode.
38 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
39 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
40 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
41 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader.
instances failed failsafe mode. If problems
persist contact
Bromma
42 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

Manual 27  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 28(55)

43 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader

instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
44 WARNING I/O message lost .
45 ERROR Memory failure . System is brought into Restart system.
failsafe mode. If problems
persist contact
Bromma
46 spare 23 .
47 spare 24 .
48 spare 25 .
49 spare 26 .
50 ERROR Failed to configure I/O on node The node ID which has System is brought into restart
generated the error failsafe mode.
51 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system

52 ERROR System initialising error when The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuring nodes I/O generated the error failsafe mode.
53 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system

54 spare 27
55 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system

56 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check

requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
57 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check
requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
58 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check
requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
59 INFO System started .
60 WARNING TWL - No twistlock sensor . Message stored in log and check wiring,
inputs active during system start displayed on Spreader sensors and
connectors or
mechanical
reasons

Manual 28  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 29(55)

61 WARNING TWL - One twistlock indicating ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
both locked and unlocked which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
62 WARNING TWL - timeout locking. Locked ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
signal has not been received which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or
after output to valve warning wiring or
mechanical
reasons
63 WARNING TWL - Locked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
without command/output when warning and sensor
twistlocks are all locked adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
64 WARNING TWL - timeout unlocking. ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
Unlocked signal has not been which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or
received after output to valve warning wiring or
mechanical
reasons
65 WARNING TWL - Unocked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
without command/output when warning and sensor
twistlocks are all unlocked adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
66 WARNING TWL - all landed sensors not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
received after first landed and which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
timeout. warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
67 WARNING TWL - landed sensor not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
released when the other sensors which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
not active and a timer has timed warning and sensor
out adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
68 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. No . Stops the telescope and check for
valid sensor found within displays/stores message damaged sensors
timeout limit after output has and sensor
been activated adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
69 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. ID no. of the sensor Stops the telescope and check for
Wrong sensor in telescoping missing which displays/stores message damaged sensors
sequence reached generated the warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons

Manual 29  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 30(55)

70 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID no. of the lost Message stored in log and displayed on
position sensor is lost without an sensor Spreader
output.

71 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. Two ID no.s. of the sensors Message stored in log and check for
different position sensors displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
indicating simultaneously and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
72 ERROR Duplicate answers from one The node ID which has System is brought into restart (check
node during boot verification generated the error failsafe mode. address keying)
73 ERROR Wrong boot version in a node The node ID which has System is brought into contact Bromma
generated the error failsafe mode.
74 ERROR No answer when master The node ID which has System is brought into restart
requesting boot version. generated the error failsafe mode.
75 spare 28
76 spare 29
77 spare 30
78 spare 31 .
79 spare 32 .
80 ERROR Wrong node answered request The node ID which has System is brought into restart
from master to check if pc was generated the error failsafe mode.
connected
81 ERROR No answer after master request The node ID which has System is brought into restart, check
to check PC port (RS232) generated the error failsafe mode. connections
82 ERROR Unable to download program . System is brought into retry
failsafe mode.
83 ERROR Unable to download program . System is brought into Check spreader
(checksum failure) failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
84 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time .
couldn't be read
85 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time .
couldn't be set
86 INFO minimum system CPU cycle time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
time. Periodically reported every Spreader
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
87 INFO maximum system CPU cycle time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
time. Periodically reported every Spreader
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
88 INFO average system CPU cycle time. time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
Periodically reported every half Spreader
hour. The counter is reset after

Manual 30  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 31(55)

reporting.

89 spare 33 .
90 INFO The number of control loops The number of the Message stored in log and displayed on
exceeding 100ms for th last half counter Spreader
hour. The counter is reset after
reporting
91 spare 34 .
92 spare 35 .
93 spare 36 .
94 ERROR No operative system in Node . Systems fails to start contact Bromma
95 ERROR Duplicate answer on The node ID which has System is brought into check adress key
determining Spreader stop set up generated the error failsafe mode.
96 ERROR No answer on Master request for . System is brought into check adress key
"Spreader stop" configuration failsafe mode.
97 INFO Spreader stop has been 0= activated Message stored in log and displayed on
activated/deactivated 1=deactivated Spreader

98 spare 37 .
99 spare 38 .
100 ERROR Spreader program fault . System is brought into
recompile and
failsafe mode. reload spreader
program
101 WARNING CAN message buffer is full The first message type Message stored in log and displayed on
in the buffer Spreader

102 ERROR System failed to initialise HW . System shutdown contact Bromma

103 spare 39 .
104 spare 40 .
105 ERROR Onboard NV RAM failed . System is brought into check
memory test failsafe mode. battery/restart/co
ntact Bromma

106 spare 41 .
107 WARNING 10V reference voltage too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

108 WARNING 12V internal supply too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

Manual 31  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 32(55)

109 ERROR Battery voltage too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check battery
displayed on Spreader

110 ERROR The System failed to lock th I/O . System is brought into restart
on a node during system init. failsafe mode.
111 spare 42
112 spare 43 .
113 spare 44 .
114 INFO System is shutting down .
115 INFO System shutdown has been .
completed
116 spare 45 .
117 spare 46 .
118 INFO Landed override has been .
activated
119 INFO Landed override has been .
deactivated
120 spare 47 .
121 spare 48 .
122 spare 49 .
123 spare 50 .
124 spare 51 .
125 spare 52 .
126 spare 53 .
127 spare 54 .
128 spare 55 .
129 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
130 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
131 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma

Manual 32  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 33(55)

132 spare 56 .
133 spare 57 .
134 spare 58 .
135 spare 59 .
136 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
137 spare 60 .
138 spare 61 .
139 spare 62 .
140 WARNING Unknown CAN message The ID type of the Message stored in log and displayed on
received message Spreader

141 INFO CAN messages missed. The count of the Message stored in log and displayed on
Cyclically reported. missed messages Spreader

142 ERROR Two nodes within the system The ID which is System is brought into check and
have the same ID/adress duplicate failsafe mode. correct the
adress key
143 WARNING 10V reference voltage is too Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
high displayed on Spreader

144 WARNING 12V internal voltage is too high Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

145 WARNING Battery voltage is too high Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

146 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

147 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Manual 33  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 34(55)

148 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

149 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

150 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

151 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

152 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

153 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

154 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the spreader program.

155 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the spreader program.

156 spare 63 .
157 spare 64 .
158 spare 65 .
159 spare 66 .
160 spare 67 .
161 WARNING CAN error . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

Manual 34  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 35(55)

162 WARNING RS232 error . Message stored in log and displayed on

Spreader

163 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V

164 ERROR Power monitor P1 = sensor . System is taken down check supplies
supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

165 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V

166 ERROR Power monitor P2 = internal . System is taken down check supplies
logic supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

167 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V

168 ERROR Power monitor P3 = PWM . System is taken down check supplies
supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

169 WARNING System failed to read/write to a ID of port: Message stored in log and check supplies
I/O port Digital=0+port_no, displayed on Spreader
Analogue=100+port_n
o, PWM=200+port_no,
encoder=300+port_no.

170 spare 68 .
171 spare 69 .
172 spare 70 .
173 spare 71 .

Manual 35  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 36(55)

174 ERROR No answer when on general . Message stored in log and displayed on
information request between Spreader
nodes.

175 INFO TWL - twistlock lock command . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader

176 INFO TWL - twistlock unlock . Message stored in log and displayed on
command received Spreader

177 INFO TWL - twistlock has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
locked Spreader

178 INFO TWL - twistlock has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
unlocked Spreader

179 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Expand command received Spreader

180 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Retract command received Spreader

181 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
Command to go to a speceific requested Spreader
position has been received

182 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. The The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
desired position has been requested Spreader
reached

183 WARNING TELESCOPE - automatic type. 0 = Desired position The telescopic motion is check sensor,
The telescope hasn't reached its' not reached within time stopped until a new pressure,mechan
position within time limit limit. command is given. ics. If necessary
1 = telescope has not Message stored in log and calibrate system.
moved more than 1 cm displayed on Spreader
during 3 seconds.

184 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
expand command received Spreader

185 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Retract command received Spreader

Manual 36  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 37(55)

186 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
Command to go to a specific requested Spreader
position received

187 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
The desired position reached requested Spreader

188 INFO The year has been set current value (year) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

189 INFO The month has been set current value (month) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

190 INFO The day/date has been set current value (date) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

191 INFO The time of day (hour) has been current value (hour) Message stored in log and displayed on
set Spreader

192 WARNING Nocontact with the master for The ID of the node Message stored in log and check
10s which doesn't have displayed on Spreader connections
contact

193 ERROR Message reported during boot. . restart (check

Unknown role address keying)
194 INFO Information request (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader

195 INFO Download request active . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

196 INFO Information request received . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

197 INFO set time request received . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

198 INFO Boot version request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

199 spare 72 .

Manual 37  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 38(55)

200 INFO Download flag request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

201 spare 73 .
202 spare 74 .
203 spare 75 .
204 spare 76 .
205 INFO Check flash memory request . Message stored in log and displayed on
received. (system boot Spreader
functionality)

206 INFO Restart node request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

207 INFO System start init. (system boot . Message stored in log and displayed on
functionality) Spreader

208 INFO System look for downloadflag. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

209 INFO Send datablock request. (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader

210 INFO Received datablock. (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader

211 INFO Download in progress percentage of progress shown on Spreader display

downloaded data
212 INFO copy serial information to flash . Message stored in log and displayed on
memory Spreader

213 spare 77 .
214 spare 78 .
215 ERROR No answer when waiting for . System is brought into failsafe mode.
present nodes response
216 INFO Inforamtion on present nodes . Message stored in log and displayed on
has been received Spreader

217 ERROR Download timeout . System is brought into reload

failsafe mode.
218 spare 79 .

Manual 38  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 39(55)

219 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.

answers from system members
during boot
220 ERROR The size of received data is to . System is brought into failsafe mode.
large. Boot message
221 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
222 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
223 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
224 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
225 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
226 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
227 spare 80 .
228 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
229 INFO Spreader error and event log has . Message stored in log and displayed on
been cleared Spreader

230 ERROR Failed to set up spreader destination of error System is brought into Check spreader
program correctly failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
231 ERROR Spreader program download . System is brought into Check spreader
error failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
232 ERROR Spreader program download . System is brought into Check spreader
error failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
233 INFO Power monitor P1 = sensor . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader

234 INFO Power monitor P2 = internal . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader

Manual 39  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 40(55)

235 INFO Power monitor P3 = PWM . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader

236 INFO Reboot (restart) request sent . Message stored in log and displayed on
from master to slaves. Happens Spreader
when slaves are powered on
before master at system start
237 INFO System has been taken down to . Message stored in log and displayed on
idle mode. Ie waiting to wake Spreader
up.

238 Spare 81 .
239 INFO System failed to cancel . Message stored in log and displayed on
shutdown process Spreader

240 INFO No answer when attempting to . Message stored in log and displayed on
cancel shutdown process Spreader

241 INFO System received timeout when . Message stored in log and displayed on
attempting to cancel shutdown Spreader
process

242 INFO System shutdown aborted . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

243 spare 82 .
244 INFO TWL - The spreader has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
landed Spreader

245 INFO TWL - The Spreader has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
totally lifted (not landed) Spreader

246 INFO FLIPPER - flipper up command . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader

247 INFO FLIPPER - flipper down . Message stored in log and displayed on
command received Spreader

248 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 17V

Manual 40  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 41(55)

249 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage <17V

250 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 17V

251 ERROR System failed to initialise fielbus . System is brought into failsafe mode.
interface
252 ERROR Duplicate answers when setting . System is brought into failsafe mode.
up fieldbus interface
253 ERROR No answer when configuring . System is brought into failsafe mode.
fieldbus interface
254 WARNING System failed in locking .
fieldbus interface
255 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
failed to get to their upper failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
position within time limit nics/sensors

256 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' upper position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
within time limit nics/sensors

257 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' upper position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
within time limit nics/sensors

258 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes left . Twin down sequence check
timed out when expanding to stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
their attach position. Failed to Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors
reach switch within time limit position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader

259 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes right . Twin down sequence check
timed out when expanding to stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
their attach position. Failed to Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors
reach switch within time limit position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader

260 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' lower position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
(connect) within time limit nics/sensors

Manual 41  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 42(55)

261 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' lower position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
(connect) within time limit nics/sensors

262 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
failed to get to their lower failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
position within time limit nics/sensors

263 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor lost ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
unexpectedly. (not due to failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
output) nics/sensors

264 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
received when twinboxes are failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
down nics/sensors

265 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook down . Message stored in log and check
sensor lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

266 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook down . Message stored in log and check
sensor lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

267 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook up sensor . Message stored in log and check
lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

268 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook up sensor . Message stored in log and check
lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

269 ERROR System failed to init. RS485 Node ID System is brought into restart / contact
failsafe mode. Bromma
270 ERROR Duplicate answers in system Node ID System is brought into restart / contact
when setting up RS485 failsafe mode. Bromma
271 ERROR System timed out when trying to . System is brought into restart / contact
configure RS485 failsafe mode. Bromma
272 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Teach in command received Spreader

273 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - expand . Message stored in log and displayed on

command received Spreader

274 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - retract . Message stored in log and displayed on

command received Spreader

Manual 42  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 43(55)

275 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - left . Message stored in log and displayed on

console reached zero gap Spreader
position

276 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - right . Message stored in log and displayed on

console reached zero gap Spreader
position

277 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs . Message stored in log and displayed on

expand in motion Spreader

278 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs . Message stored in log and displayed on

retract in motion Spreader

279 WARNING TWINTELESCOPE - hasn't . motion is stopped. check

reached an endstop when in Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
motion within time limit displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves

280 spare 83 .
281 INFO TWINMPS - teaching a pre- The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
defined position teached Spreader

282 INFO TWINMPS - command to go to The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
a pre-defined position has been requested Spreader
received

283 INFO TWINMPS - A command to . Message stored in log and displayed on

store a new value for a log Spreader
position has been received

284 INFO TWINMPS - A command to The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
return to a log position has been requested Spreader
received

285 WARNING TWINMPS - the twinlegs . Motion is stopped. check

haven't reached their requested Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
position within time limit. displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves

286 INFO TWIN195 - twin up command . Message stored in log and displayed on
has been received Spreader

287 INFO TWIN195 - twin down . Message stored in log and displayed on
command has been received Spreader

Manual 43  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 44(55)

288 INFO TWIN195 - twin boxes have . Message stored in log and displayed on
reached their upper position Spreader

289 INFO TWIN195 - twin boxes have . Message stored in log and displayed on
reached their lower position Spreader

290 INFO TTDS - override request . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader

291 INFO TTDS - override request ended . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

292 WARNING Buffer full transferring serial . Message stored in log and displayed on
port info over CAN bus Spreader

293 WARNING No answer when transferring . Message stored in log and displayed on
serial port info over Can bus Spreader

294 ERROR Failed to communicate with . System is brought

RS485 into failsafe mode.

295 spare 84 .
296 spare 85 .
297 spare 86 .
298 ERROR Failed reading spreader System is brought into Check spreader
program. failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
299 spare 87
300 spare 88
301 WARNING RS485 not functioning as Depending on type of Message stored in log and displayed on
intended sensor/device Spreader

302 WARNING AnyBus not functioning as Depending on type of Message stored in log and displayed on
intended sensor/device Spreader

303 WARNING Error in locking AnyBus setup Node ID

304 WARNING Timeout when trying to lock
AnyBus setup
305 WARNING Wrong node answered when locking AnyBus setup

306 INFO Spreader properties Number of containers Message stored in log and

Manual 44  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 45(55)

loaded/unloaded displayed on Spreader

307 WARNING AnyBus external bus failure Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
308 WARNING AnyBus Status ok Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
309 WARNING AnyBus external bus ok Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
310 WARNING Wrong node answered when EEPROM setup

311 ERROR Timeout when expecting answer from node on EEPROM

312 WARNING Spreader properties

313 WARNING Spreader properties
314 WARNING Spreader properties
315 WARNING Spreader properties
316 WARNING Spreader properties
317 WARNING Spreader properties
318 WARNING Read EEPROM failure
319 WARNING Read NVRAM failure
320 WARNING EEPROM checksum failure
321 INFO Spreader properties EEPROM
set ok
322 WARNING EEPROM set failure
323 INFO Spreader properties EEPROM attached to new node

324 INFO RS485 status ok

325 INFO Gravity point to centre
command
326 INFO Gravity point to left side
command
327 INFO Gravity point to right side
command
328 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
centre position
329 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
left end stop
330 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
right endstop
331 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor wrap .
around warning. Sensor too near
the value where it wraps around
and begins from zero again.

Manual 45  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 46(55)

332 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor has .

wrapped around. The value has
gone from maximum to
minimum in one CPU cycle.
333 INFO Added value to NVRAM .
successfully
334 WARNING Spreader stop configuration node that reported the problem
mismatch
335 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding digital I/O
336 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding analogue I/O
337 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding encoder data
338 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding AnyBus message
339 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding RS485 data
340 WARNING No contact with the node for 3s. node from which an answer is expected
specified by the Sub code
341 ERROR Error when trying to dowload .
program
342 ERROR Node is missing on the bus node that is missing
during system start.
343 ERROR Inclination sensor initialisation node that failed to initialise the sensor
error
344 ERROR Timeout when trying to node that failed to initialise the sensor
intitialise the inclination sensor
345 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding inclination sensor
346 INFO Node bus communication ok. .
BCAN ok
347 INFO BCAN bus status warning. .
348 WARNING BCAN bus communication off. .
349 ERROR AnyBus Spreader/systems node from which an answer is expected
diagnostic area failed to set up.
350 ERROR Timeout when trying to set up
AnyBus Spreader/system
diagnostic area
351 ERROR AnyBus Assert diagnostic area node from which an answer is expected
failed to set up
352 ERROR Timeout when trying to set up
AnyBus Assert diagnostic area.

Manual 46  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 47(55)

353 INFO Present nodes shown in sub code bitwise OR for all included nodes. 12bit Value

354 INFO AnyBus slave card plugged in

node ID holding the
card
355 INFO AnyBus Master card plugged in node ID holding the
card
356 WARNING AnyBus card missing node ID of the node missing the card

357 INFO AnyBus Input data area size size of data area (bytes)
358 INFO AnyBus output data area size size of data area (bytes)
359 ERROR Hardware initialisation failed psu_mon.=1, temp_sens.=2, realtime_clock=3
(system prog.)

360 ERROR NVRAM full. No space left for .

Storage
361 ERROR NVRAM checksum Error .
362 ERROR OS code. Operating system fatal code from OS call Bromma
error
363 ERROR OS subcode.Operating system code from OS call Bromma
fatal error
364 ERROR OS extra.Operating system fatal code from OS call Bromma
error
365 ERROR Local regulator (PID) failed. node ID that failed to restart
initialise the regulator
366 ERROR Local regulator (PID) timeout . retstart
367 ERROR Error in interpreting the spreader . Check versions
program. Parameter mismatch of system and
between system and ABE file. ABE.

368 ERROR Error in recognising a . Check versions

component downloaded with the of system and
spreader program ABE.
369 WARNING Gravity point haven't reached .
the requested position within
time limit.
370 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding regulator data.
371 ERROR Error in locking regulator setup .

372 INFO The Spreader info has been set. The index of the field
which is set.

373 INFO The Spreader info has been set. The value of the field
which is set. The
logged value is in the
range 0-9999. This
range limit has nothing

Manual 47  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 48(55)

to with the actual value

set in the Spreader info.

374 INFO The time of day (minute) has Current value (minute) Message stored in log and displayed on
been set Spreader

375 INFO Received a change bitrate Requested bitrate

request. Boot message.

376 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor Message stored in log and displayed on

values from left hook Spreader

377 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor Message stored in log and displayed on

values from right hook Spreader

378 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(start sequence) handle start sequence. Spreader

379 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(download sequence) download. Spreader

380 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(finish sequence) handle finish sequence. Spreader

381 WARNING Disabeling outputs failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
disable outputs. Spreader

382 WARNING No answer when attempting to Message stored in log and displayed on
disable outputs. Spreader

383 WARNING Enabeling outputs faild. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
enabeling outputs. Spreader

384 WARNING No answer when attempting to Message stored in log and displayed on
enabeling outputs. Spreader

385 INFO AutoTuner stored in NVRAM Regulator index. Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

Manual 48  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 49(55)

386 INFO Tandem - Teaching a pre- The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
defined position teached Spreader

387 INFO Tandem - A command to store a Message stored in log and displayed on
new value for a log position has Spreader
been received

388 INFO Tandem - command to go to a The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
pre-defined position has been requested Spreader
received

389 INFO Tandem - A command to return The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
to a log position has been requested Spreader
received

390 WARNING Tandem - Cylinder position has The ID of the cylinder Message stored in log and displayed on
changed more than allowed. Spreader

391 INFO Tandem – Both landside and Message stored in log and displayed on
waterside spreaders enabled Spreader

392 INFO Tandem – Landside spreader Message stored in log and displayed on
enabled Spreader

393 INFO Tandem – Waterside spreader Message stored in log and displayed on
enabled Spreader

394 INFO TandemPush – A push Message stored in log and displayed on

command received Spreader

395 INFO TandemPush – Inner position Message stored in log and displayed on
reached. Spreader

396 INFO TELESCOPE – Impact detected Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

397 INFO TELESCOPE – Telescope is Message stored in log and displayed on

autocorrecting Spreader

398 WARNING TELESCOPE – Sensor value is Message stored in log and displayed on
out of range Spreader

Manual 49  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 50(55)

399 INFO TELESCOPE – Bumped out of Message stored in log and displayed on
signal window Spreader

400 INFO TWL – TTDS active Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

401 WARNING TWL – Lock attempt with Message stored in log and displayed on
TTDS active Spreader

402 INFO Digital I/O configured on an Node id on where I/O Message stored in log and displayed on
AnybusGateway configured Spreader

403 INFO Analogue I/O configured on an Node id on where I/O Message stored in log and displayed on
AnybusGateway configured Spreader

404 INFO PWM configured on an Node id on where I/O Message stored in log and displayed on
AnybusGateway configured Spreader

405 INFO ASC – Antisway sytem active Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

406 INFO ASC – Antisway sytem ready Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

407 INFO ASC – Antisway sytem failed Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreaderi

408 spare 88

409 ERROR OS extra 2.Operating system code from OS call Bromma

fatal error

410 INFO Current hardware version HW type Type of hardware version.

5 = SCS2 revision
4 = SCS2
6 = Anybus gateway
411 WARNING Strange parameter saved in Parameter No. The PID component found a strange
NVRAM. (AutoTuner) parameter saved in NVRAM. The PID
component uses the ABE parameters
instead.

Manual 50  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 51(55)

412 WARNING Auto Tuner – Finished but failed Parameter No. Some parameters could not be calculated.
to calculate some parameters Check sensors etc.

413 ERROR CANopen – Failed to initialize

the software.

414 ERROR CANopen – Failed to configure Check spreader program

PDO

415 ERROR CANopen - Error in locking

CANopen setup

416 INFO CANopen – Node removed from Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
heartbeat list Spreader

417 INFO CANopen – New node added to Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
heart beat list Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

418 INFO CANopen – Boot message Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
received from node Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

419 INFO CANopen – Node stopped Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

420 INFO CANopen – Node in operational Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
state Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

421 INFO CANopen – Node in Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
preoperational state Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

422 WARNING CANopen – Heartbeat failed on Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
node Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

423 ERROR CANopen – To many slaves in Message stored in log and displayed on
use Spreader. Check spreader program.

424 ERROR CANopen – Failed to configure Message stored in log and displayed on
SDO Spreader. Check spreader program.

Manual 51  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 52(55)

425 WARNING CANopen – Failed to send SDO Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. Check spreader program.

426 WARNING CANopen – Bus off occured Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader.

427 ERROR CANopen – Failed to change the Message stored in log and displayed on
bitrate on CAN interface Spreader.

428 Spare 89

429 Spare 90

430 Spare 91

431 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 1 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
432 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 2 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
433 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 3 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
434 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 4 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
435 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 5 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
436 INFO CANopen – Slave OK Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
437 WARNING CANopen – Generic error Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual

Manual 52  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 53(55)

438 WARNING CANopen – Current Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

439 WARNING CANopen – Current, device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
input side Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

440 WARNING CANopen – Current, inside Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
device Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

441 WARNING CANopen – Current, device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
output side Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

442 WARNING CANopen - Voltage Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

443 WARNING CANopen – Mains voltage Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

444 WARNING CANopen - Voltage inside Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

445 WARNING CANopen – Voltage output Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

446 WARNING CANopen - Temperature Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

447 WARNING CANopen – Temperature Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
ambient Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

448 WARNING CANopen – Temperature device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

449 WARNING CANopen – Hardware device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

450 WARNING CANopen – Software device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

Manual 53  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 54(55)

451 WARNING CANopen – Software inside Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

452 WARNING CANopen – software user Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

453 WARNING CANopen – Data set Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

454 WARNING CANopen – Additional module Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

455 WARNING CANopen - Monitoring Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

456 WARNING CANopen – CAN overrun Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

457 WARNING CANopen – CAN error passive Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

458 WARNING CANopen – Lifeguard or Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
heartbeat Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

459 WARNING CANopen – Recover from bus Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
off Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

460 WARNING CANopen - Transmit COB id Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

461 WARNING CANopen – General Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
communication Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

462 WARNING CANopen – General protocol Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

463 WARNING CANopen – PDO not processed Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

Manual 54  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 Document: Project: Project No
Manual SCS2
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 55(55)

464 WARNING CANopen – PDO length Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
exceeded Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

465 WARNING CANopen – External error Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

466 WARNING CANopen – Additional Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
functions Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

467 WARNING CANopen – Device specific Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
468 WARNING CANopen – Node missing Node number Check CAN connections and spreader
program.

469 INFO CANopen – Node id changed Changed to node Message stored in log and displayed on
number Spreader.

470 WARNING CANopen – Node id chage Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
failed Spreader.

471 WARNING TTDS – No sensors - Message stored in log and displayed on

Spreader

Manual 55  2004 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
 User Manual

Version 1.03

Revision Issued by Date Measures

PA1 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems 2000-05-26 First draft.
PA2 Andy Lewis, Bromma Conquip 2000-08-09 Corrections
PA3 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems 2000-10-10 More corrections
A GO, AL 2000-10-10 Version 1.0
PB1 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems 2001-01-22 PID component, Online monitoring (manual and tutorial), *.apd
changed to *.spr, Figure numbering corrected, Allowed character set.
PB2 Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems 2002-06-04 Revision after system release 1.04
PB3 Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems 2003-06-10 Revision after system release 1.05

Printed: 03-10-16 10.51

 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 2(86)

Table of contents

1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................5

2 INSTALLING ABE...........................................................................................................5
2.1 HW requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 5

2.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 5

2.3 Disclaimer................................................................................................................................................................. 5

3 USER INTERFACE .........................................................................................................6

3.1 Main window............................................................................................................................................................ 6

3.2 Error control............................................................................................................................................................ 6

3.3 Multiple language support ...................................................................................................................................... 6

3.4 General functions..................................................................................................................................................... 6

3.4.1 File..................................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4.2 Edit .................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.4.3 Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.4 Tools .................................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.5 Help ................................................................................................................................................................... 8

4 SYSTEM VIEW ................................................................................................................9

4.1 General ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9

4.2 Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................ 9

4.2.1 Author................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.2 Last date saved .................................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2.3 Creation date.................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.4 Version number ............................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.5 Revision number.............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.6 Spreader type ................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.7 Drawing number .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.8 Customer.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.9 Comments........................................................................................................................................................ 10

5 PIN CONFIGURATION VIEW........................................................................................11

5.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 11

5.2 Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 11

5.2.1 Address key ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2.2 Exists port........................................................................................................................................................ 11
5.2.3 Anybus I/O ...................................................................................................................................................... 12

2(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 3(86)

6 COMPONENT VIEW .....................................................................................................12

6.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 12

6.2 Page functionality .................................................................................................................................................. 13

6.2.1 Adding pages ................................................................................................................................................... 13

6.3 Component functionality ...................................................................................................................................... 13

6.3.1 Adding a component........................................................................................................................................ 13
6.3.2 Moving a component ....................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3.3 Selecting multiple components........................................................................................................................ 14
6.3.4 Cutting / coping / pasting components ............................................................................................................ 14
6.3.5 Delete a component ......................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3.6 Connecting / disconnecting components ......................................................................................................... 14
6.3.7 Online monitoring............................................................................................................................................ 14

7 LOAD VIEW...................................................................................................................15
7.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 15

7.2 Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 15

8 COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................16
8.1 Controllers.............................................................................................................................................................. 16
8.1.1 TLC4 – Twistlock Controller 4 ....................................................................................................................... 16
8.1.2 TLC8 – Twistlock Controller 8 ....................................................................................................................... 19
8.1.3 FAC – Flipper Arm Controller ........................................................................................................................ 23
8.1.4 DPS – Discrete Positioning System................................................................................................................. 25
8.1.5 Tower – Head block ........................................................................................................................................ 28
8.1.6 APS – Automatic Positioning System ............................................................................................................. 31
8.1.7 MPS – Memory position system...................................................................................................................... 35
8.1.8 Twin Telescope................................................................................................................................................ 39
8.1.9 TwinUpDown .................................................................................................................................................. 41
8.1.10 PID................................................................................................................................................................... 45
8.1.11 AutoTuner........................................................................................................................................................ 49

8.2 AnyBus ................................................................................................................................................................... 52

8.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 52
8.2.2 Anybus System ................................................................................................................................................ 53
8.2.3 Output Word .................................................................................................................................................... 54
8.2.4 Output Byte ..................................................................................................................................................... 54
8.2.5 Output Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 55
8.2.6 Input Word....................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.7 Input Byte ........................................................................................................................................................ 56
8.2.8 Input Bit........................................................................................................................................................... 56

8.3 Guards .................................................................................................................................................................... 57

8.3.1 Spreader stop ................................................................................................................................................... 57
8.3.2 TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System .......................................................................................................... 57
8.3.3 Analogue guard ............................................................................................................................................... 58
8.3.4 Digital guard .................................................................................................................................................... 59

8.4 Gates ....................................................................................................................................................................... 60

8.4.1 AND ................................................................................................................................................................ 60
8.4.2 NAND.............................................................................................................................................................. 61

3(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 4(86)

8.4.3 NOR................................................................................................................................................................. 61
8.4.4 OR ................................................................................................................................................................... 62
8.4.5 NOT................................................................................................................................................................. 63
8.4.6 XOR................................................................................................................................................................. 63
8.4.7 SR Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.4.8 RS Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.4.9 Logical gate ..................................................................................................................................................... 65

8.5 Digital ..................................................................................................................................................................... 65

8.5.1 OD Timer – On Delay Timer........................................................................................................................... 65
8.5.2 UpDn Counter – Up Down Counter ................................................................................................................ 66
8.5.3 OSC - Oscillator .............................................................................................................................................. 66
8.5.4 Split ................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.5 Pulse ................................................................................................................................................................ 67

8.6 Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... 68

8.6.1 Constant........................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.6.2 Dead end.......................................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.3 Spreader properties .......................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.4 Memory ........................................................................................................................................................... 71
8.6.5 Digital buffer ................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.6.6 Analogue buffer............................................................................................................................................... 72

8.7 Analogue................................................................................................................................................................. 74
8.7.1 RS485 port....................................................................................................................................................... 74
8.7.2 IN0 > IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 74
8.7.3 IN0 * IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.4 IN0 / IN1.......................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.5 IN0 – IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.6 IN0 + IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 76
8.7.7 Scale ................................................................................................................................................................ 76
8.7.8 AnalogueLatch ................................................................................................................................................ 77
8.7.9 Filter ................................................................................................................................................................ 77

9 TUTORIAL.....................................................................................................................79

4(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 5(86)

1 Introduction
ABE – Application Builder Environment has been developed to create and manage spreader programs specifically for the
Bromma Conquip SCS2 system used on Spreaders. This tool gives the programmer/user the possibility of configuring and
programming the logic of the SCS2 via a graphical interface.

In principal ABE generates a binary file describing the interconnection between the graphical objects the user has tied
together. This file, when downloaded onto the target system, connects the precompiled objects within the target system
together according to the functionality described by the user. Hence all logical objects, components, reside within the
target system and the program file generated by ABE determines their interconnection.

The objects, from no on referred to as components, within ABE contain a varying amount of logic ranging from basic
Boolean instruction sets to Spreader specific blocks of functionality which can be altered in behaviour via parameter
settings. The components containing specified Spreader functions are developed to ensure that years of Spreader
experience is re-used and also contain the interlocking for generating fault and event messages to the onboard NVRAM
(log).

This programming tool is intended for use by staff with adequate knowledge of both the system and the functionality of
the Spreader/Crane in which it shall be used only. Any alterations or new programs causing failure in functionality due to
logical faults in the program are the responsibility of the person/company carrying out this work.

2 Installing ABE

2.1 HW requirements
The minimum requirements to run this application on your PC are:
• an Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.
• at least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
• at least 2Mb of free disk space.

2.2 Installation
• Close any other applications running under windows.
• Insert the CD into your station.
• Run the file Setup.exe.
• Follow the instructions on the screen.

2.3 Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.
Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.

5(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 6(86)

3 User interface
ABE-application is divided into four main functions.
This chapter describes the four main functions of the program.
Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.

3.1 Main window

The main window of the application consists of one large frame. The four tabs at the bottom of this window represent the
four main functions of the program. The toolbar at the top of the window is used for common operations.
The application supports tool tips.
The application is designed to work on a laptop computer with a display size of 800 * 600 pixels or more.

3.2 Error control

Error control of the program file is performed after every operation. The errors found are marked red. The error control
can be turned off/on from the Settings menu.

3.3 Multiple language support

The default language is English. Additional languages can be requested from Bromma Conquip AB.

3.4 General functions

The toolbar functions are File, Edit, Settings, Tools and Help. Each function is described below.

3.4.1 File
Two types of files are available.
Type *.spr is a compiled file ready to download onto the SCS2.
Type *.spi is an intermediate file. Use Save or Save As... if you are not able to generate downloadable program file but
want to continue your work later on. The file extension will then be *.spi.

3.4.1.1 New
Creates a new program file for editing.

3.4.1.2 Open
Opens a program file for editing/viewing.

3.4.1.3 Save As...

Prompts the user to supply a new filename to which the project will be saved. The file extension will be *.spi.

3.4.1.4 Save
Saves the current project. The file extension will be *.spi.

3.4.1.5 Compile
Generates and prompts you to save a downloadable program file used in the SCS2. The file extension will be *.spr.

3.4.1.6 Print
Prints the Component view.

3.4.1.7 Exit
Exits the application.

6(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 7(86)

3.4.2 Edit

3.4.2.1 Cut
Selected components will be cut and saved to the clipboard.

3.4.2.2 Copy
Selected components will be copied to the clipboard.

3.4.2.3 Paste
Content of clipboard will be pasted into selected page in the Component view. If connections match existing ports theses
will also be pasted into the page.

3.4.2.4 Find
Finds a text string in component comments, component identifiers or an actual component.

3.4.3 Settings

3.4.3.1 Error Control

Turns the error control on/off.

3.4.3.2 Show hints

Turns the tool tips on/off.

3.4.3.3 Show component connection info

Turns information at component connection points on/off.

3.4.4 Tools

3.4.4.1 Export Pin configuration view

Exports a list of current Pin configuration as an html page for viewing in a web browser.

3.4.4.2 Export Component documentation

Exports a list of available components an their properties as a html page for viewing in a web browser.

3.4.4.3 Export parameters

Exports the selected components parameters to a file.

3.4.4.4 Import parameters

Imports parameters from a file to current project.

3.4.4.5 Show Ladder, Show function blocks

Shows the current project in Ladder format. Note that one cannot add, delete or online monitor components when ladder
look activated.

7(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 8(86)

3.4.5 Help

3.4.5.1 About
Short information about ABE such as version, current number of components etc.

8(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 9(86)

4 System view

4.1 General
The system view provides a way of enabling and disabling (connecting/disconnecting) nodes and setting system
properties such as version number, author, comments and date of modification. The nodes are named A1-A4 for the nodes
intended to be fitted to the crane and B1-B8 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the Spreader. Each node name
corresponds to a unique address key setting.

The system view allows the user to set up the node configuration by checking the desired nodes. A fixed set of
checkboxes are available that represent the used nodes in the system. The enabled nodes then have to be present in that
system. An exception is if the “EXISTS” function is used. This function can then replace a node on the bus with an input
on the master node.
The B1-node is selected by default, since every system has to contain exactly one Master node, B1. Four crane nodes and
seven spreader nodes are available for selection.

Checkboxes for enabling Twistlock redundancy as well as “Spreader stop” have to be checked here as well if these
functions are used.

Figure 4:1 System view

4.2 Functionality
The system view enables the user to select a node configuration. By filling in the checkboxes you determine the lay-out
(topology) of the system. You also determine on which nodes (B1 & B2) you are to have the twistlock redundancy and
Spreader stop enabled. Each node configuration gives the respective node a unique ID represented by the address key.
You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.
The properties are:

4.2.1 Author
This is the author of the spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.2 Last date saved

Displays the date when the current project was last saved. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.

9(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 10(86)

4.2.3 Creation date

Displays the date of the current project’s creation. The creation date is only changed upon creating a new project.
Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.

4.2.4 Version number

A user selectable version number. Maximum version number is 99.99.

4.2.5 Revision number

The revision number is incremented each time the specific project is compiled.

4.2.6 Spreader type

A text field representing the type of spreader that the current program is intended for. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.7 Drawing number

A number corresponding to the electrical drawing belonging to the current project. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.8 Customer
This property is to contain the name of the customer who will use the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80
characters.

4.2.9 Comments
This is a text field intended for general comments regarding the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.

10(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 11(86)

5 Pin configuration view

5.1 General
The pin configuration view is presented as a tabular view of the system, where each tab represents a node. An I/O list
corresponding tags will be available for all enabled nodes in the system. The top tabs indicate which node is displayed.
A tag is composed of its Item identifier and its Comment. The used I/O not yet connected is marked red.
The Port id# field contains a port id, the numerical ID of the I/O number of the SCS2. The Connection field is either IN,
OUT or NC (Not connected) and if it’s a digital, analogue, PWM or Encoder signals. These fields cannot be edited.

Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.

Figure 5:1 Pin configuration view

5.2 Functionality
This view allows you to change the tag for all port numbers on all nodes in the system. Within this view you give each
individual I/O its’ nick name, Item Identifier, to make the program more comprehensible, you also assign any comments
to the I/O. The connection type (IN/OUT) will be updated automatically as the Spreader program is altered in the
component view; i.e. the direction of the I/O point is decided when the I/O is connected. Note that ABE will only permit
I/O configuration that is supported by the current SCS2 HW, hence the digital I/O direction can only differ outside of
groups of four apart from the last four I/O points in the list (45-48) which can configured individually.

5.2.1 Address key

The “address key” field illustrates how the address key should be linked for the viewed node. This pattern corresponds to
the required connection on the X2 connector on the SCS2 HW.

5.2.2 Exists port

The “exists port” is used in case versatility on the number of used nodes is required. By letting an Input “replace” a node
within a system one can then have for instance three nodes active in one case and two node plus the selected input active
in another case, and still run the system without having to re-configure it. This can be useful when different models of
Spreaders are to be used within the same system.

11(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 12(86)

5.2.3 Anybus I/O

With this button you can view all anybus inputs and outputs in current Spreader program.

6 Component view

6.1 General
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available
in the view. To add a component, select the component from the Palette and place it on your work space with the mouse.

Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.

Figure 6:1 Component view Figure 6:2 Palette

Components may be dragged within a page to change the layout. Each page can be resized vertically.

12(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 13(86)

The following table describes some reoccurring terminology in this manual.

Name Symbol Description

Output tag An Output tag is an intermediate variable used for making
the program more readable and efficient.
Note. Changing the name of an Output tag must be followed
by a change of the corresponding Input tag(s)
Input tag An Input tag is used to connect to an existing Output tag.
Note. Changing the name(s) on Input tag(s) must be
followed by a change of the corresponding Output tag.
Component A component contains logic. The components range from
simple Boolean (AND, OR etc) to those with full
functionality specifically for Spreaders (APS etc.). Some of
the components contain parameters. By double clicking (or
right clicking and selecting properties) the component, its’
properties/parameters are displayed and can be edited. A
component also carries component connection points (round
circles).
A red coloured connection indicates that it has to be
Component connection connected before a compilation can be performed. Once the
connection point is connected it turns white. This means that
it is connected correctly. If a connection point is white
although it is not connected it is optional to connect it or not.

Output port A connection to a physical output. The displayed name is the

Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. Multiple
connections are not possible for an Output port.
Input port A connection to a physical input. The displayed name is the
Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view.
Multiple connections A multiple connection to same Input port is indicated with
two vertical lines on the connection. This is made to remind
the user that the Input port has been connected at least once
before.
Component connection Information about the generic name of the component
information connection is shown above each connection point when
turned on. The function can be turned on/off from the
Settings menu.

6.2 Page functionality

One page contains one set of interconnected components with no feedback in the connections. Reuse of signals may be
accomplished by adding variable tags, and referring to those tags wherever necessary.

The component view provides the following functionality:

6.2.1 Adding pages

By clicking on the last page or by placing a component on the last page will add a new page below it.

6.3 Component functionality

In each page, components may be manipulated. Operations on components are:

6.3.1 Adding a component

This operation adds the component currently selected in the palette to a page. Simply click the desired component and
then click the location you wish to place this component on the current page you’re working on.

13(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 14(86)

6.3.2 Moving a component

Moving a component is a matter of dragging it around using the mouse.

6.3.3 Selecting multiple components

Multiple selection of components is possible using key modifiers (shift / ctrl).

6.3.4 Cutting / coping / pasting components

The copied and cut components will be placed on the clipboard, allowing components to be pasted on pages in the same
application or in other ABE applications.

6.3.5 Delete a component

By selecting a component and pressing delete it is removed from the page.

6.3.6 Connecting / disconnecting components

Drawing a line from one connection point to another makes connections between components.
One can also connect a component by right clicking a connection point and selecting a connection from the available lists
displayed (I/O, Components instances, Tags).
Clicking with the right mouse button over a connected connection point will give you the option to disconnect.

6.3.7 Online monitoring

Online monitoring is performed under Component view.
The same spreader program must be present in both ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program to the SCS2 or upload the spreader program from the SCS2.

Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

Start online monitoring by pressing the Start online monitoring button.

Automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval, if Auto is checked

The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.

Stop online monitoring by pressing the Stop online monitoring button (same button as Start online monitoring button).

14(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 15(86)

7 Load view

7.1 General
The load view provides functionality to download and upload Spreader programs. The connection to the system is
selected in the connection box; the possible choices are, Com1 and Com2. Current status of the transfer is displayed in the
three progress bars.

Figure 7:1 Load view

7.2 Functionality
When the download button is pressed the user is prompted to point out the file to download to the system. It has to be a
compiled downloadable program file (*.spr-file). The current status of a download process from the PC to the system is
shown in the top progress bar. The distribution transfer between nodes is shown in the two progress bars at the bottom of
the page. The upload button allows the user to retrieve a program file from a connected system and save it to a file.

15(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 16(86)

8 Components
Terminology:
In this section the follow terms are used:
False = 0 = logical low level
True = 1 = logical high level

Parameter – “Instance name”:

Every component used in a project will be given a unique instance name, which can be seen by clicking the right mouse
button on a component and selecting properties. This unique instance name is seen in the field next to the title “Instance
name”. The instance name is used to be able to trace every component instance throughout the project. The name can be
altered, but no two instances of a component can have the same name, since this is the ID used by the system to determine
the interconnection between components.

State transition diagrams:

The state transition diagrams describe the behaviour of the components in general. Terminology in the diagrams is not the
same as in the port listings found in corresponding subsections. The text found in the diagrams is more explicit than the
complete listing.
Example: In the state transition diagram for TLC4 the following text tag can be found: “not All unlocked”
This text tag is equal to NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4).
The latter expression is rather big and makes the diagram difficult to understand.
Descriptions (when relevant) like the one above will be made for those sections that contain State transition diagrams.

8.1 Controllers

8.1.1 TLC4 – Twistlock Controller 4

The Twistlock Controller 4 (TLC4) is used to control four Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a standard Twistlock operation with four Twistlocks. The component prevents the
Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection
of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it
also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

8.1.1.1 State transition diagram

“Not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4)
“All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4
“Unlock after landed” = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
“Lock after landed” = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).

LOCK_ALL:
Lock all Twistlocks.

UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock all Twistlocks.

IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.

16(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 17(86)

For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

LOCK_ALL

[ Lock after landed OR

(landed override AND
Lock) ]

[ not All unlocked ] [ All locked ]

[ Lock after landed OR [ Unlock after landed OR

STARTUP
(landed override AND (landed override AND
Lock) ] IDLE
Unlock) ]

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

[ All unlocked ]
[ All unlocked ]
DISABLED

[ Unlock after landed

OR (landed override
AND Unlock) ]
UNLOCK_ALL

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC4

8.1.1.2 Input ports

Input Type Description

Landed override Digital Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Unlock command Digital Unlock command to unlock all
Twistlocks.
Lock command Digital Lock command to lock all
Twistlocks.

17(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 18(86)

Unlocked 1,...,Unlocked 4 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status

on unlocked sensor 1 to 4.
Locked 1,..., Locked 4 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
on locked sensor 1 to 4.
Landed 1,..., Landed 4 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
on landed sensor 1 to 4

8.1.1.3 Output ports

Output Type Description

Unlock Digital Unlock signal to all Twistlocks.
Lock Digital Lock signal to all Twistlocks.
Locked signal Digital All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal Digital All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal Digital All Twistlocks are landed.

8.1.1.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Delay Milliseconds Time after all landed sensors are true
[ms] and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked 1,...,
Locked 4 shall become true within
this time when a lock output has
gone high.)
Timeout landed Milliseconds Time from the first landed input has
[ms] gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging Digital If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.1.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

18(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 19(86)

Code Message Description

60 TLC_NO_SENSOR No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
61 TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
62 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
63 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Locked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all locked.
64 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal
has not been received after output to valve.
65 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
66 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
67 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
118 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT When override input is set to true and
ED previous state is false.
119 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV When override input is set to false and
ATED previous state is true.
175 TLC_LOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock lock command received
176 TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock unlock command received
177 TLC_LOCKED All Twistlocks have been locked
178 TLC_UNLOCKED All Twistlocks have been unlocked
244 TLC_LANDED The spreader has been landed.
245 TLC_UNLANDED The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)

8.1.2 TLC8 – Twistlock Controller 8

The Twistlock Controller 8 (TLC8) is used to control eight Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a Twistlock operation with eight Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from
changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and
always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends
event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

8.1.2.1 State transition diagram

Twin is down (two containers):
“not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8)
“All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8

Twin is up (single container):

“not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,...,AND Unlocked 4)
“All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 4

“Unlock after landed” = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
“Lock after landed” = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.

19(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 20(86)

All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).

LOCK_ALL:
Lock single and twin Twistlocks.

LOCK_SINGLE:
Lock single Twistlocks.

UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock single and twin Twistlocks.

UNLOCK_SINGLE:
Unlock single Twistlocks.

IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.

For al l states: LOCK_ALL LOCK_SINGLE

T ransition is m ade to DISABLED state if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enabl e = 0

[ T win is down ]
[ T win i s up ]

[ All locked ]
[ Al l locked ]

[ Unlock after landed OR

(l anded override AND
Unlock) ]
[ Unlock after landed
ST ART UP [ Lock after landed OR OR (landed override
[ Lock after landed OR
(landed overri de AND IDLE AND Unl ock) ]
(landed override AND
Lock) ] Lock) ]

enabl e = 1

[ All unlocked ]
DISABLED [ All unlocked ]
[ T wi n is down ]

T win is up

UNLOCK_SINGLE
UNLOCK_ALL

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC8

20(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 21(86)

8.1.2.2 Input ports

Input Type Description

Landed override Digital Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Unlock command Digital Unlock command to unlock all
Twistlocks.
Lock command Digital Lock command to lock all
Twistlocks.
Twin unlocked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on unlocked sensor
Twin unlocked 4
Single unlocked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on unlocked sensor
Single unlocked 4
Twin locked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on locked sensor
Twin locked 4
Single locked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on locked sensor
Single locked 4
Twin landed 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on landed sensor
Twin landed 4
Single landed 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on landed sensor
Single landed 4
Twin is up Digital Input signal telling that Twinboxes
are up. Single Twistlocks are enabled
only.
TTDS Fault Digital Input signal telling that there is a
TTDS fault. Disables lock
operations.

8.1.2.3 Output ports

Output Type Description

21(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 22(86)

Unlock single Digital Unlock signal to single Twistlocks.

Unlock twin Digital Unlock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Lock single Digital Lock signal to single Twistlocks.
Lock twin Digital Lock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Locked signal Digital All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal Digital All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal Digital All Twistlocks are landed.

8.1.2.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Delay Milliseconds Time after all landed sensors are true
[ms] and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked single 1,...,
Locked single 4 shall become true
within this time when a lock output
has gone high.)
Timeout landed Milliseconds Time from the first landed input has
[ms] gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging Digital If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.2.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

60 TLC_NO_SENSOR No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
61 TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
62 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
63 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Locked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all locked.

22(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 23(86)

64 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal

has not been received after output to valve.
65 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
66 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
67 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
118 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT When override input is set to true and
ED previous state is false.
119 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV When override input is set to false and
ATED previous state is true.
175 TLC_LOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock lock command received
176 TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock unlock command received
177 TLC_LOCKED All Twistlocks have been locked
178 TLC_UNLOCKED All Twistlocks have been unlocked
244 TLC_LANDED The spreader has been landed.
245 TLC_UNLANDED The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)

8.1.3 FAC – Flipper Arm Controller

The FAC component is used for grouping and controlling a number of Flippers determined by a parameter of the
component. The function sets either the up or down output at all times depending on the parameter settings. The inputs to
the component generate event messages to the onboard log if enabled.

8.1.3.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).

IDLE:
This state is reached emedeately after UP or DOWN states have been reached.

UP:
All Flippers are sent up.

DOWN:
All Flippers are sent down.

23(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 24(86)

For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
UP

[ UpCom m and ]

START_UP IDLE

[ DownCom m and ]

DISABLED DOWN

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: FAC

8.1.3.2 Input ports

Input Type Description

Up command Digital Command to send all Flippers up.
Down command Digital Command to send all Flippers down.
Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

8.1.3.3 Output ports

Output Type Description

Flipper up 1,..., Flipper up n Digital Up signal to Flipper 1 to n. The
number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.
Flipper down 1,..., Flipper down n Digital Down signal to Flipper 1 to n. The
number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.

8.1.3.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Number of Flippers Number The number of Flippers to be
controlled.

24(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 25(86)

Operation mode Option Impulse (only impulse required for

the command to execute) or Constant
(constant command required).
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.3.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

246 FAC_UP_COMMAND Flipper up command received
247 FAC_DOWN_COMMAND Flipper down command received

8.1.4 DPS – Discrete Positioning System

The DPS is used for controlling the chain telescope of a Spreader with proximity switch or screw limit switch box
indicating the stops. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as
well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions
are chosen via a component parameter. Parts of its’ behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant
commands etc are selected by parameters. The intermediate positions are designed to have two sensors per stop but will
perform correctly with one sensor per intermediate position provided it is connected (in the software) to both the inputs of
that position on the component. The outputs of the component are interlocked to unlocked and landed. The feedback from
the component is a signal indicating what position has bee reached as well as a signal indicating that any valid stop has
been reached. The component generates a number of events and warnings if positions aren’t reached within a parameter
adjusted time etc.
The DPS component is equipped with an “fast I/O concept”, this means that the component sampels the input sensors at a
higher frequency and sets the actuators according to the internal logic. This will improve the overall performance of the
component. To utilise this feature please note that the position sensors and actuators must be physically connected to the
same node and that no logic is to be placed on the components outputs (Expand, Retract).
If sensors and actuators not connected to the same node the “fast I/O concept” will be disabled.

8.1.4.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.

EXPAND:
Expanding to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.

RETRACT:

25(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 26(86)

Retracting to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.

CONSTANT REPEAT:
When stopped at a position a new constant command is required to go to another position. Depressed keys or similar must
be released before a new command will be excepted.
Example:
1. Expand command is given.
2. Next stop is reached.
3. The telescope stops.
4. Expand command is released.
5. New expand command is given.
6. The telescope continues.

DELAY:
A delay is made for a time defined by Stop delay time (parameter). This delay is only performed if Delay is set in
Operation mode (parameter) else ignored.

“currentCommand” = is always EXPAND or RETRACT. The command inputs Retract / Expand command or Return to
position X. These command inputs are internally converted to EXPAND or RETRACT depending on current position
and desired position.

For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

[ desiredStop = currentStop, [ desiredStop = current

Operation m ode = Delay ] EXPAND Stop, Operation m ode =
Cons tant repeat ]

[ currentCom m and = EXPAND ]

[ Delay perform ed ] CONSTANT REPEAT

DELAY IDLE [ com m andInput =
NO_CMD ]

[ currentCom m and = RETRACT ]

[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]
RETRACT
[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Delay ]

START_UP DISABLED

[ SpreaderStop = 0,
Enable = 1 ]

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: DPS

8.1.4.2 Input ports

26(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 27(86)

Input Type Description

Expand command Digital Input command to expand telescope
to next stop.
Retract command Digital Input command to retract telescope
to next stop.
Return to position 0 Digital Input command to expand telescope
… to predefined stop. The number of
Return to position n predefined stops is set by the
parameter Number of stops.
Sensor 0 Digital Sensor input.
...
Example with 4 stops:
Sensor n
Stop number 1 has Stop sensor 1,
Stop number 2 has Stop sensor 2 + 3,
Stop number 3 has Stop sensor 4 + 5,
Stop number 4 has Stop sensor 6.
Etc..
Any landed Digital Sensor input from landed sensors.
Prevents telescoping when landed.
All unlocked Digital Sensor input from unlocked sensors.
Permits telescoping when unlocked.
Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Slave Digital Enables slave mode. Telescope will
run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled

8.1.4.3 Output ports

Output Type Description

Expand Digital Output to expand telescope.
Retract Digital Output to retract telescope.
In position 0,..., Reached stop n Digital Output signal indicating that the
specific valid stop has been reached.
In position Digital Output signal indicating that a valid
stop has been reached.

8.1.4.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

27(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 28(86)

Timeout Milliseconds Time permitted from when an output

[ms] is turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.
Operation mode Option Impulse, Delay and Constant repeat.
Delay at each stop Milliseconds Time the telescope is delayed
[ms] (stopped) at each stop.
Number of stops Number The number of stops in use.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the storing of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no generated messages will be stored.

8.1.4.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

68 DPS_TIMEOUT No valid stop reached within timeout
time.
69 DPS_SENSOR_MISSING The expected sensor has not been
reached within specified sequence.
70 DPS_SENSOR_LOST Position sensor has been lost without
any command given
71 DPS_MULTIPEL_SENSOR More than one position sensor active
simultaneously.
179 DPS_EXPAND_COMMAND Expand command received
180 DPS_RETRACT_COMMAND Retract command received
181 DPS_GOPOS_COMMAND A command to go to a certain
position received
182 DPS_STOP_REACHED A valid position has been reached

8.1.5 Tower – Head block

The Tower component is used to adjust the point of gravity.

8.1.5.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.

FEED_LEFT:

28(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 29(86)

Feeds the Tower to the left.

FEED_RIGHT:
Feeds the Tower to the right.

CENTER:
Centres the tower. The Tower is centred when both At left sensor and At right sensor is true.

DELAY:
A delay is performed for a time defined by Direction change time (parameter).

For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
FEED_LEFT FEED_RIGHT

[ Feed right ]

[ Feed left ]

START_UP IDLE

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]
[ Center ]
[ Delay perform ed ]

DISABLED
CENTER DELAY

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Tower

8.1.5.2 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Enable right Digital Enables feeding in right direction.
Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. no effect).
Enable left Digital Enables feeding in left direction.
Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. no effect).
Right end sensor Digital Position sensor input.
At right sensor Digital Position sensor input.

29(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 30(86)

At left sensor Digital Position sensor input.

Left end sensor Digital Position sensor input.
Right command Digital Input command to feed head block
right.
Left command Digital Input command to feed head block
left.
Centre command Digital Input command to feed head to the
centre position.

8.1.5.3 Output ports

Output Type Description

In centre Digital Output signal telling Head block is in
centre position.
At right side Digital Output signal telling Head block is to
the right.
At left side Digital Output signal telling Head block is to
the left.
Feed right Digital Output signal to feed Head block
right.
Feed left Digital Output signal to feed Head block left.

8.1.5.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Operation mode Option Constant or Impulse. Impulse is only
valid for the Centre command
Delay Milliseconds Time before a change of direction
[ms] will take effect.
Timeout Milliseconds Time permitted from when an output
[ms] is turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped.
Use end stops Option If set true (checked) Right end sensor
and Left end sensor does not need to
be connected.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.5.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

30(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 31(86)

Code Message Description

325 TOWER_CENTER_COMMAND Centre command is given.
326 TOWER_LEFT_COMMAND Feed left command is given.
327 TOWER_RIGHT_COMMAND Feed right command is given.
328 TOWER_REACHED_CENTER_POS Tower has reached centre position.
329 TOWER_REACHED_LEFT_POS Tower has reached left position.
330 TOWER_REACHED_RIGHT_POS Tower has reached right position.
369 TOWER_TIMEOUT Tower has not reached the desired
position within the time limit.

8.1.6 APS – Automatic Positioning System

The APS component is used for positioning the chain telescope using an absolute encoder input to read the position of the
chain. Due to the feedback from the sensor, self-correcting is possible if the Spreader is knocked out of position. It is
possible to use both proportional controls (PWM) as well as on/off control with this component. The component can be
used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract
commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions is chosen via a component parameter
as well as are certain parts of its’ behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc. The
absolute value (count) for each position is done via teach in functionality.

8.1.6.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
Expand command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.

EXPAND:
Expands telescope.
PWM expand output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM expand output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM expand output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital expand output is set to false if in Stop window else true.

RETRACT:
Retracts telescope.
PWM retract output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM retract output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM retract output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital retract output is set to false if in Stop window else true.

DELAY:
Performs a delay (Stop delay time) at each stop if Delay is selected in Operation mode (parameter)
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.

31(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 32(86)

CONSTANT_REPEAT:
A new Expand or Retract command must be given to leave this state if Constant repeat is selected in Operation mode
(parameter).
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.

For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
EXPAND [ Operation m ode = Delay ] DELAY

[ desiredPos ition >

currentPos ition ]

[ Operation m ode = [ Operation m ode = Delay,

Im puls e, des iredPosition des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
= currentPos ition ]

[ Delay perform ed ]

STARTUP IDLE

[ no button is pres s ed ]
[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

[ Operation m ode = Im puls e,

des iredPos ition = current
Pos ition ] [ Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat,
des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
[ desiredPos ition <
currentPos ition ]

DISABLED [ Operation m ode =

RETRACT Cons tant repeat ] CONSTANT REPEAT

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: APS

8.1.6.2 Teaching telescope positions

This component has to be taught the absolute value (encoder count) of each position. This is done by having the Teach
input go high and at the same time giving the command of the current position to be taught. The current value of the
encoder is then saved onboard the Spreader. All positions, that have been enabled via the parameter Number of stops,
have to be taught a value.

8.1.6.3 Input ports

Input Type Description

32(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 33(86)

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false

component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Teach Digital Command to teach in new positions.
When this signal is true any Go
position command will store a new
position for corresponding stop.
Slave mode Digital Enables slave mode. Telescope will
run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled.
Hooks are up Digital Input signal indicating that all hooks
are in up position. Only used for twin
telescopic Spreaders. I.e. if nothing is
connected here telescoping is
permitted, can also be used as a
general permit.
Any landed Digital Input result from landed sensors.
Go position 0 Digital Command to feed to defined
… positions 0,...,n.
Go position n
Retract command Digital Command to retract telescope.
Expand command Digital Command to expand telescope.
Current position Analogue Scaled input signal of the current
position.

8.1.6.4 Output ports

Output Type Description

Stop position0 Analogue Output signal indicating the stored
… positions for the corresponding stop.
Stop position n
In position Digital Output signal indicating that a valid
stop has been reached.
In position 0 Digital Output signal indicating that the
… specific valid stop has been reached.
In position n
PWM retract PWM PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
PWM expand PWM PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
Digital retract Digital Digital output to control the
telescope.

33(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 34(86)

Digital expand Digital Digital output to control the

telescope.
Digital high speed Digital Digital output for high speed
telescoping in two-speed system.

8.1.6.5 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Delay at each stop Milliseconds Delay time at each stop if Expand or
[ms] Retract command is given and Delay
is enabled under Operation mode.
Timeout Milliseconds Time until from when an output is
[ms] turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.
Number of stops Number The number of stops enabled.
Auto correction Option If enabled the APS will feed back the
telescope to its original position if it
of some reason has got out of
position.
Operation mode Option Impulse: sequence completes until a
new command is given
Delay: delay at each stop
Constant repeat: when a stop is
reached a new expand or retract
command must be given.
Stop window Millimetre Distance from defined stop to be
considered as a stop.
[mm]
Signal window Millimetre Window around the desired position
[mm] in which a signal indicating that the
correct position has been reached is
given.
Impact range Millimetre Hysterisis for impact detection.
[mm]
Impact off delay timer Milliseconds Delay after impact detected to run.
[ms]
Length of travel Millimetre Distance between minimum and
maximum positions.
[mm]
Time of telescope Milliseconds Time between minimum and
maximum positions.
[ms]
Ramp Gain Number Ramp gain.
[value *1000]

34(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 35(86)

Ramp offset Millimetre Ramp offset for stop speed

[mm]
Time to reach max speed Milliseconds The time it shall take to reach max
speed.
[ms]
Proportional Gain Number Proportional part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
Integral Gain Number Integral part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
PWM value for teach Number PWM output when teach enabled.
Reverse Min PWM output Number Minimum value on PWM that causes
a reversed movement.
Reverse Max PWM output Number Maximum value on PWM that causes
a reversed movement
Forward Min PWM output Number Minimum value on PWM that causes
a forward movement.
Forward Max PWM output Number Maximum value on PWM that causes
a forward movement.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.6.6 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

183 APS_TIMEOUT The telescope hasn't reached its' position within time
limit.
184 APS_EXPAND_COMMAND Expand command received
185 APS_RETRACT_COMMAND Retract command received
186 APS_GOPOS_COMMAND Command to go to a specific position received
187 APS_STOP_REACHED The desired position reached
272 APS_TEACH_COMMAND Teach in command received
396 APS_IMPACT_ON Impact is detected
397 APS_AUTOCORR_ON Spreader is auto correcting
398 APS_IN_VALUE_OUT_OF_T The position value is not within the teached range.
EACH_RANGE
399 APS_IMPACT_OUT_OF_SIG_ Spreader is bumped out of signal window.
WIN

8.1.7 MPS – Memory position system

The MPS component stores either a predefined value or a value set during run time and can then position the twin
telescope to this/these positions on given commands. The MPS uses an absolute input value and can either be used to
return the twin telescope to a number of predefined positions (taught in and stored in the NVRAM). The driver also has

35(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 36(86)

the possibility of storing the current position in a volatile memory of the SCS2 and then returning to this position via a
command until the power is cycled or a new position is stored.

8.1.7.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
Expand command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.

Retract command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.

EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.

RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.

For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

RETRACT

[ desiredPos ition < currentPos ition ]

[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

STARTUP IDLE

[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

[ desiredPos ition > currentPos ition ]

DISABLED
EXPAND

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: MPS

36(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 37(86)

8.1.7.2 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Current position Analogue Scaled input signal reading the
current position.
Return to predefined position 0 Digital Command to feed Twin boxes to
... predefined position 0,...,n
Return to predefined position n

Returned to stored position 0 Digital Command to feed Twin boxes to

... logged position 0,...,n
Returned to stored position n
Store new position 0 Digital Command to log new positions.
... When this signal is true the current
Store new position n position will be stored in the RAM of
the SCS2.
Teach Digital Command to teach in new positions.
When this signal is true any Go to
pre-defined position command will
store a new position for
corresponding stop.

8.1.7.3 Output ports

Output Type Description

Current reference position Analogue Signal indicating the currently
desired position.
Predefined position 0 Analogue Signal indicating the positions for the
… corresponding predefined stop.
Predefined position n
Predefined position 0 Analogue Signal indicating the positions for the
… corresponding predefined stop.
Predefined position n
Logged position 0 Analogue Output signal indicating the positions
… for the corresponding logged stop.
Logged position n
In position Digital Output signal indicating that any
position has been reached & logged
or predefined).
Expand Digital Output signal to expand Twin boxes.
Retract Digital Output signal to retract Twin boxes.

37(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 38(86)

8.1.7.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Stop window Millimetre Offset from stop to be considered as
[mm] a stop.
Operation mode Option Impulse: sequence completes until a
new command is given
Constant: when a stop is reached a
new expand or retract command must
be given.
Predefined positions Number The number of stops that will be
stored in none volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be available after
shutting down system.)
Storable positions Number The number of stops that will be
stored in volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be lost when shutting
down system.)
Timeout Milliseconds Time from when an output is turned
[ms] on until a valid position should be
reached. If this time is exceeded the
motion will be stopped and a warning
generated.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.7.5 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

281 MPS_TEACH_PREDEF_POS Teach command received.
282 MPS_GO_PREDEF_POS Command to go to a pre-defined position has
been received.
280 MPS_TEACH_LOGGED_POS A command to store a new value for a log
position has been received.
284 MPS_GO_LOGGED_POS A command to return to a log position has been
received.
285 MPS_TIMEOUT The twin-legs haven't reached their requested
position within time limit.

38(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 39(86)

8.1.8 Twin Telescope

The Twin Telescope component transfers the commands to expand and retract the twin telescope to the necessary outputs.
The component, although it doesn’t hold much functionality, is useful for the event log.

8.1.8.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
Expand command makes a transition to EXPAND state if In 45ft sensor is false.
Retract command makes a transition to RETRACT state if one not In zero left sensor is true and if not In zero right
sensor is false.

EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes as long as Expand command is given and In 45ft is false.

RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes as long as Retract command is given and both In zero left and In zero right sensors are false.

For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
EXPAND

[ Expand, !in45Pos ]

[ !Expand OR in45Pos ]

STARTUP IDLE

[ !Retract OR (inZeroPos Left, in

[ !SpreaderStop, Enable ] ZeroPos Right) ]

[ Retract, !inZeroPos Left,

!inZeroPos Right ]

DISABLED RETRACT

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Twin Telescope

39(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 40(86)

8.1.8.2 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
In 45ft Digital Sensor input signal.
In zero right Digital Sensor input signal.
In zero left Digital Sensor input signal.
Retract command Digital Command input to retract the twin
boxes.
Expand command Digital Command input to expand the twin
boxes.

8.1.8.3 Output ports

Output Type Description

Retract Digital Output signal to retract twin boxes.
Expand Digital Output signal to expand twin boxes.

8.1.8.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Timeout Milliseconds Time until from when an output is
[ms] turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.8.5 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

273 TWINTELE_EXPAND_COMMAND Expand command received
274 TWINTELE_RETRACT_COMMAND Retract command received
275 TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_LEFT Left console reached zero gap position
276 TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_RIGHT Right console reached zero gap position

40(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 41(86)

277 TWINTELE_EXPANDING Twinlegs expand in motion

278 TWINTELE_RETRACTING Twinlegs retract in motion

279 TWINTELE_TIMEOUT Hasn't reached an end stop when in motion
within time limit

8.1.9 TwinUpDown
The TwinUpDown component is designed to be used on the twin telescopic Spreaders. The component performs the twin
up and twin down sequences automatically upon the commands twin up and twin down. The sequence for twin down
consists of the twin units separating until the Left attach & right attach permits have been made. Thereafter the hooks
situated on the tension rod are lowered and finally the twin boxes are lowered. The sequence for twin up consists of the
hooks on the tension rod being raised followed by the twin boxes being raised. The twin consoles are now retracted until
the zero position switches are made, the retract output is active for a short off-delay after that to ensure that both units are
fully retracted. When a complete up sequence has been performed a pulse is given on the output “ Twin up ready pulse ”,
which in turn can be used for instance to run the Spreader back to the correct single 40ft position.

41(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 42(86)

8.1.9.1 State transition diagram

TWIN_UP TWIN_DOWN
1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeft 2 : [ !allTwinUp || !(hook [ twinDownReques tM ]
Disconnected || !hookRight LeftDis connected &&
Disconnected ] RAISE_BOXES
hookRightDis connected) ]
CONNECT

[ !allTwinUp ] [ allTwinUp ]

[ hookLeftConnected && hook

1 : [ !allTwinUp || RightConnected ]
!hookLeftDis connected
RAISE_HOOKS || !hookRight
Disconnected ]

[ hookLeftDis connected &&

hookRightDis connected ] BOXES_DOWN

2 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left
&& twinInZeroPosRight) ] INCH_IN

2 : [ las tTwinUpStateM != OFF

_DELAY_INCH && twinInZero [ anyTwinUp ] [ !anyTwinUp ]
Pos Left && twinInZeroPos
Right && energis eInchInM ]

3:

HOLD_DOWN
HOLD_UP
OFF_DELAY_INCH
1 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left && twinIn
ZeroPos Right) || delayM.is Tim eout() ]
Trans ition to IDLE s tate if Trans ition to IDLE s tate if
twinDownCom m and twinUpCom m and
H* H*

[ twinUpCom m and ]

[ twinDownCom m and ] 1 : [ twinDownReques tM) || (twin

DownCom m and && hookLeft
Connected && hookRightConnected ]

IDLE
2 : [ anyTwinUp && !(hook
LeftConnected && hook 2 : [ twinUpReques tM ] 1 : [ !anyTwinUp && hook
RightConnected) ] LeftConnected && hook
RightConnected ]
3:

STARTUP

For all s tates :

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ] DISABLED
Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TwinUpDown

42(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 43(86)

8.1.9.2 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Twin box up 1 Digital Sensor input indicating that Twin
… boxes are up.
Twin box up 4
Hook connected right Digital Sensor input indicating that right
hook is down.
Hook connected left Digital Sensor input indicating that left hook
is down.
Right attach permit Digital Sensor input indicating that position
has been reached to attach twin boxes
on right side.
Left attach permit Digital Sensor input indicating that position
has been reached to attach twin boxes
on left side.
Hook disconnected right Digital Sensor input indicating that hook is
up on right side.
Hook disconnected left Digital Sensor input indicating that hook is
up on left side.
Twin in zero right Digital Sensor input indicating that Twin
boxes has reached zero position on
right side.
Twin in zero left Digital Sensor input indicating that Twin
boxes has reached zero position on
left side.
Chain in 40ft Digital Sensor input indicating that chain is
in 40ft position.
Permit twin down Digital Permits down motion if set to true.
Permit twin up Digital Permits up motion if set to true.
Twin down command Digital Command to send Twin boxes down.
Twin up command Digital Command to send Twin boxes up.

8.1.9.3 Output port

Output Type Description

Twin up ready pulse Digital Signal telling that up sequence is
completed.
Twin down Digital Signal to lower Twin boxes.
Twin up Digital Signal to raise Twin boxes.

43(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 44(86)

Disconnect twin unit left Digital Signal to disconnect left hook.

Disconnect twin unit right Digital Signal to disconnect right hook.
Connect twin unit left Digital Signal to connect left hook.
Connect twin unit right Digital Signal to connect right hook.
Inch to zero gap Digital Signal to inch in Twin boxes.
Inch to connect left Digital Signal to inch out left Twin box.
Inch to connect right Digital Signal to inch out right Twin box.

8.1.9.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Timeout Twin down Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if sequence doesn’t
complete.
Timeout hook Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if sequence doesn’t
complete.
Timeout Twin inching Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if sequence doesn’t
complete.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.9.5 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

255 TWIN_BOXES_UP_TIMEOUT Twin boxes have failed to get to their
upper position within time limit.
256 TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_UP_TIMEOUT Left hook has failed to reach its' upper
position within time limit.
257 TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_UP_TIMEOUT Right hook has failed to reach its' upper
position within time limit.
258 TWIN_ATTACHLEFT_TIMEOUT Twin boxes left timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
259 TWIN_ATTACHRIGHT_TIMEOUT Twin-boxes right timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
260 TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_DN_TIMEOUT Left hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.
261 TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_DN_TIMEOUT Right hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.

44(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 45(86)

262 TWIN_BOXES_DOWN_TIMEOUT Twin-boxes have failed to get to their

lower position within time limit.
263 TWIN_TWIN_SENSOR_LOST Twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not
due to output).
264 TWIN_BOXES_UP_SENSOR_LOST Twin up sensor received when twin-
boxes are down.
265 TWIN_HOOK_DN_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST Left hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
266 TWIN_HOOK_DN_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST Right hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
267 TWIN_HOOK_UP_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST Left hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
268 TWIN_HOOK_UP_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST Right hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
286 TWIN_UP_COMMAND Twin up command has been received.
287 TWIN_DOWN_COMMAND Twin down command has been received.
288 TWIN_BOXES_ARE_UP Twin boxes have reached their upper
position.
289 TWIN_BOXES_ARE_DOWN Twin boxes have reached their lower
position.

8.1.10 PID

8.1.10.1 Overview
The PID components are used to control fast processes, e.g. positioning, syncronisation and control of hydraulic cylinders
with special requirements.
Each PID component controls a single cylinder, but usually they ared used in pair and then 2 PID components are needed.
The PID component have the following features:
‰ Position control
‰ Velocity control
‰ Syncronisation of two cylinders
‰ Acceleration limitation

These features are described in the following sections 8.1.10.2-8.1.10.5.

The implementation and hands-on configuration are described in section 8.1.10.6.

8.1.10.2 Position control

The PID component can use either position mode or velocity mode depending on which way to coontrol it. In position
mode you give a reference position in millimeters. Then the cylinder moves to that position as fast as possible with
configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The position mode can be activated in run time.

8.1.10.3 Velocity control

In velocity mode you give a reference velocity in percent (range –100 to 100) of the maximum speed. The cylinder then
moves in correct direction and at reference speed. When giving a new reference speed the cylinder reaches that speed as
fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The velocity mode can be activated in run time.
When you control the cylinder movement with a joystick velocity mode is the best way to do it.

8.1.10.4 Syncronisation of two cylinders

Some systems want to syncronise two cylinders so that they move in parallel. A syncronisation regulator is available in
the PID to handle this.

45(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 46(86)

There are two different kind of syncronisation modes:

‰ Parallel sync
‰ Non-parallel sync
Parallel sync is used when the cylinders must be parallel all the time. In run time you can set the difference in position
between the two cylinders. Usually this is set to zero. Parallel sync is valid for both positions mode and velocity mode.
Non-parallel sync is used when the cylinders shall move syncronised, but not in parallel. In position mode this means
that when you can move the two cylinders from separate source positions to two other separate destination positions
during the same amount of time. This means that they can move in the same direction or in different directions.
In velocity mode you can move the cylinders syncronised at a certain speed without loosing their difference in position.
You can either move them in the same direction or in different directions.

8.1.10.5 Acceleration limitation

Some systems cannot handle too high acceleration in the cylinder movements. Therefore an Acceleration limiter is
installed and can be used. The limiter works for both acceleration and retardation.
The limiter is always active, independent of position/velocity mode or syncronisation mode.

8.1.10.6 Implementation
Each node are equipped with two PID components that can be used.
Each PID can control a single cylinder. All parameters for each cylinder are located in the corresponding PID. To identify
the two PIDs each component has a parameter called Regulator index which has to be set to 0 and 1 respectively.
When using sync mode both PID components cooperate and the sync parameters are taken from PID0.

For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.

8.1.10.7 Input Ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables regulator if set true.
Regulator mode Digital Sets the operational mode,
POSITION (Low level, 0) or
VELOCITY (High level, 1).
Sync parallel mode Digital
Synchronise Digital

Reference value Analogue Reference value. This signal is scaled

within the component and must not
be pre-scaled or scaled to desired
value.

(Port not visible in ABE)

Input Type Description
Sensor value Analogue Depending on regulator index the
sensor signal will be read from either
analogue input 0 or analogue input 1.
This signal is scaled within the
component and must not be pre-
scaled.

8.1.10.8 Output Ports

46(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 47(86)

Output Type Description

Retract output (PWM) Analogue The actual value sent to the PWM
when retracting.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Expand output (PWM) Analogue The actual value sent to the PWM
when expanding.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Retracting Digital This signal indicates that the
regulator is retracting.
Expanding Digital This signal indicates that the
regulator is expanding.

(Ports not visible in ABE)

Output Type Description
PWM 0 Analogue Used for forward output (PID 0 which
is the same as Regulator index 0).
PWM 1 Analogue Used for reverse output (PID 0 which
is the same as Regulator index 0).
PWM 2 Analogue Used for forward output (PID 1 which
is the same as Regulator index 1).
PWM 3 Analogue Used for reverse output (PID 1 which
is the same as Regulator index 1).

8.1.10.9 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Filter weight Percent The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
[%]
Aim window Millimetres The distance from the reference
position where to aim for the non-
[mm]
linear regulator. It is only used in
Position mode.
Rate limiter gain Number This should be the frequency [Hz],
i.e. 1/sample interval.
Fraction of square root Percent Fraction of the non-linear regulator
signal to use. Should be between 60-
[%]
90.

47(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 48(86)

Switch window Millimetres Distance from reference position

where to switch from the non linear
[mm]
regulator to the PI regulator. This
parameter must be higher than the
Aim window parameter. It is only
used in Position mode.
Time to reach input Milliseconds Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
[ms]
mode.
Sync max integrator Percent Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
[%]
Sync Integral (I) Number Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sync Proportional (P) Number Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sample interval Milliseconds Sampling interval.
[ms]
Velocity window Percent When regulating velocity and if the
Reference value is inside Velocity
[%]
window it is interpreted as zero.
Position window Millimetres When regulating position the
cylinder will stop when it reaches
[mm]
reference position +/- Position
window.
Device length Millimetres Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
[mm]
Insignal max Number Maximum insignal from analogue
input.
Insignal min Number Minimum insignal from analogue
input.
R Half PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between
[ms] Device length and 0 at R Half PWM.
R Max PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between
[ms] Device length and 0 at R Max PWM.
R Min PWM Number Minimum PWM output that causes
movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
R Half PWM Number PWM output between R Min PWM
and R Max PWM.
Approx. (R Min PWM + R Max
PWM) / 2
R Max PWM Number Minimum PWM output at max
speed. (Upper threshold limit).

48(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 49(86)

F Half PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between 0

[ms] and Device length at F Half PWM.
F Max PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between 0
[ms] and Device length at F Max PWM.
F Min PWM Number Minimum PWM output that causes
movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
F Half PWM Number PWM output between F Min PWM
and F Max PWM.
Approx. (F Min PWM + F Max
PWM) / 2
F Max PWM Number Minimum PWM output at max
speed. (Upper threshold limit).
Pos. Integral (I) Number Integral part of PI regulator. Only
used in Position mode.
[value * 1000]
Pos. Proportional (P) Number Proportional part of PI regulator.
Only used in Position mode.
[value * 1000]
Acceleration limit Milliseconds Minimum time for valve to open full
and to close full.
[ms]
Regulator index Number Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,
PWM1 and analogue input 0.
Index 1 corresponds to PWM2,
PWM3 and analogue input 1.
Node Option Location of regulator. Choose
between B1 – B8 and A1 – A4.
Store mode Option Select which parameters to use:
ALL PARAMS: use all parameters
from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
REGULATOR PARAMS: use only
the regulator parameters from
NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
LINEAR PARAMS: use only linear
parameters from NVRAM stored by
AutoTuner
ABE ONLY: use parameters only
from Spreader program file

8.1.11 AutoTuner
This component is intended as a help when setting up the PID component. It will automatically move the cylinder(s) and
measuring it’s characteristics when component is enabled. If one intentions are to synchronize two cylinders with PID
components, it’s possible to adapt the two cylinders with the use of this component. This is done by enabling the check
box Prepare for sync parameter.

49(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 50(86)

The AutoTuner will store it’s measured parameters in the onboard NVRAM. These parameters can then be uploaded and
monitored/transferred to the matching PID component. It is important that the Record name is identical to the PID that is
supposed to use the auto tuned parameters.

For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.

8.1.11.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component if set true. When
the enable input goes from 0 to 1 the
auto tune procedure is restarted.
Slave Analogue Sensor input signal for the slave
cylinder. Only needed if prepare for
sync is checked.
Main Analogue Sensor input signal for the cylinder to
auto tune.

8.1.11.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

Finished Digital Output for telling when tuning is
complete.
Slave Retract Analogue Output for retracting slave cylinder.
Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Slave Expand Analogue Output for expanding slave cylinder.
Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Main Retract Analogue Output for retracting main cylinder.
This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.
Main Expand Analogue Output for expanding main cylinder.
This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.

8.1.11.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

50(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 51(86)

Position window Millimeter When regulating position the

cylinder will stop when it reaches
[mm]
reference position +/- Position
window.
Velocity window Percents When regulating velocity and if the
Reference value is inside Velocity
[%]
window it is interpreted as zero.
Sync Proportional [P] Number Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sync Integral [I] Number Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sync max integrator Percents Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
[%]
Time to reach input Milliseconds Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
[ms]
mode.
Fraction of square root Percents Fraction of the non-linear regulator
signal to use. Should be between 60-
[%]
90.
Filter weight Percents The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
[%]
Natural frequency Number
[value * 1000]
Moderation factor Number
[value * 1000]
Regulator index Number Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,
PWM1 and analogue input 0.
Index 1 corresponds to PWM2,
PWM3 and analogue input 1.
Sample interval Milliseconds Sampling interval.
[ms]
Acceleration limit Milliseconds Minimum time for valve to open full
and to close full.
[ms]
Device length Millimetre Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
[mm]
Timeout Milliseconds Timeout for a full cylinder stroke.
This parameter must be greater than
[ms]
the tiem it takes for the cylinder to
perform a full stroke.
Record name Text The instance name of the matching
PID component.

51(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 52(86)

Prepare for sync Option This shall be enabled when using

syncronisation between two
cylinders. Adapts the faster cylinder
to the slower one.

8.1.11.4 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2.

Code Message Description

385 AUTOTUNER_STORED_IN_NVRAM The component has stored it’s
parameters in NVRAM.

8.2 AnyBus

8.2.1 Introduction
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the Anybus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an Anybus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the Anybus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.

The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.

8.2.1.1 Mapping of I/O

OUT IN
Byte 0-63 Byte 0-63
Project Project
specific specific
outputs inputs

Output Segment
In the output segment it is possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The diagnostics
are handled by the Anybus System component. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard
display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for

52(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 53(86)

indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and
therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic
message is transmitted. The start position of the diagnostic areas is configurable.

8.2.1.2 Spreader diagnostic area.

The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)

8.2.1.3 System diagnostic area.

This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0 => Node ID
Byte 1-2 (WORD) => Row Number (of source code)
Byte 3-8 (3 x WORD) => Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 9-10 (WORD) => Sequential counter

The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

8.2.2 Anybus System

The Anybus system component has the ability to handle downloading of new spreader program (*.spr).
Note: To be able to download a spreader program via Anybus a specific PC software is needed.

8.2.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Download start Digital If set true, component expects
download data on Anybus.

8.2.2.2 Parameters
Parameter Unit Description
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.
Log active Option Indicates if the log should be
exported to the Anybus interface or
not.

53(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 54(86)

Log address 0-63 The Anybus output address in the

access area where the log should be
exported.
Assert active Option Indicates if the assert log should be
exported to the Anybus interface or
not.
Assert address 0-63 The Anybus output address in the
access area where the assert log
should be exported.

8.2.3 Output Word

8.2.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Analogue Input from analogue input port.

8.2.3.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Word number Number Word in Anybus interface to which
the value from ”IN” is to be
transferred to.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.4 Output Byte

8.2.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Analogue Input from analogue input port.

8.2.4.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.

54(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 55(86)

Byte number Number Byte in Anybus interface to which

the value from ”IN” is to be
transferred to.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.5 Output Bit

8.2.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Digital Input from digital input port.

8.2.5.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Byte number Number Start byte in Anybus interface.
Bit number Number Bit number of the chosen byte in
Anybus interface.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.6 Input Word

8.2.6.1 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Analogue The word number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the “OUT” value.

8.2.6.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Word number Analogue The word within the Anybus
interface from which

55(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 56(86)

Node Node id The node identity of the node where

the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.7 Input Byte

8.2.7.1 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Analogue The byte number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the “OUT” value.

8.2.7.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Byte number Number Start byte in Anybus interface.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.8 Input Bit

8.2.8.1 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Digital value from Anybus interface.

8.2.8.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Byte number Number Start byte in Anybus interface.
Bit number Number Bit number in Anybus interface.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

56(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 57(86)

8.3 Guards

8.3.1 Spreader stop

The Spreader stop component stops all output functions from Spreader specific components, controllers, and causes them
to go back to a boot state upon the release of the Spreader stop. It also generates a message to the log

8.3.1.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Digital Command to stop spreader.
true = spreader stops
false = spreader stop resumed

8.3.1.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.3.1.3 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging

Code Message Description

97 SPREADER_STOP Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated.
0 = deactivated, 1 = activated.

8.3.2 TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System

The TTDS component implements the functionality of the twin twenty detection system, which is used to prevent lifting
two twenty foot containers in a forty foot single lift position. The function should only be active to prevent wrongful
lifting and not to actively control any other device. The logic is based on the Bromma seven sensor system and the output
can be used to interlock the Twistlocks, but should also always when possible be sent to the crane. Since the logic is
designed to be fail-safe, any type of fault of sensor or a misreading by the sensor will trigger the output and therefore an
override has been implemented. For details regarding the TTDS system functionality see separate manual. The TTDS
component generates log messages every time an override has been used.

8.3.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Override Digital Overrides TTDS result.
true = output (Twin) is always false
false = normal output

57(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 58(86)

Sensor 1 Digital Input from TTDS sensors.

...
Sensor 7

8.3.2.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital true = two containers detected
false = one or none detected

8.3.2.3 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

290 TTDS_OVERRIDE_ACTIVATED Override request received.
291 TTDS_OVERRIDE_DEACTIVATED Override request ended.

8.3.3 Analogue guard

The Analogue guard is intended for use of monitoring a specific analogue value. A window around the min/max values
can be defined. This component generates a log message classified as a warning, which is user defined. There are 10 (0-9)
unique message tags to choose from and they generate the messages 146 – 155 within the log system. Apart from sending
a message to the log, an output can trigger any other event if the input value exceeds the ranges specified in the
parameters of the component.

8.3.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Analogue Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.

8.3.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Signal indicating that Analogue input
has gone outside lower or upper limit
longer than the specified time Delay.

8.3.3.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

58(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 59(86)

Note Text Descriptive string indicating the

function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Delay Milliseconds Time until warning message is
[ms] prompted if Analogue input has gone
out of boundaries.
Lower limit Number Lower limit of allowable input range.
Upper limit Number Upper limit of allowable input range.
Warning code Option Warning code that will identify the
component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.3.3.4 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

146 USERDEFINED_0 User chooses what message to use. The messages
… ... generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read
155 USERDEFINED_9 out of the log.

8.3.4 Digital guard

The Digital guard triggers a user-defined message to be stored in the log.

8.3.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.3.4.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Note Text Descriptive string indicating the
function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Input NO/NC Option Normally open or normally closed
behaviour on input.

59(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 60(86)

Delay Milliseconds Time until warning message is

[ms] prompted if digital value is true or
false (depending on input NO / NC
setting).
Warning code Option Warning code that will identify the
component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.3.4.3 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

146 USERDEFINED_0 User chooses what message to use. The messages generated
… ... in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.
155 USERDEFINED_9

8.4 Gates
This section contains the simple Boolean instruction set.

8.4.1 AND
This function block performs the function of the logical AND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

8.4.1.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN0 Digital Digital value from other component
... or digital input port.
IN n

8.4.1.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Digital output result from AND
operation.

60(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 61(86)

8.4.1.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Number of inputs Number Number of inputs on component.

8.4.2 NAND
This function block performs the function of the logical NAND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.

Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

8.4.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN 0 Digital Digital values from other component
... or digital input port.
IN n

8.4.2.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Digital output result from NAND
operation.

8.4.2.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Number of inputs Number Number of inputs on component.

8.4.3 NOR
This function block performs the function of the logical NOR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.

Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0

61(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 62(86)

8.4.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN 0 Digital Digital values from other component
... or digital input port.
IN n

8.4.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Digital output result from NOR
operation.

8.4.3.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Number of inputs Number Number of inputs on component.

8.4.4 OR
This function block performs the function of the logical OR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings.

Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

8.4.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN 0 Digital Digital values from other component
... or digital input port.
IN n

8.4.4.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Digital output result from OR
operation.

62(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 63(86)

8.4.4.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Number of inputs Number Number of inputs on component.

8.4.5 NOT
This function block performs the function of the logical NOT with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.

Basic function
IN OUT
0 1
1 0

8.4.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.4.5.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Digital output result from NOT
operation.

8.4.6 XOR
This function block performs the function of the logical XOR (exclusive or) with the number of inputs specified in the
parameter settings.

Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

8.4.6.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN 0 Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.
IN 1 Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

63(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 64(86)

8.4.6.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Digital output result from XOR
operation.

8.4.7 SR Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical SR latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will reset (output goes low).

8.4.7.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Set Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.
Reset Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.4.7.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Digital output result from SR latch.

8.4.8 RS Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical RS latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will set (output goes high).

8.4.8.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Set Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.
Reset Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.4.8.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

Result Digital Digital output result from RS latch.

64(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 65(86)

8.4.9 Logical gate

The Logical gate component is used if one wishes to perform logical operations (bit wise) on two analogue values.
Each analogue input is represented as a 32 bit value.

8.4.9.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set Result to zero.
Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. enabled all time).
IN 1 Analogue Input value 1.
IN 2 Analogue Input value 2.

8.4.9.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

Result Analogue Result of logical operation.

8.4.9.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Operation mode Option Determents type of logical operation
preformed on IN 1 and IN 2. The
operations available are AND, OR
and XOR.

8.5 Digital

8.5.1 OD Timer – On Delay Timer

The On Delay Timer is used to delay a signal from input to output.

8.5.1.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port. Starts the timer
on positive flank.

8.5.1.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

65(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 66(86)

OUT Digital Digital output that goes high if the

input is high and the specified time
has elapsed.

8.5.1.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Delay Milliseconds Time that the in put signal is to be
[ms] delayed before the output goes high

8.5.2 UpDn Counter – Up Down Counter

The Up Down Counter increments each time the UP input transits from low to high and decrements each time the DOWN
input transits from low to high. The RESET input takes the counter value to zero.
The range of the counter is from 0 to 231-1 (=2147483647).

8.5.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Up Digital Increments the counter value
Down Digital Decrements the counter value
Reset Digital Sets the counter value to zero

8.5.2.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital OUT = 1 (high) when the counter
value is equal to or above the
specified value in the parameter
listing
Counter value Analogue The current value of the counter

8.5.2.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Trigger count Digital The counter value when the digital
output goes high. The output is on
when the counter value is equal to or
above this value.

8.5.3 OSC - Oscillator

The oscillator purely switches the output on and off with specified duty cycle adjusted in the parameters.

8.5.3.1 Input ports

66(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 67(86)

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

8.5.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital Clock pulse output.

8.5.3.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Cycle time Milliseconds Cycle time for Clock output.
[ms]

8.5.4 Split
The split component is used to generate two or more signals available for connection from one signal line. I.e. it can in
many cases replace the use of intermediate variables, since the signal value of the input and the outputs are always the
same.

8.5.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.5.4.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT 0 Digital Outputs have same status as the IN
… input port
OUT n

8.5.4.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Number of outputs Number Number of outputs on component.

8.5.5 Pulse
The Pulse component is used to generate a pulse. The duration of the pulse is set by a parameter. The pulse can be trigged
on either positive or negative flank. The pulse is restarted if an new active flank is detected during the pulse.
An output indicating time left until pulse is unlit is also available.

67(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 68(86)

8.5.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Input Digital Trigger for starting pulse.

8.5.5.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

Time remaining Analogue Time remaining (ms) until pulse is
unlit.
Output Digital Pulse output.

8.5.5.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Active flank Option Determines active flank of trigger,
POS or NEG.
Length of pulse Milliseconds Duration of pulse.
[ms]

8.6 Miscellaneous

8.6.1 Constant
The Constant component is used to store a Boolean or Analogue value as a constant variable to use within the logic. Note
that any other value than zero is considered as a logical one when using this component for digital purposes.

8.6.1.1 Output ports

Output Type Description

Digital Digital Constant value > 0 : Digital output
= true
Constant value = 0 : Digital output
= false
Analogue Analogue Analogue output = Constant value

8.6.1.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

68(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 69(86)

Value Number Value to put on output ports.

8.6.2 Dead end

The Dead End component is used when one has to make a system where one or more of the mandatory outputs cannot be
used for some reason. By connecting the Mandatory output from another component to the Dead end component that
signal is terminated. This can be useful when controller components are to be used purely for log purposes and one
doesn’t want the logic to control the outputs.

8.6.2.1 Output ports

Output Type Description

Digital IN Digital Terminates a digital connection.
Analogue IN Analogue Terminates an analogue connection.

8.6.3 Spreader properties

8.6.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Twin boxes are down Digital Input port telling that twin boxes are
down.
Landed Digital Input port telling that spreader has
landed.
Locked Digital Input port telling that all Twist locks
are locked.
Unlocked Digital Input port telling that all Twist locks
is unlocked.
Pump 1 on Digital Used for activating the clock for
drive time 1. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 1
counts.
Pump 2 on Digital Used for activating the clock for
drive time 2. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 2
counts.
Pump 3 on Digital Used for activating the clock for
drive time 3. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 3
counts.

8.6.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

69(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 70(86)

Number of lock operations on twin Analogue Number of lock operations

performed on twin Twist locks.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Number of lock operations on single Analogue Number of lock operations
performed on single Twist locks.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Number of containers Analogue Number of containers handled. When
twin is down this number is
incremented by two. Saved in
external EEPROM.
Spreader serial number Analogue Spreader unique number. User
defined. Read from external
EEPROM.
Drawing number Analogue Spreader unique number. User
defined. Read from parameter
Drawing number.
Counter clock pulse Digital Clock pulse that toggles from false to
true when container is handled.
When a new sequence is ended
output goes back to false.
Drive time 1 HI Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 1 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Drive time 1 LO Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 1 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the low word.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Drive time 2 HI Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 2 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Drive time 2 LO Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 2 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the low word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

70(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 71(86)

Drive time 3 HI Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since

delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 3 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Drive time 3 LO Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 3 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the low word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

8.6.3.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.
Drawing number Number User defined number. Number is
used to present the drawing number
of the spreader.

8.6.3.4 Message logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description

318 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_E Last saved properties are read from
EPROM EEPROM.
319 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_D System has read properties from NVRAM.
S
320 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_DIFF Spreader properties read from EEPROM
and NVRAM differ.
321 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP System succeeded to write properties to
ROM_OK EEPROM.
322 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP System failed to write properties to
ROM_FAIL EEPROM.
323 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_NEW_N System detected that a new node is
ODE_TO_EEPROM connected since last shut down.

8.6.4 Memory
The Memory component is used when one wishes to write or read an analogue value from or to the NVRAM.

8.6.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

71(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 72(86)

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false

component will set the Analogue
OUT to zero. Default value if not
connected is true (i.e. no effect).
Write Digital If set true, component reads
Analogue IN and writes to NVRAM.
Read Digital If set true, component reads from
NVRAM and writes to Analogue
OUT.
Analogue IN Analogue Analoge value that is to be stored.

8.6.4.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

Analogue OUT Analogue Value stored in NVRAM.

8.6.5 Digital buffer

The Digital buffer component buffers digital values for a selected amount of execution cycles.

8.6.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Digital IN Digital Digital value that is to be buffered.

8.6.5.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT 0 Digital Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
..
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
OUT n next cycle and so on.

8.6.5.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Number of samples to hold Number Number of cycles to remember.

8.6.6 Analogue buffer

The Analogue buffer component buffers analogue values for a selected amount of execution cycles.

72(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 73(86)

8.6.6.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
zero. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Analogue IN Analogue Analogue value that is to be buffered.

8.6.6.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT 0 Analogue Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
..
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
OUT n next cycle and so on.

8.6.6.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Number of samples to hold Number Number of cycles to remember.

73(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 74(86)

8.7 Analogue
The Analogue components are used to work with analogue values.

8.7.1 RS485 port

This component is used to access the RS485 interface. Depending on what protocol is chosen from the parameter view
the component can be used for a variety of purposes.

8.7.1.1 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Analogue Analogue value of output from
sensor

8.7.1.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Protocol Option Type of protocol used (i.e. vendor
specific protocol). Only SLIN is
implemented SSI is implemeted.
Node Option Node the RS485 sensor is connected
to.
Code Type Option Applys only if SSI protocol is
selected
Input resolution Number Applys only if SSI protocol is
selected. Specifies the resolution of
the component.

8.7.2 IN0 > IN1

8.7.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN 0 Analogue Input
IN 1 Analogue Input

8.7.2.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Digital IN 0 > IN 1 gives OUT = 1
IN 0 <= IN 1 gives OUT = 0

74(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 75(86)

8.7.3 IN0 * IN1

8.7.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN 0 Analogue Input
IN 1 Analogue Input

8.7.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 * IN 1

8.7.4 IN0 / IN1

Note. Always avoid division by zero.

8.7.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN 0 Analogue Nominator input
IN 1 Analogue Denominator input

8.7.4.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 / IN 1

8.7.5 IN0 – IN1

8.7.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN 0 Analogue Input
IN 1 Analogue Input

8.7.5.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 – IN 1

75(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 76(86)

8.7.6 IN0 + IN1

8.7.6.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN 0 Analogue Inputs to be added together
...
IN n

8.7.6.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 + IN 1+, …,+ IN n

8.7.6.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Input counter Number Number of input ports on component.

8.7.7 Scale
The Scale components scales a analogue value according to the formula,
OUT = ((scaledMax – scaledMin)/(INMax-INMin))*(IN - INMin) + scaledMin,
which performs a linear scaling with an offset according to OUT = k*IN + m.

8.7.7.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

IN Analogue Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.

8.7.7.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Analogue Scaled analogue value with
constraints from parameter listing.

8.7.7.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Max value after scale Number Largest scaled value.
Min value after scale Number Smallest scaled value.

76(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 77(86)

Max value of input Number The maximum value of input.

Min value of input Number The minimum value of input.

8.7.8 AnalogueLatch
The Analogue latch is a component that stores a value internally when triggered by a digital input. The value stored in an
internal variable can be read at the output of the component. As long as the digital trigger input is active the input value is
directly transferred to the output value and as soon as the digital input goes low the output value remains constant at the
current value until a new digital command is given.

8.7.8.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
IN Digital Input that trigger the component to
read the value IN Value.
IN Value Analogue Input value that is read and stored in
the component

8.7.8.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

OUT Analogue The stored value of the component

8.7.9 Filter
The Filter component is used to filter analogue signals from noise.

8.7.9.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

Analogue IN Analogue Unfiltered signal.

8.7.9.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

Analogue OUT Analogue Filtered signal.

77(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 78(86)

8.7.9.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Filter type Option Determines type of filter. Only
MOVING AVR is implemented.
Filter weight Number [%] Determents how many percents of
previous filtered signal that is to be
used.

8.7.10 AuxAnalogue
This component implements two more analogue inputs.

8.7.10.1 Output ports

Output Type Description

Port 5 Analogue Analogue value
Port 4 Analogue Analogue value

8.7.10.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Node Option Specifies the node.

78(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 79(86)

8.7.11 Tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of designing a Spreader program using ABE.
Steps covered in this tutorial.
Creating a new project
System view
Pin configuration
Component view
Load view

Step 1: Creating a new project

Start ABE from your Start menu if it isn’t already started. If you just started ABE you already have a project created for
you, If not create a new one by clicking the button showed in the picture below.

Figure 0:1 Create project

Step 2: System view

Activate the node B2 by checking corresponding Active checkbox. Node B1 is always present in the system.

Figure 0:2 Activating nodes

Fill in the Value fields in the parameter listing. Note that some of the fields are not editable.

Figure 0:3 Setting system parameters

79(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 80(86)

Step 3: Pin configuration

All present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. Make sure tab B1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 1 and 2 the
following names. Comment field is optional.

Figure 0:4 Setting item identifiers on node B1

Make sure tab B2 is activated in the view and do the same for Port id# 1 to 4.
Note: The red colour of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected.

Figure 0:5 Setting item identifiers on node B2

Step 4: Component view

Select the FAC component from the available component pallet.

Figure 0:6 Choosing component

If available components pallet is not visible. Activate it by clicking at the Components button shown in picture below.

80(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 81(86)

Figure 0:7 Bringing up Available components

Place the component on Page 1 in the view.

Figure 0:8 Default look of FAC component

Note: Connections with red colour indicate that they are not yet connected. Connections with white colour indicate that
they are optional to connect.

Double click on the component to open Properties for the FAC component. Change the property Number of Flippers to 2.

Figure 0:9 Changing properties for FAC component

81(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 82(86)

The new appearance for the component should look like this:

Figure 0:10 Look of FAC component after changing number of flippers

By placing the pointer over the component or one of its connections a hint (tool tip) will appear. The hint tells you about
the properties for the component or its connection.

Figure 0:11 Look of component hint

Click with your right mouse button over a connection on the component. A pop up menu will appear. Move the cursor as
shown in the picture below and click on your left mouse button over Flipper_Down.

Figure 0:12 Making component connections

82(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 83(86)

Your component should now look like this:

Figure 0:13 Appearance of a connection

Continue with the remaining connections until you have all connections connected.
If you want to disconnect a connection you click over the connection with your right mouse button and choose disconnect
when it appears.

When your system is complete there should not be any red coloured connections in the Component view or Item
identifiers in the Pin configuration view.
Your Component view should look like Figure 12 when all your connections are made.

Figure 0:14 Appearance of a connection

Now you are ready to generate downloadable Spreader program file. Select Compile from the File menu.
If the following message box appears your system is not configured properly. Look for red coloured connections or item
identifiers. If port is configured to be used but isn’t you must delete it.

Save the output file (when compiling the spreader program) with the name “tutorial.spr”.

Figure 0:15 The Spreader program contains errors

When you have generated your downloadable program file it can be found at the location where it was saved. You must
not edit this file.

83(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 84(86)

Step 5: Load view

Downloading spreader programs

1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 0:16 Select Connection

2. Press the Download button.

3. Point out the spreader program that you want to download. (Spreader programs have extension *.spr).
4. Observe the status bars. If connected node is the master node no distribution between nodes will appear. If not the
master node is the point of connection the spreader program will first be downloaded to the local node (connected
node) and than distributed to the master node.

Uploading spreader programs

1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 0:17 Select Connection

2. Press the Upload button.

The two following dialogues will appear in sequence.
Answer Yes to the first dialog if you are working on anything that you want to save else No.

Figure 0:18 Save current spreader program

Answer Yes to the second dialog to open the uploaded spreader program in the editor. (If you press No, you have to
manually open the uploaded spreader program.)

Figure 0:19 Open spreader program in ABE

3. Observe the status bar ABE --> Connected node.

When 100% is reached the uploaded spreader program will appear in the editor.

84(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 85(86)

Step 6: Online monitoring

Online monitoring is performed under Component view.

1. Make sure you have the same spreader program in ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program or upload the spreader program from the SCS2 (see Step 5).

2. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 0:20 Select Connection

3. Make sure Auto is not checked.

Figure 0:21 Deselect Auto option

If Auto is checked, automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval.

4. Start online monitoring

Figure 0:22 Start online monitoring

The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.

Once the online monitoring is started, the design window is locked for editing. If you want to monitor another part of
your design (not visible at the moment); you have to stop the online monitoring and then scroll to that part and start the
monitoring again.

5. Update online values by pressing the Update button.

Figure 0:23 Updated online values

85(86) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 86(86)

6. Stop online monitoring by pressing button as shown below.

Figure 0:24 Stop online monitoring

86(86) © 2000
 User Manual
BMS - Light

Version 1.03

Revision Issued by Date Measures

PA1 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB 2000-08-22 First draft.
PA2 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB 2000-10-13 Added modem functions.
PA3 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB 2000-10-23 Changes in GUI. Cancel buttons added. Height changed
on cells in string grids.
PA4 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB 2001-01-10 Changes in GUI. Cancel button moved. Some Anybus
functions added.
PA5 Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems AB 2001-10-29 New pages added. CAN tester, Boot loader.
A Ken Lindfors, CC Systems AB 2002-06-12 Minor changes after release of System 1.04.
B Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB 2003-06-11 Minor changes after release of System 1.05.

Printed: 04-1-8 13.27

 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 2(18)

Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 3

2 INSTALLING BMS – LIGHT ................................................................................................................................... 3

2.1 HW REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.3 DISCLAIMER .......................................................................................................................................................... 3
3 USER INTERFACE.................................................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 MENU (TOP TOOLBAR) OPTIONS: ......................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 STATUS BARS IN MAIN WINDOW............................................................................................................................ 5
4 DOWNLOAD VIEW................................................................................................................................................... 6

5 GET LOG VIEW......................................................................................................................................................... 7

5.1 FILTERING CONSTRAINTS ..................................................................................................................................... 8
6 I/O STATUS VIEW..................................................................................................................................................... 9

7 MISC. VIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 10

ANYBUS VIEW ................................................................................................................................................................ 11

8 SPREADER INFO VIEW......................................................................................................................................... 12

9 UPLOAD VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ 13

10 ADVANCED .......................................................................................................................................................... 14
10.1 CAN TESTER ...................................................................................................................................................... 14
10.2 BOOT LOADER .................................................................................................................................................... 16
10.3 ASSERTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 17
10.4 POM LOADER..................................................................................................................................................... 18

2(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 3(18)

1 Introduction
The BMS is a software tool used for monitoring and handling the Bromma system SCS2. This manual assumes the user
has good knowledge of the SCS2 system as well as Windows environments.

2 Installing BMS – Light

2.1 HW requirements
• An Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.
• At least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
• At least 1Mb of free disk space.

2.2 Installation
• Close any other applications running under Windows.
• Insert the first disc into your disc station (if installing from disc)
• Run the file BMSSetup.exe from the BMS folder on your provided disk.
• Follow the instructions on the screen.

2.3 Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.
Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.

3(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 4(18)

3 User interface

3.1 Menu (top toolbar) options:

File:
Exit --- Terminates the application.

View:
Activates selected tab [Download, Get log, I/O status, Misc., Anybus, Spreader info, Upload]

Tools:
Connect serial cable: activates selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
Connect modem: activates modem connected to selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
The dialog below is used for making the connection. Once a connection has been made the dialog window disappears.
The BMS commands are working via the modem if the modem has connected successfully.

Modem connection

Connect to node: connects BMS to selected node [B1, B2,..., B8, A1, A2, A3, A4]. This connection is made over RS232
link through the CAN bus. Normally select Local node.
Advanced options: Intended for Bromma R&D personnel.

Help:
About: shows the version of the BMS.

4(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 5(18)

3.2 Status bars in main window

1. Status of last performed operation. Intended for Bromma personnel.

2. Status of current operation.
3. Serial cable connection (COM1 or COM2).
4. Destination node (normally Local node) of all operations.
5. Status of serial cable connection.

2
3
1 4 5

Main window

5(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 6(18)

4 Download view
This tab is used to download the entire system program to the system. Note. It takes a considerable amount of time to
update the system program and therefore make sure that the system can be down for this amount of time.

1. Transfer status from BMS to the connected node [4]. PC downloading to the connected node.
2. Transfer status from connected node [4] to node [5]. Distribution of the program via the bus lines to the other nodes
on the bus.
3. Total transfer status. Status of complete system to be downloaded.
4. Connected node (to PC).
5. Receiving node when distributing between nodes.
6. Select file to download. Press here to select the file to be downloaded. When file is selected download process starts.
7. Cancels current transfer to connected node. The operation just cancels the feedback of transfer status if distribution
between nodes has started (i.e. the operation will not effect the transfer in this case).

7 5

Download view

6(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 7(18)

5 Get log view

This used to retrieve the onboard error and event log.

1. Gets next set of logged messages (max 128 messages each time its’ pressed)
2. Get all messages in log.
3. If checked, auto mode is on. Auto mode triggers the Next button [1] at an interval of X seconds defined by [4].
4. Interval for reading via auto mode in seconds.
5. Enable filtering. The filtered table is shown if checked. Filtering can be used to only view certain parts of the log.
6. Opens the Filtering constraint dialog. Select the type of filtering here.
7. Clears the log table on the PC. The log in the SCS2 remains unaffected.
8. Saves the entire log table in a comma separated text file. Can be opened in for instance in Wordpad, Excel etc.
9. Cancels current operation.
10. Load button. Loads and displays a saved log file.

6
4 1 2 5

9
8
7 10

Get log view

7(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 8(18)

5.1 Filtering constraints

Select the type of filtering for the log view in this view.

Checked Categories, Nodes, Sub codes and Codes will appear in the filtered table.
Ex: APS_TEACH_COMMAND (of category Info) is checked but not Info under Category. The message will therefor not
appear in the filtered table.

1. Message categories
2. Nodes that have reported messages.
3. Message codes for entire table

Filtering constraints

8(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 9(18)

6 I/O status view

This view is used to read (and force) the I/O status of the SCS2.

1. Select node to view.

2. Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally press
Write [4]
3. Current value/current overridden value of I/O.
4. Write current override values to system. Only the viewed node is written to. A write for each node is required if
values are to be forced on more than one node.
5. Read values from SCS2. All nodes are read at once (Selected node [1] is shown).
6. Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [5] with interval determined by the value of: [6].
7. Update interval for Auto read [6].
8. Cancels current operation.

Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:

Uncheck the corresponding I/O [2] and press Write [4]. (If a read operation is followed instead the unchecked port will be
checked by the SCS2.) All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.

1 3

4
5

6 7
8

I/O status view

9(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 10(18)

7 Misc. view
This view is used to get and set general information of the SCS2.

1. Updates the Date and Time fields from the PC when pressed.
2. Set the time and date on SCS2 according to Date and Time fields.
3. Get current date and time from the SCS2. Displayed in Date and Time fields.
4. Get address key information from the node [5].
5. Destination of question.
6. Serial cable connection.
7. Cancels current operation.
8. Get version information. Software version and protocol version for Boot and System program. The Boot program
version is Boot SW version and the System program version is System SW version. Don’t care about the COM
versions.
9. Reboots the system.

Ex. Serial cable [6] is connected via COM1 to B1 and Destination [5] is set to Local node (or B1, which would be the
same). B1 is configured to have E-stop and Redundancy block activated. This will give us the answer:
Key: 5
E-Stop: YES
Redundancy: YES
Module name: B1

8
2

7
6 5

10(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 11(18)

Anybus view
The Anybus view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the fieldbus interface of the Anybus card.

1. Input data to SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the
value of that byte in binary format.
2. Output data from SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field
the value of that byte in binary format.
3. Reads all Input data [1] and Output data [2] from Anybus interface.
4. Cancels current operation.
5. Set DeviceNet master in Run mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
6. Set DeviceNet master in Idle mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
7. Select node where to Read [3] data from.

Anybus view

1
6

3
4

11(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 12(18)

Spreader info view

This view is used to administrate the external EEPROM that is mounted on some spreaders.
Key = generic name of memory area of EEPROM.

1. Shows the selected key in the Spreader info field [6]. This field can not be edited.
2. Shows the current value of corresponding Key [1].
3. Sets the Value [2] for selected Key [1].
4. Deletes the value for selected Key [1]. The Key [1] can not be deleted, just the value.
5. Updates the entire Spreader info [6] view on the PC.
6. Table of all Keys stored in external EEPROM.
7. Cancels current operation.

Spreader info view

7 4
3

12(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 13(18)

Upload view
This view is for Bromma R&D personnel only. It is used to upload memory blocks from the SCS2.

Upload view

13(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 14(18)

10 Advanced
These three sub views are mainly intended for Bromma’s R&D personnel only.

10.1 CAN Tester

This view holds the functionally of the CAN Tester. To be able to use the CAN Tester the master node has to be keyed as
Test. See the SCS2 manual for information.

The main functionality is as follows:

• Every node connected to the CAN network is tested.
• Each connected node is tested for a pre-selected time at each selected bit rate.
• When a node is tested the next node is tested at the same bit-rate and during the pre-selected time.
• The test results are sent back to the CAN Tester and are displayed in the list.

1. Selects the bit-rates that are to be tested.

2. Sets the duration time of each test.
3. Shows the additional information that are used when saving the results.
4. Saves the results as a *.csv or a *.txt file.
5. Starts the test.
6. Sows status of the CAN test.
7. Closes dialog.
8. Result field showing which node that is tested.
9. Result field showing what bit-rate the test used.
10. Result field showing the minimum of retransmissions during test.
11. Result field showing the average of retransmissions during test.
12. Result field showing the maximum of retransmissions during test.
13. Result field showing the total number of messages sent during test.
14. Result field showing the total numbers of retransmissions during test.
15. Result field showing the total numbers of bus offs occurred during test.
16. Result field showing the total numbers of messages not answered during test.

14(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 15(18)

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

4
7
5

CAN Tester view

15(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 16(18)

10.2 Boot Loader

The Boot Loader view is used to download new boot program to connected node.

1. Selects the file that is to be downloaded (*.s19).

2. Downloads the selected file.
3. Progress bar showing percentage completed.
4. Cancels the download.
5. Closes dialog.

3
1 2 4 5

Boot Loader view

16(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 17(18)

10.3 Asserts
The asserts view holds the functionality of reading asserts from the SCS2 . It is used for detecting unexpected system
events.

Asserts view

17(18) © 2000
 Document: Project: Project No
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2004-01-08 13:27 B 18(18)

10.4 POM Loader

The POM Loader view is used for downloading new power monitoring programs to the SCS2 .

POM Loader view

18(18) © 2000
GETTING STARTED
WITH

SCS²

1 REV 3
 Index
Node Hardware ............................................................................................................... 4
DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................................................................................ 4
General............................................................................................................................ 4
The X2 connector............................................................................................................ 5
Node ID....................................................................................................................... 5
Main Supply................................................................................................................ 6
CAN ............................................................................................................................ 6
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors).................................................................. 7
I/O Groups .................................................................................................................. 7
Common junction........................................................................................................ 8
Internal jumper bars .................................................................................................... 8
Connecting a switch.................................................................................................... 9
Connecting a valve...................................................................................................... 9
I/O Modules .............................................................................................................. 10
APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................... 10
ABE (Application Builder Environment) ................................................................................... 10
System view .............................................................................................................. 10
Pin configuration....................................................................................................... 11
Component view ....................................................................................................... 11
Load view.................................................................................................................. 14
ANYBUS ..................................................................................................................................................... 15
General.......................................................................................................................... 15
Connecting the B1 node............................................................................................ 15
Connecting the A1 node............................................................................................ 16
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus) ............................................................. 16
APPLICATION WITH A ANYBUS INTERFACE ................................................................................ 18
ABE............................................................................................................................... 18
ANYBUS GATEWAY................................................................................................................................ 20
General.......................................................................................................................... 20
BCAN - Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 21
Power connector........................................................................................................ 21
BCAN connector....................................................................................................... 21
Node address key switches ....................................................................................... 21
Serial port connector ................................................................................................. 21
APS .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
Absolute encoder on the telescope................................................................................ 22
General...................................................................................................................... 22
The RS485 component.............................................................................................. 22
From bits to millimetres (scale) ................................................................................ 23

2 REV 3
 Teach......................................................................................................................... 23
EXTERNAL EE-PROM ............................................................................................................................ 24
General...................................................................................................................... 24
Hardware................................................................................................................... 24
Software .................................................................................................................... 25
Activate the EE-prom ............................................................................................... 26

3 REV 3
 Node Hardware
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node.

I/O LED Field RS232 Display &

X2- I/O, bus bus
X1- I/O 1-48 (X5) Power
& supply X3- I/O
Connector LEDS
Connector Connector

Digital I/O
General
Here follows an example of how to build up a Can bus system with two nodes one with
one input and the other with one output.

Switch
Input

Slave (A1)

CAN network (BCAN) SCS2

B1 Master

Output
Valve

4 REV 3
The X2 connector
The three connectors X1,X2&X3 have different connection keys to avoid the possibility
of connecting them in the wrong place. It is important to choose the correct one.This is
easy to check, on the connecting side of the connector just below the mounting screw
there is a number 7, 8 or 9.
connection
The X2 key
should be
marked “8”

Front view of X2 connector

Node ID
All nodes in a system must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins
9,19,29,39,49 on the X2 connector, where pins being connected to the ground pin (10)
correspond to ”zeroes” and pins left unconnected are correspond to ”ones”. A master
node (B1) has pins 10,9,19,29,49 connected together. (Commonly used as a spreader
Node)
A slave node on the crane A1 has pins 10,19,29,39,49 connected together.
Start with making “ID” jumpers.

And connect to the X2 connectors, one as B1 and one as A1.

5 REV 3
 Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC powers the node internally. The signals are doubled in the connector
due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied in either direction. The
potential is measured between the A section and the B section.
Name Pin number in
connector
24INA X2/42 Potential 1
24INA X2/43
24INB X2/45 Potential 2
24INB X2/44

CAN
The CAN net connection is placed in the X2 connector.
All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and
CAN Low to be able to establish communication.
Name Pin number in
connector
CAN High X2/30
CAN Low X2/40

Here is a schematic with the X2 connectors of two nodes, one A1 and one B1 with node id,
CAN bus and power supply connected.

ID SUPPLY CAN BUS

+
24V Supply
-
Low
CAN Bus High

ID

9 10 19 29 30 40 42 43 44 45 49 10 19 29 30 39 40 42 43 44 45 49
B1 X2 A1 X2
Pin no.

CAN-bus

24V SUPPLY

6 REV 3
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors)
Just like the X2 connector the X1 and X3 connectors are keyed to avoid connecting them
in the wrong place. The X1 can be identified by the number “7” on the front of the
connector, and the X3 connector by the number “9”.
connection
key

Front view of X1 connector

Front view of X3 connector

I/O Groups
There are 48 digital I/O on a node. Each I/O can be configured as either an input or an
output via the software. The I/O 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups.
I/O 45 to 48 are single I/O’s. Each group has a “Common” junction. This makes it
possible to have different voltages in each group.

Name Description X1 pin

number
I/O-9 General purpose input or output 26
I/O-10 General purpose input or output 16
I/O-11 General purpose input or output 6
I/O-12 General purpose input or output 7
Common/Supply 3 Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12 8
Name Description X3 pin
number
I/O-48 General purpose input or output 30
Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48 20

7 REV 3
Common junction
This point is to be connected to live or neutral depending on if the group is used for
inputs or outputs, Inputs need neutral and outputs need live as showed below. Inputs can
be viewed upon as relay coils and outputs as switching contacts.

G roup used as Input G roup used as O utput

L/24V D C
N / 0V D C

SC S SC S
9 10 11 12 9 10
SC S 11 12

8 26 16 6 7 8 26 16 6 7

I/O M oduls

In the picture is one I/O group used as inputs on the left, and on the right the same group
is used as outputs.

Internal jumper bars

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 and the X3 connector also has groups
of pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The
following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves
with common potential.

Pin number Link Pin number Link

configuration configuration
12 17
13 18
14 19
22 27
23 28
(Only in X1) 24 29
32 37
33 39
34 38
(Only in X1) 45 (Only in X1) 36

8 REV 3
Connecting a switch

Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the switch into A1.
One of the jumper groups is fed with live and supplies the switch, the other jumper group is
connected to neutral and supplies the I/O group.

L/24V Supply
Internal jumper groups
N/0V Supply

Switch

Cablage

6 7 8 12 13 1 4 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 26 27 X1 Connector

11 12
One Input group
10 9
SCS Internal

Connecting a valve

Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the valve into B1.
One of the jumper groups is connected to Neutral and supplies the valves secondary side, the
other jumper group is connected to live and supplies the I/O group.

L/24V Supply
Internal jumper groups
N/0V Supply

Valve

Cablage

6 7 8 12 13 1 4 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 26 27 X1 Connector

One output group SCS² Internal

11 12 10 9

9 REV 3
I/O Modules
To be able to adapt the I/Os to the system voltage each I/O channel have a solid-state
interface relay (OPTO 22). This makes it possible to choose input or output and a voltage
range of 12-230 VAC/DC. Each module has a led indicating active state. On the output
modules there is a 3 Amp fuse. These modules are located inside the SCS² cover. The
cover has a lens for each channel, so the I/O status can be seen from the outside.

LED

FUSE

Application
ABE (Application Builder Environment)
System view
When ABE is started a new application is automatically started, and the default view is
the system view. The system view enables the user to select a node configuration in the
software, the application compares the hardware with the software configurations and
these have to be equal to work. You may also set system properties in this view. Some
properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.

In the system view we have to activate

the A1 node in the soft ware. The B1 is
the master and is active per default.

System properties
Menu tabs

10 REV 3
Pin configuration
Next menu tab is “pin configuration”, all present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. (1)
Make sure tab A1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 9 the following name ”switch”.
(2) Comment field is optional. (3)

Activate tab B1 in the view (1) and do the same for Port id# 9 with following name
”VALVE”. (2)

Note: The red color of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected or that any
of the letters are unaccepted. Space between words is not accepted instead use “_”.
A red field makes it impossible to compile the application.

Component view
Next menu tab is the “component view”
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette
displaying all components is available in the view.
The palette can be made visible
by pressing “components” if it is
not already visible.

Available
component
pallet

11 REV 3
Select the OD timer (On Delay timer) component from the available component pallet
(1). It’s located in the Digital tab (2).

Place the component on Page 1 in the view with the left mouse button. Then press the
right button to get the arrow back.

Right click the mouse on

the left red dot and work
your way to the input
”SWITCH” and left click.

Do the same thing on the right red dot and choose the output in this case “VALVE”

12 REV 3
Put the arrow on the component and right click, and select “properties”.

Put the delay time to two seconds (in mille seconds). The instance name is an internal
component address and should not be changed. When ready press “OK”.

Instance name

Delay time

If the application needs to be When the application is ready

saved before it is ready choose choose “Compile”. The file will
“Save”. The file will be stored as then be saved as a loadable file
a “spi” file. “spr” and is of curse editable.

13 REV 3
Load view
The last view is the “Load view”. From this view it is possible to download and up load
applications to and from a connected SCS² system. Press the “Download” button and a
dialogue box will appear, choose the desired “spr” file and press the “Open” button.

Download

Choose file
and press
open

Then ABE verifies the action in the progress bar.

First ABE sends the file to the connected node. The progress is displayed in the
connected node bar as percent.
Current transfer
completed (%)

Then the system distributes the file over the CAN-bus to the rest of the nodes (if
necessary).
When the download is ready
this dialogue box appears.
Current transfer
completed (%)

Total transfer
completed (%)

14 REV 3
 Anybus
General
Here follows an example of how to build up the same system as before with two nodes,
but the B1 node has one output and one input and on the A1 node is the input replaced
with an Anybus
interface

Outside net

Slave (A1)
with anybus
SCS2
CAN network (BCAN)

B1 Master

Input Output
Switch Valve

Connecting the B1 node

Connect the B1 node as in the Digital I/O chapter, and add a switch to Port id# 1 as in the
picture below
G roup used as Input G roup used as O utput
L /24V D C
N / 0V D C
SC S² SC S²
1 2 3 4 9 10
SC S 11 12

44 31 41 43 42 8 26 16 6 7

I/O M oduls

15 REV 3
Connecting the A1 node
Connect power supply, can bus and an ID jumper as A1 in the X2 connector.
An “Anybus card” is also to be mounted and connected inside the hood where the digital
I/Os are located.

The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus)

This card is used for translation
between different field buses and
a standardized format read by the
SCS² system.

There is a D-sub connector on the card for connecting to outside net (1), and a selector
for termination resistance (2) and two selectors used for setting hard ware identification
of the unit in the outside net (3).

Item 3. HW address
1 2 3

1 2 *10 *1

4 3
The four LEDs are used for showing the state of the communication from the
Anybus-card and the outside net.
1:not used
2:(green) on-line on the Fieldbus
3:(red) off-line on the Fieldbus
4:(red) indicate faults on the Fieldbus side as follows:
Flashing 1hz-Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization
of the module is not equal to the length set during configuration of the network.
Flashing 2hz-Error in user parameter data: the length/contents of the user parameter
data set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length/contents set
during configuration of the network.
Flashing 4hz-Error in initialisation of the Profibus communication ASIC.

16 REV 3
 The Anybus card
is to be mounted
inside the hood on
the right upper
corner of the node

Connect an Anybus jumper

to the D-sub connector on
the Anybus card.
And connect to the outside
connector on the connection
rail beside the card.

On the connection rail the

wires from the D-sub should
be connected in the
following order from the
right 8 3 5 (for Profibus)

Fieldbus connector used for

connecting to the outside
interface.

17 REV 3
 Application with a Anybus interface
ABE
Open the application used in the digital chapter. Get in to the ”pin configuration” view
and remove the switch from A1, add a new “switch” to B1 in Port id# 1
Then get in to the “component view” and set the cursor on the OD timers input connector
(on the left) and press Disconnect, the connection point turns red if a connection is
acquired for the component to function.

Get an “Input bit”(1) from the “available component”

menu under the “Anybus” tab (2) and place it out in front
of the “OD timer” and also take an “or” gate from “gates” 1 2
and a “split” from “digital”.

Connect the switch to the “split”, the “input bit” and the “split” to the “or” and the “or” to
the “OD timer”. Yore connection should now be as below.

Choose an “Output bit” and connect it to the “split”

Note: A red dot on any of the components

makes it impossible to compile the application.

18 REV 3
Right click on in/output bits and choose properties. In the properties menu it is possible to
configure following.
“Note” is a free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port.
“Bit number” is the bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface. (0-7)
“Byte number” is the start byte in the Anybus interface. (0-63)
“Node” is where the any bus card is located (in this case A1)

Note: The size of the data areas is decided of the highest byte in the application, in both
directions separately. The two sizes have to be equal on both sides of the Anybus card
(outside master/any bus) to be able to establish contact. If the outside areas is bigger than
in the application is it possible to put an empty byte to make the areas match.

19 REV 3
 Anybus gateway
General
Compared to a conventional SCS² node the Anybus gateway does not have any digital or
analogue I/O’s, no internal battery backing up the event log (locally
The anybus gateway is used in cases where a physical I/O is not needed; one example is
when the SCS² system is connected as a slave unit (via a anybus card in the crane node)
on the crane PLC.

Status LEDs

Anybus card Power connector

(in this case
Profibus) BCAN connector

Node address key

switches
Serial port
connector

20 REV 3
BCAN - Status LEDs
There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status
and one red LED indicating error status.
Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and
flashing when the communication interface is not working as intended.
Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when
configured and operating normally. (Between the node and the anybus card)
Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.

Power connector
The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2- NAME DESCRIPTION PIN NUMBER
pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).
VCC 10 to 28 V DC 1
24Volt DC powers the node internally.
GND Ground 2
BCAN connector
The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3-
NAME DESCRIPTION PIN NUMBER
pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81). All nodes in
the system have to be connected equal (bus CAN H CAN high 1
topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be CAN L CAN low 2
able to establish communication.

Node address key switches

There are five switches selecting node address. The node
identity is defined by using the same bit pattern as the A1
conventional nodes.

For example to configure a gateway node as an A1 (crane)

node: set DIPswitch 1 to ON and DIP switch 2-5 to OFF.
Or to configure a gateway node as an A2 (crane) node: set
DIPswitch 2 to ON and DIP switch 1,3,4 and 5 to OFF.
A2

Serial port connector

The serial port connector is used when connecting the SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a
computer serial port. (Corresponds to X5 on the conventional SCS² nodes)
Use a 9-pol D-sub extension lead to connect.

21 REV 3
 APS
Absolute encoder on the telescope
General
The absolute encoder should be connected to the RS485 port. (Channel A at X2/38 and
channel B at X2/37) In the ABE component pallet under the “analogue” tab, the RS485
port component is located. It is also possible to rescale the information from the sensor to
be able to work or monitor the actual measurements (in for instance mm), the tool for this
is the “scale” component. The “scale” component is also located under the “analogue”
tab.
Teach is used Add the RS485 port component
for storing from the analogue tab
positions
The scale component
makes it possible to
translate the sensor
value to the
mechanical distance

The RS485 component

This component is used to access the RS485 interface. The component is made to handle
some different types of protocol in this case “slin”.
The parameters:

Node: each node has one RS485 input. To direct the

component in the software to the correct hardware input,
choose node corresponding to what node the sensor is
wired to.

Protocol: it is possible to choose

between some different standardised
protocols to suit the sensor used.

When using the SSI protocol some more information is needed. (See sensor/manufacture
for data)
Code type: determines how the sensor value (bit pattern) shall be read when converting
to a decimal value (made internally in the component). Gray or Binary.
Input resolution: how many steps (bits) per revolution.
Max revolutions: how many revolutions that are supported by the sensor.

22 REV 3
From bits to millimetres (scale)
Retract the spreader to the mechanical end stop, measure the distance between the single
twistlocks, note the value down, read the sensor value with the ABE online and make a
note of this. Expand the spreader to the mechanical end stop and repeat the same
procedure.
Note: It is very important that the sensor doesn’t wraparound (when counting up, after
the highest value it starts at zero again), the retracted value should be low and the
expanded value should be larger.

Right click on the scale component and choose “properties”

And fill in the noted values as following.
The measured max
value in millimeters
The measured min
value in millimeters
The up loaded max value
from the ABE online
The up loaded min value
from the ABE online

Then verify the scale, put the spreader in some different positions measure and compare
with the scaled value.

Teach
To be able to store positions the APS component is equipped with a storing function
called “TEACH”. By giving the teach command and expand or retract command it is
possible to move the spreader in a lesser speed (defied by the parameter “PWM value for
teach” in APS properties) to the required length, for position “20ft”, hold the teach
command and give the go to position “20ft” command. The value is now stored in the
spreader memory (NV RAM). Repeat this procedure on all the required positions.
The connection point for teach

The connection points for position

direct commands
The connection points for expand/
retract commands

Note: If the scale is made correctly it is possible to verify the spreader length by
activating the teach command, when the teach function is active the sensor value input on
the APS is displayed on the B1 display. Beware of if a "position direct command" is
given at the same time that position is destroyed.

23 REV 3
External EE-prom
General
In the external EE-prom it is possible to store information as spreader ID, twistlock
counters, running time etc. this makes it possible to replace the node(s) in the system
without loosing this information.

Hardware
The EE-prom is to be connected in to the node as following.
Name Pin number in Cable
connector
10V supply X2/36 Red
Serial data X2/16 Blue
Serial clock X2/26 Green
Signal ground X2/6 Black

The EE-prom is located in a gland. The gland should be mounted solid near by the SCS²
node within the cable range.

24 REV 3
Software
A “spreader properties” component needs to be added in the application, that make the
system try to find the “EE-prom” at boot.
The “spreader properties” component (1) is located in the “misc…” tab (2) in the
“available component” menu.

4
3
2 1

The “spreader properties” contains twistlock counters and a time counter etc. To make
the counters work some info is needed, connect the available signals corresponding to the
connection points on the left of the component (3).
The information is possible to send out as analogue words true the bus to the outside net
(if present), the connection points for these values is located on the right of the
component (4).

25 REV 3
Activate the EE-prom
The EE-prom is activated after the “Serial number” value is set.
The BMS have to be connected to the node that the EE-prom is connected to.
Left click on the “Serial number” key in the BMS “spreader info” tab.
In the “current key” dialogue box down in the left corner there should now be seen “serial
number”.
Put the spreader serial number in the value bar and press the “set” button to store and
activate the EE-prom. It now displays the different values.

The “Spreader info” tag

The “get all” button

The information from the EE-prom is possible to upload with the BMS from the
“spreader info” tag. Connect the BMS to the system and press the “get all” button.

26 REV 3
 Spreader Control System
2:nd generation
2
SCS Anybus Gateway

Rev 1.0 03-11-18

 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 2(40)

1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
1.3 DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................ 3
2 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.2 THE NODES .............................................................................................................................................................. 5
3 SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................................................................ 6
3.1 BOOT PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.2 SYSTEM PROGRAM ................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.3 SPREADER PROGRAM ............................................................................................................................................... 6
4 HARDWARE OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 STATUS LEDS .......................................................................................................................................................... 7
4.2 POWER CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 7
4.3 BCAN CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 8
4.4 NODE ADDRESS KEY SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................ 8
4.5 SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................................................ 8
4.6 GROUND CONNECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 8
4.7 ANYBUS PROFIBUS SLAVE CARD .............................................................................................................................. 8
4.8 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS. ....................................................................................................................................... 8
4.8.1 Mapping of I/O .............................................................................................................................................. 9
4.9 FAULT FINDING TABLE........................................................................................................................................... 10
5 SOFTWARE TOOLS ............................................................................................................................................... 11
5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
5.2 ABE....................................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.3 BMS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11
6 MISCELLANEOUS .................................................................................................................................................. 12
6.1 DATA SHEET........................................................................................................................................................... 12
6.2 DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... 13
7 APPENDIX A (ERROR MESSAGES) .................................................................................................................... 14

Manual 2  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 3(40)

1 General

1.1 Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the surveillance and maintenance operators of the Bromma
SCS2 Anybus Gateway. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.

1.2 References
Location where to find the latest revision of this document: http://www.bromma.com/backyard/

1.3 Dictionary and abbreviations

ABE Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic.
BMS Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2.
Boot program The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
CAN Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
PWM Pulse Width Modulator.
Spreader Program The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
SCS2 Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
System Program The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
Anybus Gateway A node that can be used in the Spreader Control System generation 2.

1.4 Document layout

Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.
Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning.

Manual 3  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 4(40)

2 Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.

SCS2 includes the following features:

• A bus system able to handle 528 I/O ports (programmable input or output).
• Two analogue inputs with 12 bit resolution.
• Four PWM outputs for proportional solenoids.
• One general purpose RS485 channel.
• Communication with the help of a standard spreader cable — no screening, no twisted pair.
• A system that withstands the repeated shocks and vibrations suffered by spreaders.
• A system able to operate in tropical heat and arctic cold.
• Choice of different field bus interfaces (ProfiBus, Interbus-S, Device Net….)

2.1 General

As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:

Crane Node A device directly interfacing with the crane’s control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.

Crane-Spreader Communications Link A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane
control system and the spreader.

Spreader Node A device that interfaces directly with the spreader’s sensors, supports discrete
signals, and acts as the Master node.

Sensors and Switches Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.

Manual 4  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 5(40)

The system is divided into several hardware blocks called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the
number of I/O needed. The nodes are all equals, both in software as well as in hardware. This reduces spare parts and
enables easy-to-change procedures.

The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:

0 is the master called B1

1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.

Crane
I/O
Slave A1 ... Slave A4

2
CAN network (BCAN) SCS

I/O B1 Master B2 Slave ... B8 Slave

Spreader

Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.

2.2 The Nodes

The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master.

Manual 5  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 6(40)

3 Software
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.

3.1 Boot Program

When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.

The Boot program is responsible for

• Initialising hardware
• Checking that all the system Programs match.
• Checking that the emergency stop and redundancy settings are correct
• Performing a program download, if a BMS requesting program settings is connected to any node

3.2 System program

After the Boot program is finished, the System program will run, until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
• Interpreting the Spreader program (only on Master node)
• Supporting any connected BMS via the BMS port
• Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
• Logging events in the event log
• Reading input signals and writing output signals

3.3 Spreader Program

The Spreader Program is the program logic that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see chapter 5.2 for
a brief description.

4 Hardware Overview
Below is a figure of a SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. The different parts are explained
in the following chapter.

Manual 6  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 7(40)

Profibus card
status LEDS
Status LEDs

Profibus card Power connector

address
selectors BCAN connector

Profibus card
terminator Node address key
switch switches

Profibus card Serial port connector

Profibus
connector

Figure 2. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card.

4.1 Status LEDs

There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status and one red LED indicating error
status.
‰ Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
‰ BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and flashing when the
communication interface is not working as inteded.
‰ Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface isn’t configured and lit when configured and operating
normaly.
‰ Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.

4.2 Power connector

The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2-pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).

Name Description Pin number

Manual 7  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 8(40)

Name Description Pin number

VCC 10 to 28 V DC 1
GND Ground 2

4.3 BCAN connector

The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3-pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81).

Name Description Pin number

CAN H CAN high 1
CAN L CAN low 2
CAN GND CAN ground, not required by BCAN 3

4.4 Node address key switches

There are five switches selecting node address.

4.5 Serial port connector

The serial port connector is a standard DSUB 9-PIN female connector. A pin-to-pin cable is needed when connecting the
SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a computer serial port.

Name Description Pin number

Tx Transmitted data RS-232 2
Rx Received data RS-232 3
Signal GND Ground 5
CTS Clear to send RS-232 7
RTS Request to send RS-232 8
Not connected Not connected 1, 4, 6, 9

4.6 Ground connection

2
The SCS Anybus Gateway chassis must be properly connected to protective earth, for example by mounting the unit on a
grounded DIN rail.

4.7 Anybus Profibus slave card

The Anybus Profibus slave card has one Profibus connector, a terminator on/off switch, two address selectors and four
status LEDs. See 4.8 for more information on Anybus cards.

4.8 Field bus Connections.

Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the AnyBus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different

Manual 8  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 9(40)

buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.

The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.

4.8.1 Mapping of I/O

OUT IN
Byte 0-63 Byte 0-63
Project Project
specific specific
outputs inputs

Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.

4.8.1.1 Spreader diagnostic area.

Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)

4.8.1.2 System diagnostic area.

This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the

Manual 9  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 10(40)

customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
Byte 8 => Node ID
Byte 9-10 => Row Number (of source code)
Byte 11-16 => Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 17-18 => sequential counter

The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

4.9 Fault Finding table

Symptom What to do Comment

Power Supply
The node won’t start. The power LED Measure the main supply. The voltage The power LED should be on.
is off. should exceed 10V DC.

RS-232
BMS system can not communicate Probe TxD and RxD lines with Data lines should show square waves
with the node. oscilloscope while trying to between –10V to +10V relative to
communicate. GND pin.

CAN
The node can not communicate with Probe bus lines with oscilloscope. Check that CAN high and CAN low
the other nodes. CAN high should show square waves are not mixed up.
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.

Node ID
The unit stops at start-up. Check selected node ID. This can indicate that the node has
wrong id strapped telling the node to
participate in the system with wrong
role.

Manual 10  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 11(40)

5 Software tools

5.1 Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.

5.2 ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.

5.3 BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.

Manual 11  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 12(40)

6 Miscellaneous

6.1 Data sheet

Parameter Note Min Max Unit

Operating voltage Power connector 10 28 V DC

Current consumption Operating voltage 24 V DC 50 200 mA
0
Temperature Operating temperature (1) TBD TBD C
EMC conformity In accordance with 89/336/EEC:
EN 61000-6-4:2001 (Emission requirements)
EN 55011 (Radiated emission)
EN 61000-6-2:2001 (Immunity requirements)
EN 61000-4-2 (Immunity: ESD)
EN 61000-4-3 (Immunity: RF electromagnetic field)
EN 61000-4-4 (Immunity: Fast transients)
EN 61000-4-5 (Immunity: Surge) (2)
Controller 32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz
Memory Program 1.4Mb
Log 128kb
Scan time System scan time 50 ms
Node scan time 5 ms
Serial interfaces BCAN – Bromma CAN based bus
RS232 – For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
Diagnostics System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
Event and error log
FB programming Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions
Note 1) To be decided
Note 2) For compliance with EN 61000-6-2 the power cable and the serial port cable have to be limited to 10 meters in
length

Manual 12  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 13(40)

6.2 Dimensions

Figure 3. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. All dimensions are in mm.

Manual 13  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 14(40)

7 Appendix A (Error messages)

The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). It is the same information in both interfaces and is explained in this appendix in the table below.

Nu level Description of code Description of subcode Consequence Hints

m.l
cod
e
0
1 WARNING Failed reading temperature .
2 spare 0 .
3 spare 1 .
4 spare 2 .
5 spare 3 .
6 ERROR Two different PCs' trying to Id of one of the node System is brought into Ensure that only
download to the system connected to the PC failsafe mode. one PC is
downloading
7 spare 4 .
8 spare 5 .
9 spare 6 .
10 spare 7 .
11 spare 8 .
12 ERROR Program memory failure, HW . System is brought into failsafe mode.
fault
13 ERROR No response from slave when . System is brought into Ensure that all
initialising system failsafe mode. slave are
powered up &
correctly
addressed
14 ERROR Boot sequence failed . System is brought into Restart system
failsafe mode.
15 spare 9 .
16 spare 10 .
17 spare 11 .
18 spare 12 .
19 spare 13 .

Manual 14  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 15(40)

20 ERROR Downloading error, connection . System is brought into reload program

broken failsafe mode.
21 spare 14 .
22 ERROR Memory collides when . System is brought into recompile and
downloading program failsafe mode. download
program again
23 spare 15 .
24 spare 16 .
25 spare 17 .
26 spare 18 .
27 spare 19 .
28 WARNING No data in program/system . System cannot start Contact Bromma
memory
29 spare 20 .
30 WARNING Checksum of memory corrupt .
31 ERROR HW fault on memory . System is brought into Contact Bromma
failsafe mode. if problem
persists
32 spare 21 .
33 spare 22 .
34 ERROR System init. Display. This error The error codes during the system boot phase that have caused the
code accumalates and displays system to go into failsafe mode
the errors ocurred during the
system boot, since no reporting
is done until the system has
started.
35 ERROR System failed in reading . System is brought into reload and
spreader program from memory failsafe mode. restart
36 ERROR No spreader program residing in . System is brought into download
memory failsafe mode. program
37 ERROR System failed to run spreader . System is brought into reload proram
program failsafe mode.
38 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

Manual 15  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 16(40)

39 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader

instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
40 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
41 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader.
instances failed failsafe mode. If problems
persist contact
Bromma
42 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
43 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
44 WARNING I/O message lost .
45 ERROR Memory failure . System is brought into Restart system.
failsafe mode. If problems
persist contact
Bromma
46 spare 23 .
47 spare 24 .
48 spare 25 .
49 spare 26 .
50 ERROR Failed to configure I/O on node The node ID which has System is brought into restart
generated the error failsafe mode.
51 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system

52 ERROR System initialising error when The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuring nodes I/O generated the error failsafe mode.
53 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system

54 spare 27

Manual 16  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 17(40)

55 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system

56 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check

requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
57 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check
requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
58 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check
requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
59 INFO System started .
60 WARNING TWL - No twistlock sensor . Message stored in log and check wiring,
inputs active during system start displayed on Spreader sensors and
connectors or
mechanical
reasons
61 WARNING TWL - One twistlock indicating ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
both locked and unlocked which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
62 WARNING TWL - timeout locking. Locked ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
signal has not been received which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or
after output to valve warning wiring or
mechanical
reasons
63 WARNING TWL - Locked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
without command/output when warning and sensor
twistlocks are all locked adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
64 WARNING TWL - timeout unlocking. ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
Unlocked signal has not been which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or
received after output to valve warning wiring or
mechanical
reasons

Manual 17  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 18(40)

65 WARNING TWL - Unocked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
without command/output when warning and sensor
twistlocks are all unlocked adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
66 WARNING TWL - all landed sensors not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
received after first landed and which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
timeout. warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
67 WARNING TWL - landed sensor not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
released when the other sensors which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
not active and a timer has timed warning and sensor
out adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
68 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. No . Stops the telescope and check for
valid sensor found within displays/stores message damaged sensors
timeout limit after output has and sensor
been activated adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
69 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. ID no. of the sensor Stops the telescope and check for
Wrong sensor in telescoping missing which displays/stores message damaged sensors
sequence reached generated the warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
70 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID no. of the lost Message stored in log and displayed on
position sensor is lost without an sensor Spreader
output.

71 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. Two ID no.s. of the sensors Message stored in log and check for
different position sensors displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
indicating simultaneously and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
72 ERROR Duplicate answers from one The node ID which has System is brought into restart (check
node during boot verification generated the error failsafe mode. address keying)
73 ERROR Wrong boot version in a node The node ID which has System is brought into contact Bromma
generated the error failsafe mode.

Manual 18  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 19(40)

74 ERROR No answer when master The node ID which has System is brought into restart
requesting boot version. generated the error failsafe mode.
75 spare 28
76 spare 29
77 spare 30
78 spare 31 .
79 spare 32 .
80 ERROR Wrong node answered request The node ID which has System is brought into restart
from master to check if pc was generated the error failsafe mode.
connected
81 ERROR No answer after master request The node ID which has System is brought into restart, check
to check PC port (RS232) generated the error failsafe mode. connections
82 ERROR Unable to download program . System is brought into retry
failsafe mode.
83 ERROR Unable to download program . System is brought into Check spreader
(checksum failure) failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
84 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time .
couldn't be read
85 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time .
couldn't be set
86 INFO minimum system CPU cycle time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
time. Periodically reported every Spreader
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
87 INFO maximum system CPU cycle time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
time. Periodically reported every Spreader
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
88 INFO average system CPU cycle time. time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
Periodically reported every half Spreader
hour. The counter is reset after
reporting.
89 spare 33 .
90 INFO The number of control loops The number of the Message stored in log and displayed on
exceeding 100ms for th last half counter Spreader
hour. The counter is reset after
reporting
91 spare 34 .

Manual 19  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 20(40)

92 spare 35 .
93 spare 36 .
94 ERROR No operative system in Node . Systems fails to start contact Bromma
95 ERROR Duplicate answer on The node ID which has System is brought into check adress key
determining Spreader stop set up generated the error failsafe mode.
96 ERROR No answer on Master request for . System is brought into check adress key
"Spreader stop" configuration failsafe mode.
97 INFO Spreader stop has been 0= activated Message stored in log and displayed on
activated/deactivated 1=deactivated Spreader

98 spare 37 .
99 spare 38 .
100 ERROR Spreader program fault . System is brought into
recompile and
failsafe mode. reload spreader
program
101 WARNING CAN message buffer is full The first message type Message stored in log and displayed on
in the buffer Spreader

102 ERROR System failed to initialise HW . System shutdown contact Bromma

103 spare 39 .
104 spare 40 .
105 ERROR Onboard NV RAM failed . System is brought into check
memory test failsafe mode. battery/restart/co
ntact Bromma

106 spare 41 .
107 WARNING 10V reference voltage too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

108 WARNING 12V internal supply too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

109 ERROR Battery voltage too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check battery
displayed on Spreader

Manual 20  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 21(40)

110 ERROR The System failed to lock th I/O . System is brought into restart
on a node during system init. failsafe mode.
111 spare 42
112 spare 43 .
113 spare 44 .
114 INFO System is shutting down .
115 INFO System shutdown has been .
completed
116 spare 45 .
117 spare 46 .
118 INFO Landed override has been .
activated
119 INFO Landed override has been .
deactivated
120 spare 47 .
121 spare 48 .
122 spare 49 .
123 spare 50 .
124 spare 51 .
125 spare 52 .
126 spare 53 .
127 spare 54 .
128 spare 55 .
129 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
130 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma

Manual 21  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 22(40)

131 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
132 spare 56 .
133 spare 57 .
134 spare 58 .
135 spare 59 .
136 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
137 spare 60 .
138 spare 61 .
139 spare 62 .
140 WARNING Unknown CAN message The ID type of the Message stored in log and displayed on
received message Spreader

141 INFO CAN messages missed. The count of the Message stored in log and displayed on
Cyclically reported. missed messages Spreader

142 ERROR Two nodes within the system The ID which is System is brought into check and
have the same ID/adress duplicate failsafe mode. correct the
adress key
143 WARNING 10V reference voltage is too Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
high displayed on Spreader

144 WARNING 12V internal voltage is too high Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

Manual 22  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 23(40)

145 WARNING Battery voltage is too high Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

146 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

147 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

148 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

149 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

150 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

151 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

152 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

153 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Manual 23  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 24(40)

154 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the spreader program.

155 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the spreader program.

156 spare 63 .
157 spare 64 .
158 spare 65 .
159 spare 66 .
160 spare 67 .
161 WARNING CAN error . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

162 WARNING RS232 error . Message stored in log and displayed on

Spreader

163 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V

164 ERROR Power monitor P1 = sensor . System is taken down check supplies
supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

165 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V

Manual 24  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 25(40)

166 ERROR Power monitor P2 = internal . System is taken down check supplies
logic supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

167 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V

168 ERROR Power monitor P3 = PWM . System is taken down check supplies
supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

169 WARNING System failed to read/write to a ID of port: Message stored in log and check supplies
I/O port Digital=0+port_no, displayed on Spreader
Analogue=100+port_n
o, PWM=200+port_no,
encoder=300+port_no.

170 spare 68 .
171 spare 69 .
172 spare 70 .
173 spare 71 .
174 ERROR No answer when on general . Message stored in log and displayed on
information request between Spreader
nodes.

175 INFO TWL - twistlock lock command . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader

176 INFO TWL - twistlock unlock . Message stored in log and displayed on
command received Spreader

Manual 25  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 26(40)

177 INFO TWL - twistlock has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
locked Spreader

178 INFO TWL - twistlock has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
unlocked Spreader

179 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Expand command received Spreader

180 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Retract command received Spreader

181 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
Command to go to a speceific requested Spreader
position has been received

182 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. The The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
desired position has been requested Spreader
reached

183 WARNING TELESCOPE - automatic type. 0 = Desired position The telescopic motion is check sensor,
The telescope hasn't reached its' not reached within time stopped until a new pressure,mechan
position within time limit limit. command is given. ics. If necessary
1 = telescope has not Message stored in log and calibrate system.
moved more than 1 cm displayed on Spreader
during 3 seconds.

184 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
expand command received Spreader

185 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Retract command received Spreader

186 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
Command to go to a specific requested Spreader
position received

Manual 26  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 27(40)

187 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
The desired position reached requested Spreader

188 INFO The year has been set current value (year) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

189 INFO The month has been set current value (month) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

190 INFO The day/date has been set current value (date) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

191 INFO The time of day (hour) has been current value (hour) Message stored in log and displayed on
set Spreader

192 WARNING Nocontact with the master for The ID of the node Message stored in log and check
10s which doesn't have displayed on Spreader connections
contact

193 ERROR Message reported during boot. . restart (check

Unknown role address keying)
194 INFO Information request (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader

195 INFO Download request active . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

196 INFO Information request received . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

197 INFO set time request received . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

198 INFO Boot version request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

Manual 27  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 28(40)

199 spare 72 .
200 INFO Download flag request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

201 spare 73 .
202 spare 74 .
203 spare 75 .
204 spare 76 .
205 INFO Check flash memory request . Message stored in log and displayed on
received. (system boot Spreader
functionality)

206 INFO Restart node request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

207 INFO System start init. (system boot . Message stored in log and displayed on
functionality) Spreader

208 INFO System look for downloadflag. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

209 INFO Send datablock request. (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader

210 INFO Received datablock. (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader

211 INFO Download in progress percentage of progress shown on Spreader display

downloaded data
212 INFO copy serial information to flash . Message stored in log and displayed on
memory Spreader

213 spare 77 .
214 spare 78 .

Manual 28  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 29(40)

215 ERROR No answer when waiting for . System is brought into failsafe mode.
present nodes response
216 INFO Inforamtion on present nodes . Message stored in log and displayed on
has been received Spreader

217 ERROR Download timeout . System is brought into reload

failsafe mode.
218 spare 79 .
219 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
220 ERROR The size of received data is to . System is brought into failsafe mode.
large. Boot message
221 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
222 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
223 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
224 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
225 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
226 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
227 spare 80 .
228 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
229 INFO Spreader error and event log has . Message stored in log and displayed on
been cleared Spreader

Manual 29  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 30(40)

230 ERROR Failed to set up spreader destination of error System is brought into Check spreader
program correctly failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
231 ERROR Spreader program download . System is brought into Check spreader
error failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
232 ERROR Spreader program download . System is brought into Check spreader
error failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
233 INFO Power monitor P1 = sensor . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader

234 INFO Power monitor P2 = internal . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader

235 INFO Power monitor P3 = PWM . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader

236 INFO Reboot (restart) request sent . Message stored in log and displayed on
from master to slaves. Happens Spreader
when slaves are powered on
before master at system start
237 INFO System has been taken down to . Message stored in log and displayed on
idle mode. Ie waiting to wake Spreader
up.

238 Spare 81 .
239 INFO System failed to cancel . Message stored in log and displayed on
shutdown process Spreader

240 INFO No answer when attempting to . Message stored in log and displayed on
cancel shutdown process Spreader

241 INFO System received timeout when . Message stored in log and displayed on
attempting to cancel shutdown Spreader
process

Manual 30  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 31(40)

242 INFO System shutdown aborted . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

243 spare 82 .
244 INFO TWL - The spreader has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
landed Spreader

245 INFO TWL - The Spreader has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
totally lifted (not landed) Spreader

246 INFO FLIPPER - flipper up command . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader

247 INFO FLIPPER - flipper down . Message stored in log and displayed on
command received Spreader

248 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 17V

249 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage <17V

250 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 17V

251 ERROR System failed to initialise fielbus . System is brought into failsafe mode.
interface
252 ERROR Duplicate answers when setting . System is brought into failsafe mode.
up fieldbus interface
253 ERROR No answer when configuring . System is brought into failsafe mode.
fieldbus interface

Manual 31  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 32(40)

254 WARNING System failed in locking .

fieldbus interface
255 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
failed to get to their upper failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
position within time limit nics/sensors

256 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' upper position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
within time limit nics/sensors

257 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' upper position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
within time limit nics/sensors

258 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes left . Twin down sequence check
timed out when expanding to stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
their attach position. Failed to Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors
reach switch within time limit position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader

259 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes right . Twin down sequence check
timed out when expanding to stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
their attach position. Failed to Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors
reach switch within time limit position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader

260 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' lower position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
(connect) within time limit nics/sensors

261 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' lower position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
(connect) within time limit nics/sensors

262 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
failed to get to their lower failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
position within time limit nics/sensors

263 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor lost ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
unexpectedly. (not due to failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
output) nics/sensors

Manual 32  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 33(40)

264 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
received when twinboxes are failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
down nics/sensors

265 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook down . Message stored in log and check
sensor lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

266 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook down . Message stored in log and check
sensor lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

267 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook up sensor . Message stored in log and check
lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

268 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook up sensor . Message stored in log and check
lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

269 ERROR System failed to init. RS485 Node ID System is brought into restart / contact
failsafe mode. Bromma
270 ERROR Duplicate answers in system Node ID System is brought into restart / contact
when setting up RS485 failsafe mode. Bromma
271 ERROR System timed out when trying to . System is brought into restart / contact
configure RS485 failsafe mode. Bromma
272 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Teach in command received Spreader

273 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - expand . Message stored in log and displayed on

command received Spreader

274 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - retract . Message stored in log and displayed on

command received Spreader

275 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - left . Message stored in log and displayed on

console reached zero gap Spreader
position

Manual 33  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 34(40)

276 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - right . Message stored in log and displayed on

console reached zero gap Spreader
position

277 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs . Message stored in log and displayed on

expand in motion Spreader

278 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs . Message stored in log and displayed on

retract in motion Spreader

279 WARNING TWINTELESCOPE - hasn't . motion is stopped. check

reached an endstop when in Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
motion within time limit displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves

280 spare 83 .
281 INFO TWINMPS - teaching a pre- The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
defined position teached Spreader

282 INFO TWINMPS - command to go to The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
a pre-defined position has been requested Spreader
received

283 INFO TWINMPS - A command to . Message stored in log and displayed on

store a new value for a log Spreader
position has been received

284 INFO TWINMPS - A command to The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
return to a log position has been requested Spreader
received

285 WARNING TWINMPS - the twinlegs . Motion is stopped. check

haven't reached their requested Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
position within time limit. displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves

286 INFO TWIN195 - twin up command . Message stored in log and displayed on
has been received Spreader

Manual 34  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 35(40)

287 INFO TWIN195 - twin down . Message stored in log and displayed on
command has been received Spreader

288 INFO TWIN195 - twin boxes have . Message stored in log and displayed on
reached their upper position Spreader

289 INFO TWIN195 - twin boxes have . Message stored in log and displayed on
reached their lower position Spreader

290 INFO TTDS - override request . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader

291 INFO TTDS - override request ended . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

292 WARNING Buffer full transferring serial . Message stored in log and displayed on
port info over CAN bus Spreader

293 WARNING No answer when transferring . Message stored in log and displayed on
serial port info over Can bus Spreader

294 ERROR Failed to communicate with . System is brought

RS485 into failsafe mode.

295 spare 84 .
296 spare 85 .
297 spare 86 .
298 ERROR Failed reading spreader System is brought into Check spreader
program. failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
299 spare 87
300 spare 88

Manual 35  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 36(40)

301 WARNING RS485 not functioning as Depending on type of Message stored in log and displayed on
intended sensor/device Spreader

302 WARNING AnyBus not functioning as Depending on type of Message stored in log and displayed on
intended sensor/device Spreader

303 WARNING Error in locking AnyBus setup Node ID

304 WARNING Timeout when trying to lock
AnyBus setup
305 WARNING Wrong node answered when locking AnyBus setup

306 INFO Spreader properties Number of containers Message stored in log and
loaded/unloaded displayed on Spreader
307 WARNING AnyBus external bus failure Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
308 WARNING AnyBus Status ok Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
309 WARNING AnyBus external bus ok Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
310 WARNING Wrong node answered when EEPROM setup

311 ERROR Timeout when expecting answer from node on EEPROM

312 WARNING Spreader properties

313 WARNING Spreader properties
314 WARNING Spreader properties
315 WARNING Spreader properties
316 WARNING Spreader properties
317 WARNING Spreader properties
318 WARNING Read EEPROM failure
319 WARNING Read NVRAM failure
320 WARNING EEPROM checksum failure
321 INFO Spreader properties EEPROM
set ok
322 WARNING EEPROM set failure
323 INFO Spreader properties EEPROM attached to new node

Manual 36  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 37(40)

324 INFO RS485 status ok

325 INFO Gravity point to centre
command
326 INFO Gravity point to left side
command
327 INFO Gravity point to right side
command
328 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
centre position
329 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
left end stop
330 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
right endstop
331 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor wrap .
around warning. Sensor too near
the value where it wraps around
and begins from zero again.

332 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor has .

wrapped around. The value has
gone from maximum to
minimum in one CPU cycle.
333 INFO Added value to NVRAM .
successfully
334 WARNING Spreader stop configuration node that reported the problem
mismatch
335 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding digital I/O
336 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding analogue I/O
337 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding encoder data
338 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding AnyBus message
339 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding RS485 data
340 WARNING No contact with the node for 3s. node from which an answer is expected
specified by the Sub code

Manual 37  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 38(40)

341 ERROR Error when trying to dowload .

program
342 ERROR Node is missing on the bus node that is missing
during system start.
343 ERROR Inclination sensor initialisation node that failed to initialise the sensor
error
344 ERROR Timeout when trying to node that failed to initialise the sensor
intitialise the inclination sensor
345 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding inclination sensor
346 INFO Node bus communication ok. .
BCAN ok
347 INFO BCAN bus status warning. .
348 WARNING BCAN bus communication off. .
349 ERROR AnyBus Spreader/systems node from which an answer is expected
diagnostic area failed to set up.
350 ERROR Timeout when trying to set up
AnyBus Spreader/system
diagnostic area
351 ERROR AnyBus Assert diagnostic area node from which an answer is expected
failed to set up
352 ERROR Timeout when trying to set up
AnyBus Assert diagnostic area.
353 INFO Present nodes shown in subcode bitwise OR for all included nodes. 12bit Value

354 INFO AnyBus slave card plugged in

node ID holding the
card
355 INFO AnyBus Master card plugged in node ID holding the
card
356 WARNING AnyBus card missing node ID of the node missing the card

357 INFO AnyBus Input data area size size of data area (bytes)
358 INFO AnyBus output data area size size of data area (bytes)
359 ERROR Hardware initialisation failed psu_mon.=1, temp_sens.=2, realtime_clock=3
(system prog.)

360 ERROR NVRAM full. No space left for .

Manual 38  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 39(40)

Storage
361 ERROR NVRAM checksum Error .
362 ERROR OS code. Operating system fatal code from OS call Bromma
error
363 ERROR OS subcode.Operating system code from OS call Bromma
fatal error
364 ERROR OS extra.Operating system fatal code from OS call Bromma
error
365 ERROR Local regulator (PID) failed. node ID that failed to restart
initialise the regulator
366 ERROR Local regulator (PID) timeout . retstart
367 ERROR Error in interpreting the spreader . Check versions
program. Parameter mismatch of system and
between system and ABE file. ABE.

368 ERROR Error in recognising a . Check versions

component downloaded with the of system and
spreader program ABE.
369 WARNING Gravity point haven't reached .
the requested position within
time limit.
370 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding regulator data.
371 ERROR Error in locking regulator setup .

372 INFO The Spreader info has been set. The index of the field
which is set.

373 INFO The Spreader info has been set. The value of the field
which is set. The
logged value is in the
range 0-9999. This
range limit has nothing
to with the actual value
set in the Spreader info.
374 INFO The time of day (minute) has Current value (minute) Message stored in log and displayed on
been set Spreader

Manual 39  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2003-11-18 15:36 11 40(40)

375 INFO Received a change bitrate Requested bitrate

request. Boot message.

376 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor Message stored in log and displayed on

values from left hook Spreader

377 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor Message stored in log and displayed on

values from right hook Spreader

378 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(start sequence) handle start sequence. Spreader

379 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(download sequence) download. Spreader

380 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(finish sequence) handle finish sequence. Spreader

381 WARNING Disabeling outputs failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
disable outputs. Spreader

382 WARNING No answer when attempting to Message stored in log and displayed on
disable outputs. Spreader

383 WARNING Enabeling outputs faild. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
enabeling outputs. Spreader

384 WARNING No answer when attempting to Message stored in log and displayed on
enabeling outputs. Spreader

385 INFO AutoTuner stored in NVRAM Regulator index. Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

Manual 40  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 03-11-18 15:36
 Bromma Group Manual

6.4 Repair and Adjustments (REP)

To ensure safe and reliable spreader operation, it is impotant to
follow the instructions below and only use Bromma spare parts
when replacing components.

HAZARD! Always disconnect the power supply before work is

carried out !

The spreader shall only be operated and serviced by authorized

personnel.

Contents:

REP 01 Twistlocks
REP 02 Flipper arm /Flipper arm gearbox
REP 03 Glide plates Main Frame
REP 04 Telescopic Beam Glide plates
REP 05 Telescopic chain
REP 06 Telescopic motor
REP 07 Pedestal bearing
REP 08 Position sensors
REP 09 Digital Encoder
REP 10 Cables and hoses in cable chain
REP 11 Electric motor
REP 12 Hydraulic pump
REP 13 Oil and filters
REP 14 Deaeration of hydraulic system
REP 15 Telescopic beam units
REP 16 Twinlift units *
REP 17 Twinlift Unit Twistlocks *
For the STS45 see also additional REPs page 6.4.17 ff.
Initial Actions
Place the main frame of the spreader on trestles or similar devices
0,7m in such a way that the flipper arms can be lowered.
Also ensure there is enough space on both ends to allow the
spreader to telescope to 40 foot or 45 foot positions.

Read through the warnings and safety precautions in Chapter 1.

* Only for Twin lift spreaders

6.4-1- Oct.02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Twistlock
REP 01. Twistlocks nut
M6 screw
M6 nut
Dismounting Twistlock Pin
1.Dismout the twistlock cylinder as described on the next page.
2. Remove the M6 screw and nut from the top of the twist
lock.
3. Grab hold of twistlock head.
4. Slack off the twistlock nut. Guide
5. Lower the twistlock pin and guide block. block
6. Do not lose the twistlock pin key.

Mounting
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order. Twistlock
housing
2. Carry out the adjustment below before mounting the M6 Twistlock
screw and nut. head
3. Lubricate according to instructions in chapt. 6.
Distance between top of twistlock head
and bottom of guide block
1 -2 mm

Checking the Float

1. Grab hold of the twistlock head.
2. Push or pull the twistlock to one of the corners.
3. Ensure the guide block is touching the twistlock
housing bottom plate. If not, the twistlock needs to be
adjusted /lowered.
4. If the twistlock is touching the bottom plate, press the
twistlock upwards while holding it in the corner. Twistlock
5. The twistlock should be moving up slightly. If it nut
moves a lot, adjust it higher.
6. If the twistlock does not move at all, it needs to be adjusted Spherical
down. washer

Key
Adjusting
1. Remove the M6 screw from the top of the twistlock.
2. To lower the twistlock, loosen the twistlock nut
Twistlock
slightly. To raise the twistlock, tighten the nut. pin
The distance between the top of twistlock head and the
bottom of guide block 1 -2 mm
3. Recheck the float of the twistlock.
4. Reinstall the M6 screw.

Failure to properly adjust the twistlock will greatly reduce the

life of the twistlock.

Bromma Conquip 6.4-2-Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Removing the Twistlock Cylinder

1. Make sure the power supply is disconnected and the oil
pressure is relieved from the system.
2. Remove the hoses from the cylinder. To avoid oil leakage,
Split pin thread a plastic bag over the end of the hoses and secure
them with straps.
Spacer
3. Pull out the split pins. Remove the spacer rings and the
ring cylinder.

Installing the Twistlock Cylinder

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
2. The hoses must be tightened to 95 Nm (70 ft-lbs) torque.
3. Perform the REP 14 De-aeration of the hydraulic system.

Cylinder

Removing Sensors
1. Unscrew the cable connection from the sensor.
2. Loosen the two screws on the switch attachment.
3. Remove the sensor.

Installing Sensors
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order, using blue
Loctite to the cable connection.
2. The distance between sensor face and flag is approximately
5-6 mm. Check the sensor by grabbing the twistlock head and
moving it around in different positions. If the signal is lost,
Signal cable
Sensor
adjust the sensor closer to its flag. Make sure the flag does
connection
not come in contact with the sensor.

6.4-3- Oct.02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 02. Flipper Arm / Flipper Arm Gearbox

Removing the Flipper Arm

1. Power the flipper arms to the up position.
2. Disconnect the power supply.
3. Secure the flipper arm in the up position with a rope.
4. Loosen the screws and remove the attachments.
5. Do not lose the flipper keys.

Installing the Flipper Arm

1. Mount the keys onto the shaft.
2. Mount the flipper arm with the screws and attachments.
3. Ensure that the spaces between the attachments and the
flipper arm gearbox are equal on both sides.
4. Tighten the screws to 250 Nm (184 ft-lbs).
5. Reconnect the power and test the flipper.
6. Retighten the screws after 200 times test.

Removing the Gearbox

1. Remove the flipper arm according to the procedure above.
2. Loosen the screws holding the hydraulic motor. ( 3 long and
one short) and the cover on the opposite side. If the
hydraulic motor is not being replaced, the hoses can remain
connected.
3. If the hydraulic motor is to be replaced, the hoses must be
disconnected. In order to avoid oil leakage, place an end
cap or a plastig bag over the ends of the hoses and secure
the bag with straps.
4. Loosen the four M20 screws and make sure the washers,
spacers and nuts are not lost.
5. Remove the bolts holding the gearbox. Flipper arm attachments
6. Remove the bearing covers on both sides.
7. Place the gearbox in a hydraulic press and push out the shaft.
8. Remove bearings and make sure the keys are not lost.

Installing the Gearbox

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
2. All screws and hoses must be tightened to their appropriate
torques. See Chapter 6.1 Tightening Torques.
3. Before mounting the flipper arm, reconnect the power and
run the hydraulic motor approximately one minute to
deaerate the hydraulic system.
4. Disconnect the power and mount the flipper arm according
to the procedure above.
5. Lubricate the gearbox according to instructions in Chapter
6.1
6. Retighten the motor screws with 100 Nm after 200 times test.

Bromma Conquip 6.4-4-Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Hoses

Motor
screw

Shaft Hydraulic
motor
M20 Screws

Keys Bearing

Bearing cover

6.4-5- Oct.02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 03. Glide Plates Main Frame

Dismounting Glide Plates.

1. Make sure the power is disconnected.
2. Remove the Landing buffer from the top of the main frame.
3. Lift up the telescopic beam unit by either using a forklift
truck or other lifting equipment. The beam unit should be
lifted up gently so the beams just come in contact with the
top of the main frame.
4. Secure the beams in this position. (Blocks inside main
frame).
5. Remove the 20 foot stop assembly, and pull out the glide
pad with a screw driver.

Installing the Main Frame Glide Plates Landing

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order. buffer
2. Secure the 20 foot stop assembly screws with Loctite.
3. Lubricate the parts as per lubrication instructions Robalon
Chapter 6.1. pad
Telescopic
beam unit
20 foot stop assy

REP 04. Telescopic Beam Glide Plates

Dismounting Glide Plates.

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Dismantle the 20 foot stop assemblies as described in
REP 03.
3. Reconnect the power. Upper glide
4. Run the spreader to the 20 foot position. plate
5. Manually run the spreader past the 20 foot position and until
it stops.
6. Disconnect the power.
7. Remove or lift up the cover assy.
8. Remove the bolts holding the upper glide plates.
9. The lower glide plates are not used much in normal opera-
tion and may take a long time to wear down. If they are
worn past the minimum thickness (17 mm), position the
spreader back to the 20 foot position.
9. Measure and mark the position of the two screws on the
bottom of the main frame at each corner. ( 8 marks).
Use the new glide plates as a template. Cover assy
10.Reconnect the power. Lower glide
plate
Bromma Conquip 6.4-6-Oct. 02 rev.00
 Bromma Group Manual

11.Run the telescopic beams outwards about 1 meter and

disconnect the power.
12.Drill two 18 mm holes at the marks (according to point 9) at
each corner and deburr.
13.Connect the power and run the spreader to the 20 foot
position.
14.Disconnect the power.
15.Now it is possible to remove the screws through the drilled
holes. Press the beam ends upwards and take out the glide
plates.

Installing the Glide Plates

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
Do not carry out any work on the spreader with power supply
connected.

REP 05. Telescopic Chain

Removing the Telescopic Chain

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the locking screws from the adjusting nut.
3. Turn the adjusting nut counterclockwise a quarter of a turn.
Locking 4. Remove the chain pin connected to the shock absorber by
screws pulling out the cotter pin.
5. Remove the chain.

Adjusting Installing the Telescopic Chain

nut 1. Perform the steps 5-3 above in the reverse order.
2. Go to step 4 in ”Adjusting Telescopic Chain”.
3. Reinstall the locking screws in the adjuster nut.
4. Lubricate the chain according to chapt. 6.

Adjusting theTelescopic Chain

1. Run the spreader to the maximum position (40 or 45 foot).
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Remove the locking screws from the adjuster nut.
Cotter pin
4. Tighten the adjuster nuts on both sides with a torque wrench to
50 Nm (37 ft-lbs.) alternately one turn at a time . It is important
to adjust both sides equally. If not done properly this could
Chain lock cause future problems in operation and reduce the life of the chain.
5. Reinstall the locking screws in the adjusting nut .

6.4-7- Oct.02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 06. Telescopic Motor

Gearbox
Removing theTelescopic Motor fixing screws
1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the telescopic chain according to REP 05. Hydraulic Motor
3. Remove the screws for the hydraulic motor . Gearbox
4. Remove the hydraulic motor from the gearbox.
Note, it is only necessary to disassemble the hoses if the
hydraulic motor is to be replaced.
5. Remove the gearbox mounting screws (four pieces ).
6. When the gearbox is disassembled from the main frame, the
chain wheel can be removed.

Installing the Telescopic Motor

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.

Screws for
Hydraulic Motor

REP 07. Pedestal Bearing

Chain wheel
Removing the Pedestal Bearing
1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the telescopic chain according to REP 05.
3. Remove the pedestal mounting screws (9) and nuts (10) .
4. Remove the pedestal bearing assembly from the main frame
using lifting equipment.
5. Remove the two lock rings (8).
6. Remove the washer (5).
7. Remove chain wheel (3) and key (7).
8. Remove washer (4).
9. Remove the shaft (2).
10.Remove the two bearings (6).

Installing the Pedestal Bearing

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
2. Add grease through the grease fitting (12).

Bromma Conquip 6.4-8-Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 08. Position Sensors

Removing the Position Sensors

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove protection plate.
3. Disconnect the plug to the sensors.
4. Loosen the screws (M6) in the sensor clamp and pull out
the sensor.
5. To remove the sensor with clamps, remove the M8 x 30
screws instead.

Installing the Position Sensors

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
2. Distance between sensor and flag on the tension rod
Protection plate should be set to approx. 6 mm.
3. Adjust the position of the sensors as described below.

Screw M6 x 75
Sensor plug
Sensor

Screw M8x 30

Sensor plate

Adjusting the Position Sensors

1. Place the spreader in the desired position. Check the
spacing of the twistlock pins by checking the center punch
marks on the telescopic beam and a black position line.
Another method to check the twistlock spacing is to
measure the distance between the center of the twistlock
pins for each position.
2. If adjustment is needed, loosen the M8x30 screws and
move the sensor plate depending on the deviation (either
too long or too short).
3. Tighten the screws and recheck the twistlock spacing.
4. When the twistlock spacing is correct, tighten all screws.
5. Perform the same steps for all positions.

6.4-9- Oct.02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 09. Digital Encoder

Cable holder
M3 screws
Removing the Digital Encoder M12 screws
1. Disconnect the power.
Housing
2. Remove the cable clamps for the encoder cable.
3.Remove the M12 screws holding the encoder housing.
4.Turn the housing until the set screw in the coupling appears
in the small hole.
5. Loosen the set screw and remove the housing.
6. Remove the encoder by loosening the three M3 screws.
Stop screw
Installing the Digital Encoder Encoder
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
2. Connection of the encoder to the electric cabinet is Pedestal bearing
described in chapter 6.3 Electrical system.
3. Connect the power and test the operation of the encoder.

REP 10. Cables and Hoses in Cable Chain

Removing the Cables and Hoses

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Disconnect the cable either in the junction box on the end Hose
beam or in the electrical cabinet. couplings
3. Remove the cable clamp.
4. Remove the end of the cable.
5. Disconnect the hoses from the manifold block at the end
beam. Use fitting caps or plastic bags and straps or tape to
cover the manifold couplings to avoid oil leakage. Do the
same with the hoses if they are to be re-used.
6. Disconnect the hoses from the couplings on the tension rod.
7. Place fitting caps or plastic bags as described in step 5 and Cable
clamp
withdraw the hoses.

Installing the Cables and Hoses

1. Thread the cable into the upper compartment in the cable
chain. The cross bars inside the cable chain are adjustable.
The proper distance is one third for each compartment.
Make sure the cable is not too tight.
2.Install the cable clamp and connect the wires according to Cross bar
Chapter 6.3 Electrical system.
3. Thread the hoses to their compartments inside the cable
chain. (middle and bottom).
4. Make sure the hoses are not too tight.
5. Connect the hoses to their couplings according to Chapter
6.2 Hydraulic system.
6. Remove the air in the hoses according to REP 14,
De-aeration of hydraulic system.
Bromma Conquip 6.4-10-Oct. 02 rev.00
 Bromma Group Manual

REP 11. Electric Motor

Removing the Electric Motor

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the hydraulic power pack cover.
3. Take the cover off from the junction box on the motor and
disconnect the cables. Note how the cables are connected.
4. Remove the mounting bolts for the electrical motor.
5. Remove the motor from the bell-housing by removing the six
Hub A Hub B
M12 nuts on the motor flange.
6. Pull the motor backwards until it comes loose from the shaft
coupling.
7. Dismantle the coupling by loosening the M6 set screw.
8. Make sure the key is located.
Motor
shaft
Installing and Adjusting the Electric Motor
1.Mount Hub B of the coupling to the electric motor and mount
Hub A to the pump as shown on the drawing on the left.
Tighten the set screw to 81Nm.
2. Press the rubber gear ring in place on Hub A on the
hydralic pump shaft.
3. Push the motor in place and ensure that Hub B on the shaft fits
into the rubber gear ring
4. Perform steps 1-4 above in the reverse order.
5. Test the function of the motor. Tighten all screws.
Power pack
cover

Junction box

M12 screws

M12 nuts
Shaft
coupling
Hub B

Stop screw

Rubber
Gear
Ring Hub A

6.4-11- Oct.02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 12. Hydraulic Pump

Removing the Hydraulic Pump

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Drain the hydraulic tank by removing the drain plug.
3. Remove the hoses from the pump.
4. Remove the Electric motor according to REP 11.
5. Remove the four M12 screws holding the pump into the
bell-housing.
6. Support the pump while pulling it out from the bell-housing.

Case drain
Installing the Hydraulic Pump Pressure hose
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order. adjuster screw
2. Fill the pump with oil before connecting the case drain hose.
3. Connect the power supply and test the operation of the pump.
Flow
regulator
Adjusting Hydraulic Pump *
1. Caution! Some of these steps are made while the power
supply is connected.
2. Mount the pressure gauge on the valve block pressure test
point.
2. Loosen the pressure adjuster screw a couple of turns. Hydraulic
3. Start up the system and increase the pressure by tightening pump
the pressure adjuster screw until the correct pressure
setting is reached. (see Chapter 3.1 Datasheet).
4. The telescoping speed is set by adjusting the flow regula-
tor. The recommended speed is 27-28 s between the 20´
and the 40´ or 45´ positions. If the speed is set too high, it
may overload the motor and trip the motor protection or the
fuses. Always make sure the motor current is not higher
than the motor rating or
supply capacity.
Flow
Pressure regulator
adjuster screw Case drain
hose

Hydraulic
pump

M12 Screws

Drain plug
* Not valid for STS 45

Bromma Conquip 6.4-12-Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 13. Oil and Filters

Changing the oil and replacing the Filters
1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the cover over the hydraulic unit.
3. Remove the drain plug and the filler cap to drain the oil. (150 liters).
4. Remove the three M6 screws holding the return line filter cover.
5. Remove the filter insert and replace it.
6. Remove the pressure filter cup and replace the filter.
Note! The cup is filled with oil. Clean the cup and assemble
with a new filter insert.
7. Refill the oil tank through the return line filter.
8. Refill the pump by loosening the case drain hose and pouring oil
Cover into the pump.
9. Reinstall the hose and remove the air for the system according to
REP14, De-aeration of hydraulic system.

M6 screws
Return line filter cover

Return line filter insert

Return line filter cup

Pressure filter insert

Pressure filter cup

Drain plug

REP 14. De-aeration of Hydraulic system

Initial actions
Mount the Pressure Gauge. Check the oil level. If it is correct, start
up the system. If pressure is not obtained, refill the pump according
to step 8 above.

De-aeration
1. Run all functions several times. Let the system run for 0.5 - 1
hour and check for possible leakage.
2. If work has been done on the hydraulic system at the end beams,
the flipper arms must be dismounted. This allows the flipper
Pressure Gauge motors to run freely.
3. Turn off the power and check the oil pressure. If the pressure
remains steady, de-aeration is completed. Remove the pressure gauge.

6.4-13- Oct.02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 15. Telescopic Beam Units

Removing the Telescopic Beam Units

1. Run the spreader to the 20 foot position.

2. Disconnect the power.
3. Remove the glide plates in the end of the telescopic beams.
4. Reconnect power supply.
5. Run the spreader to the 30 foot position.
6. Disconnect the power.
7. Remove the glide plates according to REP 03 Dismounting
glide plates.
8. Disconnect the power cables and the hydraulic hoses from
the drawbar connection in the end beam.
9. Seal all hydraulic hoses with fitting caps or plastic bags and
straps or tape.
10. Remove the pin from the drawbar connection in the end beam. Glide plates
11. Secure a spacer between the telescopic beams to prevent
lateral movement.
12. Lift the end beam with a fork truck and slide the telescopic
beam unit approximately to the 45 foot position.
13.Remove the beams from the main frame and inspect them
as required.
Landing buffer

Drawbar
connection

Main frame

Drawbar

Telescopic beam
unit

Installing Telescopic Beam Units

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
(see chapt.6.1 for proper tightening torques).

Adjusting the Telescopic Beam Units

1. Test the operation of the spreader. Normally no adjustment
is required.
2. Perform REP 05 Adjusting telescopic chain, if neccessary.
3. Perform REP 08 Adjusting position sensors, if neccessary.
Bromma Conquip 6.4-14-Oct. 02 rev.00
 Bromma Group Manual

REP 16. Twinlift Units

Dismounting the Twinlift Boxes

1. Run the boxes to the down position
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Remove the hoses from the cylinder, make sure that the
pressure is zero by manually operating the valves.
4. Mount fitting caps or plastic bags on the hose couplings
and the cylinder couplings and tighten them with straps or
tape.
5. Remove the nut holding the shafts for the cylinder.
6. Remove the shafts.
7. Remove the hoses leading to the twistlock cylinder.
8. Disconnect the junction box main cable .
9. Now it is possible to raise the twin lift box with lifting
equipment and remove it.

Installing the Twinlift Boxes

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
2. Perform REP 14, De-aeration of hydraulic system.
3. Test all functions.

Twinlift
box

Shaft
Cylinder

Shaft

Nut
Junction
box

6.4-15- Oct.02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 17. Twinlift Unit Twistlocks

Removing the Twinlift Unit Twistlock Pin

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the twistlock cylinder as described in REP 01
3. Perform REP 01 Removing the Twistlock.

Mounting
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
2. Adjust the distance between the top of the twistlock head and
the bottom of the guide block according to REP 01.
3. Lubricate according to instructions in chapter 6.1

Adjusting Twinlift Unit Twistlocks Twistlock

1. See procedure described in REP 01. nut
M6 Screw
M6 Nut

Dismounting and mounting Sensors

1. See procedure described in REP 01.

Sensors

Guide block
Failure to properly adjust the twistlock will greatly reduce the life
of the twistlock.
Twistlock
pin

Bromma Conquip 6.4-16-Oct. 02 rev.00

Bromma Group Manual

Additional Repair and

Adjustments (REP) for the STS45

This section shows only additional Repair and Adjustment

instructions for the STS 45 Spreader. For all other repairs and
adjustments, see REP 1- 17

Contents:

REP 21 Position Sensor on twin shift cylinder

REP 22 Latch
REP 23 Sensor Arrangement
REP 24 Glide plates
REP 25 Hydraulic pump
REP 26 Twinlift sequences

Read through the warnings and safety precautions in Chapter 1

6.4- 17 - Dec 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 21.Position Sensor on twin shift cylinder

Removing the Position Sensor

1. Perform REP 20. Removint the twin shift cylinder.
2. Loose the screw (56) and dismount the conneotor thf=n
Solder the cables loose from the pin in the connector
3. Dismount the lock screw pos (57) and (58)
4. Dismount the head (1).
5. Pull the piston rod (7) out of the cylinder
Be careful so the cables don’t get damaged if the same position
sensor should be remounted.
6. Dismount the lock ring (54) and pull the position sensor ( 55)
out of the piston rod.

Installing the Position Sensor

1. Mount the position sensor in the piston rod (7) and remount the
lock ring (64)
2. Connect a thin wire in the cable end of the position sensor (55)
and through the wirf up to the connector (71)
3. Push the piston rod (7) in the cylinder and pull the wire with the
cables through the connection. Be careful with the cables.
4. Mount the sensor head in the right position and mount the lock
screw (67) and (58).
Test that the piston rod can be moved gently.
5. Cut the cables to correct length and sold them into the
connector pins. Pin a(3)= black, pin 8(4)= red, pin c(1)=blue
6. Remount the connector with the screws (56).
7. Perform REP 20. Installing the Twin shift cylinder.

Bromma Conquip 6.4- 18 - Dec 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 22 STS45 Latch cylinder inTelescopic Drive

Removing the Latch cylinder sensors

1. Run the spreader to 40 ´ position.
2. Disconnect the power
3. Loosen the tubular cover (11)
4. Remove the cable from the sensor
5.Remove the sensor(10) by loosening the lock nut.

Installing the Latch cylinder sensors

1. When installing the rear sensor the piston rod must be
retracted and for the front sensor elongated.
2. Lubricate the thread and the o-ring on the sensor
3. Thread the sensor to the cylinder housing util it hits the
piston rod.
4. Then thread the sensor backwards 1/2 turn and fix the
position by tightening the lock nut against the tube socket.
5. Connect the cable and remount the tubular cover.

6.4-19 - Dec 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Removing the Latch cylinder

1. Run the spreader to 40 ´ position.
2. Disconnect the power
3. Loosen the tubular covers (11)
4. Remove the cables from the sensors
5. Manually affect the valves (left Y43-lock, Y44-unlock, right
Y53-lock, Y54-unlock ) in order to release the pressure.
6. Remove the hoses from the cylinder. To avoid oil leakage,
place an end cap or a plastic bag over the end of the hoses
and secure the bag with straps.
7.Remove the split pins (5) from the shafts (6) and remove the
cylinder.

Installing the Latch cylinder

1. Clean and lubricate all parts before installing.
2. Perform the steps 2-4 and 6-7 above in the reverse order.
3. Run the latch cylinder for about ten cycles in order to de-
aerate the system.

REP 23 STS45 Sensor Arrangement

Removing the STS45 Sensor Arrangement

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Disconnect the plug from actual sensor.
S16(2)
40´
3. Loosen the M6 screws (7) in the sensor clamp (2) and pull
S16(1) out the sensor.
40´
S13
20´ Installing the STS45 Sensor Arrangement
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order, using blue
Loctite to the cable connection.
2. Distance between sensor and flag on the drawbar should
be set to approx. 5 mm.
3. Adjust the position of the sensors as described below.

Adjusting the STS45 Sensor Arrangement

1. Place the spreader in the desired position. Check the
spacing of the twistlock pins by checking the center punch
marks on the telescopic beam and a black position line.
Another method to check the twistlock spacing is to measure the
distance between the center of the twistlock pins for each position.
2. If adjustment is needed, loosen the screws (7) and move
S17 the sensor depending on the deviation (either too long or
45´ WS17
too short).
3. Tighten the screws and recheck the twistlock spacing.
4. When the twistlock spacing is correct, tighten all screws.
5. Perform the same steps for all positions.

Bromma Conquip 6.4- 20 - Dec 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 24 STS45 Glide plates

Removing the Glide plates in twinlift boxes.

1. Run the spreader to 40´ position.
2. Connect to drawbar.
3. Run the twinlift boxes apart approximately 1 m.
4. Disconnect the power.
5. Remove screws (14) and remove plates (12).
6. Remove the glide plates (13) . Do not loose the shim (35)
between the lower plate and the lower glide plate.
7. Mount a M16 x50 screw in the hole on top of the twinlift
box. Lift the box approximately 5 mm by tihtening the screw.
8. Remove Screw (10), washer (11) and washer (9).
9. Mount a M12 screw into the tapped hole at the visible
surface of the glide plate (8).
10. Pull out the glide plate by pulling the M12 screw .
11. Perform the steps above on all four twinlift boxes.

6.4- 21 - Dec 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Installing the Glide plates in twinlift boxes.

1. Make sure the power supply is disconnected.

2. Lubricate the glide plates according to lubrication instructions
in Chapter 6.1

Note! A synthetic grease compatible with plastics. (Example

Gleitmo 805K) shall be used on glide plates made of Oilon
(green) and gliding surfaces in contact with these plates.
Other types of grease may destroy the glide plates.

3. Install the glide plates as mentioned above but in the reverse

order.
4. Do not forget to dismout the M16 x50 screw in the hole on top
of the twinlift boxes.

5. Connect the power supply and test the valid functions.

Bromma Conquip 6.4- 22 - Dec 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 25 STS45 Hydraulic Pump

Removing the Hydraulic Pump

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the hydraulic unit covers.
3. Drain the hydraulic tank by removing the drain plug.
4. Remove the hoses from the pump.
5. Remove the Electric motor according to REP 11.
(It is possible to remove the pump without removing the
electric motor. The hub A on the shaft coupling will pass Valve 71 (Y41)
through the central front hole in the bell-housing. The rubber
gear ring will fall down inside the bell-housing and must be
picked up by hand or by a suitable tool).
6. Remove the two M12 screws holding the pump into the
bell-housing.
7. Support the pump while pulling it out from the bell-housing.

Installing the Hydraulic Pump

1. Mout the rubber gear ring on the hub A at the pump shaft.
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order.
(If the rubber gear ring will not fit to the hub B on the motor
shaft inside the bell-housing, the fan cover at the end of the
motor must be removed. By slowly turning the fan makes it
possible to turn the motor shaft to a better position).
2. Fill the pump with oil before connecting the case drain hose. Hydraulic unit
covers
3. Connect the power supply and test the operation of the pump.

Control of the Hydraulic Pump pressure

1. Caution! Some of these
steps are made while the
power supply is connected.
2. Mount the pressure gauge on the
pressure test pointat the pressure filter inlet. Pressure
3. Connect the power supply. testpoint
4. To check the low pressure, ensure
that the valve 71 (Y41) is currentless. Rubber
The small LED on the valve is not lit. gear ring
Actual low pressure value is shown on
the hydtaulic schematic. Chapt.6.2
(and the datasheet Chapter 3.1)
Normally 100 bar.
5.To check the high pressure, the valve 71
(Y41) must be voltage-fed. The small Bell-
housing Hub A
LED on the valve is lit.
Hydraulic
Drain plug pump
6.4- 23 - Dec 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip
 Bromma Group Manual

Actual high pressure value is shown on the hydtaulic schematic.

Chapt.6.2 (and the datasheet Chapter 3.1) Normally 160 bar.
If the values does not correspond to the information in the manual,
the pump pressure must be adjusted.

Setting the Hydraulic pump Pressure

Normally the pressure is adjusted in plant but if the adjusters have
been manipulated a pressure adjustment must be carried out.

1. Caution! Some of these steps are made while the power

supply is connected.
2. Mount the pressure gauge on the
Power control pressure test pointat the pressure filter inlet.
3. Connect the power supply.
Case drain port L

Pressure control
(High pressure)
Standard setting: Pressure port B
∆ p=160 bar

Flow control
Not to be adjusted
Standard setting:
∆ p=14 bar X-port Suction port S
connected
to external
pressure 4. Adjust the high pressure to its value by turning the pressure
valve control knob. +- one turn = +- 50 bar. The valve 71.
(Y41) must be voltage-fed.
5. Adjust the low pressure to its value by turning the pressure
adjuster screw on the valve 72 .The valve 71 (Y41) is
currentless.

Valve 71 (Y41)

Pressure control
(Low pressure)
Standard setting:
∆ p=100 bar Valve 72

Bromma Conquip 6.4- 24 - Dec 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Adjustable spring package of power control

valve
6. Adjust the power control as follows:

Eccenter

• cradle position (i.e. displaced volume)

will be restored by the eccenter

• prestress of the spring package will be

changed by the eccenter

• Thereby the opening pressure of the

power control valve has been changed

• small swivel angle => high pressure

large swivel angle => low pressure

End of control is adjustable by the second inner

spring, clearance at fully displaced volume
(100% Vg)
200
pressure pHD [bar]

drive torque [Nm]

280
250

200 150
Point of action of the
second inner spring
150 Start of control is adjustable by the first
100 outer spring, prestressed at fully displaced
volume (100% Vg)
100

50 Start of control !
50

torque 0 Attention:
0 20 40 60 80 Q [ l/min ] Different spring packages are necessary
in order to realize various characteristic
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0 Vg / Vgmax curves

6.4- 25 - Dec 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

7. The power control can also be set with electric motor drive.
proceed as follows:

With an electric motor drive the setting of the power control can be
locknut 2 done with an amperemeter instead of a flowmeter. The current is
measured on the electric motor with an amperemeter at 50% (start
Setting screw 2
of control) respective 90-95% (end of control) of maximum pressure
160 bar. (pmax).

NOTE!
The actual currency is shown on the motor.

Setting screw 1 locknut 1 The settings must be done when the pump is producing flow.
If only minor adjustment is needed, adjust only the setting screw 1.

Start of control is set at pmax x 50% by means of setting screw 1**:

1.) Loosen locknuts 1 and 2
2.) Loosen the setting screw 2 totally
3.) set start of control by turning setting screw 1** when the pump is
pressurized (e.g. with a variable throttle) to 50% of pmax.
4.) secure setting screw with locknut 1

End of control is set by means of setting screw 2**:

5.) set end of control by turning setting screw 2** when the pump is
pressurized (e.g. with an variable throttle) to 90-95% of pmax.
6.) Secure setting screw 2 with locknut 2.
DFLR
** One turn +/-on the setting screws means approx.+/-50% in power.
M The ratio between
the turns of the screw and the power achieved is linear.
Turning screw clockwise increases power
T Turning screw anti-clockwise reduces power
280 200
250
pressure pHD [bar]

150
Drive torque [Nm]

200

150
100
100
50
50

0
0 20 40 60 80 Q [ l/min ]

0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0 Vg / Vgmax

Bromma Conquip 6.4- 26 - Dec 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

REP 26 Twinlift sequences

This schematic shows the function steps to run the twinlift

down to double pick mode.

Twin down sequence

Prerequisites
None landed
All unlocked switches
In zero gap switch SI??=on
Twin down command from crane

Twin left Twin right

expand expand Twin is
start start down
Y45=on Y55=on S40-S43

Attach L Attach R
sensor on sensor on
drawbar drawbar Double pick mode
on on
S16 S16.1

Stop Stop
expand expand
Y45=off Y55=off

Connect Connect
valves on valves on
Y43=on Y53=on

Connected
L&R
S100 & S103

Twin down
valve on
Y26=on

6.4- 27 - Dec 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

This schematic shows the function steps to run the twinlift up to

single pick mode.

Twin up sequence
Prerequisites
None landed
All unlocked
40´ prox. Switch = S16 (on main
frame)
Twin up command

Twinlegs are
Disconnect in zero gap
from drawbar S112=on
L&R
Y44 & Y54=on

Single pick mode

Twin
disconnected
from drawbar
L&R
S102 & S103

Twinlegs up
Y25 = on

Twin is up
S36 & S39

Retract Twins
to Zero gap
Y46 & Y56
=on

Bromma Conquip 6.4- 28 - Dec 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

6.5 Fault Finding

By means of this list it is possible to identify and remedy the most
common failures on the Bromma Group Spreaders.
Always start with a visual inspection of visible damage, oil leakage
etc.

HAZARD! Always disconnect the power supply before work is

carried out !

The spreader shall only be operated and serviced by authorised

personnel.

Fault finding in hydraulic system

Symptom Possible reason Action
Noisy pump or excessive Oil level is insufficient and/ Check oil level.
heat. or oil filter is clogged Replace oil filter

Proper pressure setting is Check that the pump is

other than 100 bar. Flow functioning correctly as
rate is correct as long as a described in the ”Systems
telescoping speed of 24-26 test”.
seconds between 20´ and
40´ positions is indicated.

Leakage through pressure/ Check that the settings of

shock relief valves. the pressure relief valves are
correct and the pump
suction line (inlet) is not
blocked.

High oil leakage from the Check the pump suction by

pump drain line resulted removing the drain line and
from exessive pump wear. measuring the flow at a
running pressure of 100 bar.
Maximum flow should be 1
litre/min. If greater than this,
replace the pump.

6.5-1- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Symptom Possible reason Action

Twistlocks do not operate No electrical supply to Check the manual operation
solenoids, or faulty solenoid of the solenoid valve.
coils.

Mechanical interference. Check that there are no

obstructing objects in the
twistlock corner, which may
interfere with the twistlock
movement.

Insufficient hydraulic Check pressure from DCV,

pressure . it should be according to
hydraulic schematic.

Check that the pump

Unusual system pressure. pressure is correct.

Check pressure relief valve.

When valve is operated If it decreases, check the

manually, the pressure does seals in the cylinder.
not remain at working
pressure.

Note! To carry out the twistlock function test, the blocking pins must be in up position. See Chapter 4
Start Up Procedures.

Twistlock lock solenoids must remain energized at all times when the twistlock ”Lock command”
is selected.

Bromma Conquip 6.5-2- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Fault finding in electrical system

Symptom Possible reason Action

Hydraulic pump motor Three-phase supply missing Check cable, plug and
stopped. socket.

Maintaining contacts faulty. Check crane control signal.

Feed from crane missing Check connection.

Hydraulic pump motor runs Pump pressure too high or Refer to hydraulics section
but keeps tripping out. pump faulty. Chapt.6.2

Pump motor faulty. Replace motor.

Motor supply has one Check to find where supply

phase missing . is short circuited and repair.

Twistlocks will not lock/ Pump stopped Check pump procedure.

unlock
Crane spreader is fitted with Check that the spreader is
the safety feature to only correctly landed on the
work with all four landing container.
switches actuated.

Check leads from plugs to Repair or replace.

solenoid.

Timer is set wrongly (if Replace if timer is faulty,

equipped with timer ). otherwise, reset to 0.5 or 2
seconds.

Check blokcing circuit. Check relays and/or limit

switches, and either readjust
or replace them.

Double-check the
connections.

Check supply at B-C Check connections and

junction circuit. replace festoon.

6.5-3- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Symptom Possible reason Action

Check if fault is hydraulic by Refer to the hydraulic
operating valve by hand. section.

Correct supply to solenoid Replace solenoid.

(if yes).

Flippers will not operate. Pump stopped. Check pump procedure.

Check if fault is mechanical Carry out mechanical/

or hydraulic by operating hydraulic procedure.
valve by hand.

Correct supply to solenoid Replace solenoid.

(if yes).

Check flipper signals from Check crane controls.

crane. Check plug, socket and
cable.

Bromma Conquip 6.5-4- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

7.Spare Parts
To ensure the function and safety of the Bromma Group sprerader
it is imporant to use only recommended Bromma spare parts.

7.1 How to Order Spare Parts

All ordering of Bromma spare parts must be done on the Bromma
e-commerce website. To order the requested spare parts some
important information must be available.
www.bromma.com
The serial no. of the spreader. See Data Sheet chapt. 3 or the
dataplate mounted on the main frame of the current spreader.
The requested Art no. and the quantity needed. See the following
Serial No. pages in this chapter.

Registered User
To be able to log in to the Bromma e-commerce site you must be
a registered user. To become a registered user you have to fill in
the Application Form on the Bromma website. After a few days
you will receive a User ID and a password by e-mail.

User id.
When you are a registered user fill in your User ID and password
in the fields on the Bromma e-commerce website
Password
(www.bromma.com) to log in. Then follow the instructions on the
Fill in valid user id and password here and screen.
they will be close at hand when needed.

Search Function
If you do not find the parts requested on the e-commerce site or if
you have any other problems finding valid part numbers you can
use the search function on the website or call your local Bromma
dealer. The phone number is published on the website
at www.bromma.com/distributors/index.asp

7-1- Febr. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

7.2 How to return parts

Return number
All parts returned to Bromma must have a return number both
on the package and on the delivery note.
To receive a return number, contact the local Bromma
representative or Bromma After sales dept. They will fill in a
form to ensure that your return delivery is handled correctly.

Packaging
All returned parts must be properly packed. Bromma does not
take any responsibility if returned goods are damaged during
freight.

Bromma Conquip 7-2- Febr. 03 rev.01

 Bromma Group Manual

7.3 Spare parts list

General assembly

4
9 3 1 11

10 5

8 7

SP- POS DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS

1 Main Beam 1
2 Telescopic Beam Unit 2
3 Powerpack 1
4 Telescopic Drive Assy 1
5 Twistlock 4
6 Flipper Arm Gearbox 4
7 Flipper Arm 4
8 Guide Arm 4
9 Twinlift assy 2
10 Lamp assy 2 See pos. 4 SP list Main Beam
11 Electric cabinet 1(2) See 6.3 Electric system

7-3- Febr. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

Bromma Group Manual

Spare parts list for Main Beam

7-1- Jan. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 7-2- Jan. 03 rev.01

 Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

1 x MAIN BEAM 1 No Spare part
2 38070 TELESCOPIC DRIVE ASSY 1 See draw ing SP-8
3 x PEDESTAL BEARING 1 See Draw ing SP-9
4 x LAMP ASSY 1 See Draw ing SP-3
5 46754 COVER ASSY 4 Include pos 23,30,31
6 49854 LANDING BUFFER SOFT ASSY 4 Include pos.24,26,27,28,29,
7 400229 GLIDE PLATE 25x165x301 1 Included in Glide plate assy Pos.10 on SP-2
8 401044 20'-STOP ASSY 40/45 4 Include pos.9,33,34,35,36,37,38,39. See additional specification Data sheet 3.1
9 401051 PLATE 1 Included in pos 8
10 400244 END STOP ASSY 2 Include pos.11,12,18,19,
11 46743 END STOP 1 Included in pos 10
12 46757 SHIM 4 Included in pos 10
16 71328 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" 1
18 75267 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB 2 Included in pos 10
19 78498 SCREW M6S 8X 40 FZB 8.8 2 Included in pos 10
20 401052 19'6 -STOP ASSY 40/45 1 Include pos. 47,48,49 See additional specification Data sheet 3.1
21 46753 MOUNTING DET.POWERPACK 4 Include pos.22,42,43,44,45,46.
22 74606 RUBBER BUFFERT PHOENIX 786011 1 Included in pos. 21
23 75092 SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 2 Included in pos.5
24 79141 SCREW M6S 12X 35 FZB 8.8 2 Included in pos.6
26 78457 RUBBER BUFFER 1 Included in pos.6
27 49853 SLEEV 2 Included in pos.6
28 79830 WASHER SRB 14X28X2 FZB 2 Included in pos.6
29 75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 2 Included in pos.6
30 46766 COVER 1 Included in pos.5
31 75552 WASHER SRKB 7X25X1.5 FZB 2 Included in pos.5
33 401047 PLATE 1 Included in pos 8
34 401050 SHIM 4 Included in pos 8
35 401048 PLATE 1 Included in pos 8
36 401049 SHIM 2 Included in pos 8
37 401045 BUFFER 20' 40/45 1 Included in pos 8
38 75523 WASHER NORD-LOCK M10 FZB 4 Included in pos 8
39 79955 SCREW MC6S 10X 50 FZB 8.8 4 Included in pos 8
42 75140 SCREW M6S 16X 30 FZB 8.8 1 Included in pos. 21
43 75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 4 Included in pos. 21
44 70918 WASHER NORD-LOCK M16 FZB 1 Included in pos. 21
45 75607 SCREW M6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 4 Included in pos. 21
46 75291 WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200 8 Included in pos. 21
47 401053 BUFFER 19'6 40/45 1 Included in pos 20
48 401055 BUFFER 19'6 40/45 1 Included in pos 20
49 78140 SCREW MF6S 10X 25 FZB 10.9 4 Included in pos 20
50 48341 BEARING PLATE 4 Only in STS45
51 79005 BEARING 4 Only in STS45

7-3- Jan. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Gearbox Assy
38070

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

0 38070 TELESCOPIC DRIVE ASSY 1 Include pos. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
1 79554 GEAR BOX BT52HD-B88834 1 Pos. 2 and 5 mounted on gearbox
2 51515 CHAIN WHEEL E112-1-11 - Mounted on Gear box
3 76458 SCREW MC6S 12X 35 FZB 8.8 4 Included in 38070 Telescopic Drive Assy
4 75295 WASHER NORD LOCK M12 4 Included in 38070 Telescopic Drive Assy
6 77062 SCREW M6S 16X180 FZB 8.8 4 Included in 38070 Telescopic Drive Assy
7 75296 WASHER BRB 17X30X3 FZB HB200 8 Included in 38070 Telescopic Drive Assy
8 74955 NUT M16 LOC-KING FZB 4 Included in 38070 Telescopic Drive Assy

Pedestal Bearing
35635
36371

9 35635+36371
SP-Pos Part no Description Qty Remarks Note

0 36371 PEDESTAL BEARING ASSY 1 Include pos.1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11 Assy With Digital Encoder

0 35635 PEDESTAL BEARING 1 Include pos.1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12 Assy Without Digital Encoder

1 46762 PEDESTAL BEARING 1
2 47898 SHAFT 1 With Digital Encoder
2 46773 SHAFT 1
3 46765 CHAIN WHEEL 1
4 51659 WASHER 1
5 41794 WASHER 1
6 73562 BEARING 22212 CC W33 2
7 73950 KEY 12X 8X 30 DIN 6885 B TK 1
8 74243 LOCKING RING SGA 60 2
9 77062 SCREW M6S 16X180 FZB 8.8 4
10 74955 NUT M16 LOC-KING FZB 4
11 75296 WASHER BRB 17X30X3 FZB HB200 8
12 71328 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" 1

Bromma Conquip 7-4- Jan. 03 rev.01

 Bromma Group Manual

Single Sensor Assy

38084

See Chapter 3.1 Datasheet if this

assembly is included.

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

0 38084 SENSOR SINGEL ASSY 0 Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13
1 38082 SINGLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT 1 Welded parts on frame Not included in Sensor assy part no 38084
2 400267 PLATE 1
3 38087 PROTECTION PLATE 1
4 74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 1
5 53951 PAD FOR SWITCH H=22 1
6 700647 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 2
7 75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 2
8 75102 SCREW M6S 8X 30 FZB 8.8 2
9 75422 SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8 2
10 75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 6
11 75090 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB 4
12 76728 WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB 2
13 79850 COVER PLATE DEP 4 1
S xx SEE CHAPTER 6.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 1

Dual Sensor Assy

38085

See Chapter 3.1 Datasheet if this

assembly is included.
11 38085
SP-Pos Part no Description Qty Remarks Note
0 38085 DUAL SENSOR ASSY 1 Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13
1 38083 DOUBLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT 0 Welded part on Frame Not included in Sensor assy part no 38085
2 400267 PLATE 2
3 38086 PROTECTION PLATE 1
4 74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 2
5 53951 PAD FOR SWITCH H=22 2
6 700647 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 4
7 75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 4
8 75102 SCREW M6S 8X 30 FZB 8.8 4
9 75422 SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8 2
10 75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 8
11 75090 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB 6
12 76728 WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB 4
13 79850 COVER PLATE DEP 4 2

7-5- Jan. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Lamp Assy

Bromma Conquip 7-6- Jan. 03 rev.01

 Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

0 62079 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,8,10,15,16,17,20,22,25.
0 62078 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,8,10,15,16,17,21,22,24.
0 60767 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,10,13,15,16,19,20,21,22,23
0 62535 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,8,10,15,16,17,20,21,25.
0 60890 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,10,15,16,18,19,20,21,22,23.
0 62539 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,8,10,15,16,17,20,21,24
0 60692 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,8,10,14,15,16,19,20,21,22.
0 60802 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,10,14,15,16,19,20,21,22,23.
0 61623 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,8,10,15,16,20,21,22.
0 60861 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,15,16,17,19,20,21,22,23.
0 61790 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos. 1,2,3,4,9,10,15,16,17,20,21,22.
0 60393 SIGNAL LAMPS ASSY 1 Include Pos . 1,2,3,4,8,10,15,16,17,20,21,22.
1 75092 SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 6
2 75098 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB 6
3 79148 WASHER BRB 6.7X14X1.5 FZB HB2 12
4 32769 PLATE FOR SIGNAL LAMPS 1
5 K1415 SEAL FOR LAMP GLOBE 1
6 76866 SCREW MCS 4X007 MÄSSING OBEH. 3
7 76867 WASHER BRB MÄSSING 4.3 OBEH 3
8 71689 SPRING LAMP ATTACH. 3X26X150 4
9 70390 RUBBER BUFFER 45 SHORE 17-1396 4
10 x SEE REMARKS 3 Included in Pos.20,21,22,24,25
11 70297 BULB 12V 21W 7506V BA15S 3
12 700238 LAMP HOUSING 3
13 70311 SOCKET B15S 3
14 73361 LAMP SOCKET BA15D 3
15 70456 PLUG FOR 2 TERMINATION 1
16 85335 BRASS TUBE D=14X1,5 L= 50 2
17 71416 LAMP SOCKET B22 3
18 71414 LAMP SOCKET E27 3
19 44382 ADAPTER WASHER LAMP SOCKET
20 71016 LAMP LARGE RED 1
21 71018 LAMP LARGE GREEN 1
22 73118 LAMP LARGE CLEAR 1
23 78929 SPRING SIGN.LAMP SF-DF 3-25-90 4
24 k4599 LAMP LARGE BLUE 1
25 79497 LAMP LARGE ORANGE 1
26 71822 LAMP GLOBE CLEAR 1
27 71417 LAMP GLOBE RED 1
28 71418 LAMP GLOBE GREEN 1
29 71821 LAMP GLOBE ORANGE 1
30 74600 LAMP GLOBE BLUE 1
31 71434 BULB 230V 60W E27 3
32 73816 BULB 24V 25W Ba15d 3
32 75622 BULB 130V 25W Ba15d 3
32 73817 BULB 220V 25W Ba15d 3
33 71436 BULB 220V 60W B22 3
33 71438 BULB 24V 40W B22 3
33 71435 BULB 220V 40W B22 3
33 71437 BULB 130V 40W B22 3

7-7- Jan. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Digital Encoder Assy

37358

See Chapter 3.1 Datasheet if this

assembly is included.
SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE
1 37359 BELLHOUSING 1
2 49477 COUPLING 1
3 78425 SCREW MC6S 3X 10 FZB 8.8 3
4 70722 WASHER BRB 3,0X 6 FZB HB200 3
5 75172 SCREW M6S 12X 30 FZB 8.8 2
6 75295 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB 2
7 700021 ENCODER 1
8 70442 RUBBER-CLAMP D= 8 (303) 3
9 78856 SCREW MC6S 4X 12 FZB 8.8 3
10 x SEE REMARKS 2 Screw MSK6SS 6x10 Included in Pos 2
S xx SEE CHAPTER 6.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 1

Bromma Conquip 7-8- Jan. 03 rev.01

 Bromma Group Manual

Telescopic Beam Unit

7-1-Nov. 02 rev.00 Bromma

Conquip
 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 7-2-Nov. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

1 x SEE REMARKS 2 No Spare part
2 x FLIPPER ARMS 2 See additional specification Data sheet 3.1
3 38071 SPLASH FLAP ASSY 2 Include pos.4,5,9,15,18,20,25,27,39,40.
4 46788 COVER 1
5 46786 FLAT BAR 1
6 x SEE REMARKS 1 See SP-13
7 400242 TENSION ROD PIN ASSY 2 Includ pos.8,17,28,30.
8 400241 WASHER 1
9 46787 FLAT BAR 1
10 38053 GLIDE PLATE ASSY 4 Include pos.11,21,24,26,37,38 and pos.16 from SP-1
11 400192 GLIDE PLATE 30x160x300 1
12 38074 FLAP ASSY INRS 4 Include pos.16,15,19,25,31,32,36, INRS
12 400246 FLAP ASSY 4 Include pos.16,19,31,32,36 STANDARD
14 x SEE REMARKS 1 See electric part list
15 70375 TRACTOR PIN D=4.5 1 Included in pos.12
16 49244 FLAPS INRS 1 Included in pos.12
16 46799 FLAP GB. 40/45 1 Included in pos.12
17 75365 SCREW M6S 8X 16 FZB 8.8 2
18 75090 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB 12
19 75552 WASHER SRKB 7X25X1.5 FZB 3 Included in pos.12
20 75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 18
21 400193 GLIDE PLATE 20x160x150 1
23 75098 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB 4
24 75296 WASHER BRB 17X30X3 FZB HB200 4
25 78962 CORD D=3MM L=180MM 1 Included in pos.12
26 74954 SCREW MF6S 16X 70 FZB 10.9 4
27 70006 SCREW M6S 8X 35 FZB 8.8 6
28 46744 SHAFT (TENSION ROD PIN ASSY) 1
30 75267 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB 2
31 75098 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB 3 Included in pos.12
32 75669 SCREW M6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8 3 Included in pos.12
33 75713 SCREW MC6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8 4
34 75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 8
35 78238 SHOCK ABSORBER 4
36 75293 WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 3 Included in pos.12
37 74955 NUT M16 LOC-KING FZB 4
39 75422 SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8 6
40 76728 WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB 8
41 38064 ROLLER ASSY EH195 2 Only in STS45

7-3-Nov. 02 rev.00 Bromma

Conquip
 Bromma Group Manual

End Beam Hydraulics

Bromma Conquip 7-4-Nov. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

1 71881 COUPLING 201-06 2
2 73119 VALVE BLOCK NG6 3-STATION ( STANDARD) 1 Standard
2 78223 VALVE BLOCK 1 If only Tw istlock is connected
2 72148 MOUNTING BLOCK 4-STATION 1 If 6 flipper is connected
3 73096 VALVE DG4V-3-2C-MU-H7-60 3 For Tw istlock and Flipper motion (Standard)
4 70546 DUSTCOVER FEMALE 3/8" 2
5 79256 VALVE BLOCK HANDPUMP 1
6 75452 SCREW MC6S 5X 80 12.9 OBEH 4
8 70573 SEALING RUBBERSTEEL 216-06 3/8 4
9 74365 QUICK COUPLING FEMALE 3/8"(BTR 2
11 44447 COUPLING RESTRICT.GE10SR 1.2MM 2
20 73726 O-RING (VALVE/BLOCK) 4
22 - PLUG 4
30 74564 COUPLING GE10-SR 3/8" 2
32 71866 COUPLING GE10-SR 1/4" 4
33 74564 COUPLING GE10-SR 3/8" 11
34 73802 COUPLING SWVE12-SR 3/8"(BANJO) 2
55 56345 HOSE 821-06/KL4250/P86/P87 2
56 56520 HOSE 821-04/KL 770/P86/P87 1
57 56824 HOSE 821-04/KL 620/P86/P87 1
58 56522 HOSE 821-04/KL1400/P86/P87 1
59 56521 HOSE 821-04/KL1250/P86/P87 1
60 58584 HOSE 821-04/KL1600/P86/P87 2
61 56825 HOSE 821-04/KL 850/P86/P87 2
69 75375 SCREW MC6S 5X 30 12.9 OBEH 12
71 700629 SCREW MC6S 8X100 FZB 8.8 2
72 75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 2
73 75090 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB 2

7-5-Nov. 02 rev.00 Bromma

Conquip
 Bromma Group Manual

Roller Assy 38064

Only valid for spreader model STS45

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

0 38064 ROLLER ASSY EH195 1 Include Pos. 1-9
1 48331 ROLLER 1
2 79141 SCREW M6S 12X 35 FZB 8.8 4
3 75295 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB 8
4 38102 SHAFT 1
5 48333 WASHER 2
6 79962 SEALING SIMRIT B1FUD 90-110-8 2
7 73562 BEARING 22212 CC W33 2
8 400272 LOCK PLATE 2
9 76332 GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT 1

Bromma Conquip 7-6-Nov. 02 rev.00

Bromma Group Manual

Spare part list for Powerpack

STS45

7-1- Dec. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 7-2- Dec. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

SP- POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS

1 24229 POWER PACK FRAME COMPL. 1
2 73715 ELMOTOR 7.5kW 380-415V 440-480 1
3 700757 PUMP A10-45 1
4 700758 SHAFT COUPLING SPIDEX A10-45/ 1 Include also pos. 93,94,95,96
5 38075 BELLHOUSING PVQ 40 1
6 700472 HYDRAULIC FILTER MDF 160 1
7 700473 HYDRAULIC FILTER ZT8 1
8 78960 AIR BREATHER 3"MY" 1
9 79957 OIL LEVEL GAUGE W/ THERMOMETER 1
10 70855 VALVE RHV 20SR NON RETURN 1
11 45965 PLUG VSTIR 1/2" KOMPL. 1
12 37577 TANK LID 1
13 37579 GASKET POWER PACK UNIT 1
14 39317 COVER 1
15 38079 COVER 1
16 400250 ROUND BAR 2
17 400725 ROUND BAR 6
18 75783 SCREW M6S 12X 50 FZB 8.8 4
19 70538 WASHER BRB 13X24X2 FZB HB200 4
20 75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 4
21 78407 SCREW M6S 12X 60 FZB 8.8 2
22 74575 SCREW MC6S 12X 55 12.9HGÄ ESLO 2
23 75295 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB 4
24 75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 4
25 75783 SCREW M6S 12X 50 FZB 8.8 2
26 70538 WASHER BRB 13X24X2 FZB HB200 2
27 75807 CUP SPRING 25X12.2X1.5 DIN2093 2
28 75712 SCREW M6S 12X 70 FZB 8.8 4
29 75295 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB 4
30 75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 4
31 70006 SCREW M6S 8X 35 FZB 8.8 14
32 75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 14
33 75090 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB 12
34 76185 SCREW M6S 10X 20 FZB 8.8 4
35 75523 WASHER NORD-LOCK M10 FZB 4
36 70006 SCREW M6S 8X 35 FZB 8.8 20
37 75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 20
38 75422 SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8 3
39 75267 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB 3
40 - NOT CONNECT 0
41 - NOT CONNECT 0
42 - NOT CONNECT 0
43 76079 COUPLING GE20-7/8"-14 UNF 2B 1
44 700760 COUPLING GE42 LR 1 1/2" 1
45 70052 COUPLING GE20-SR 3/4" 1
46 70856 COUPLING EVGE20SR 1
47 71908 COUPLING RI-A-20-12 2
48 70053 COUPLING GE20-SR 1" 1
49 70836 COUPLING ST1301 PRESSURE TEST 1
50 71846 COUPLING EVW20-S 2
51 76453 PLUG VSTIR 1" 1
52 - NOT CONNECT 0
53 70700 COUPLING VSTIR 3/4" 3
54 78654 COUPLING 2133-16 2

For more parts, see next page.

7-3- Dec. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

SP- POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS

55 700764 COUPLING 2133-24 SAE1 1/2"-30 2
56 700626 O-RING 214-16 1
57 701047 O-RING 214-24 1
58 - NOT CONNECT 0
59 - NOT CONNECT 0
60 62933 HOSE602-24/KL 730/P623/P86 1
61 62931 HOSE821-12/KL 530/P86/P613 1
62 57106 HOSE821-10/KL 560/P86/P87 1
63 75305 SCREW UC6S 3/8 UNCX51 12.9 4
64 78731 SCREW UC6S 1/2"UNC X1.5"FZ 8.8 4
65 79958 COUPLING PLUG 504-24 1
66 79959 SEALING RUBBERSTEEL 216-24 1
67 76455 COUPLING PLUG 2" 504-32 1
68 78204 RUBBER WASHER 2" 1
69 - NOT CONNECT 0
70 700463 PRESSURECONTROL BLOCK 1
71 700471 DIR.CON.VALVEDG4V-3-24A 1 For Solenoid coil state part no 70422
72 79970 RELIEF VALVE 1
73 70084 PRESSURETEST 1
74 71866 COUPLING GE10-SR 1/4" 2
75 70940 COUPLING GE8-7/16"-20UNF-2B 1
76 63023 HOSE821-04/KL1200/P86/P87 1
77 58315 HOSE821-04/KL 350/P86/P87 1
78 70696 SCREW MC6S 5X 40 FZB 8.8 4
79 75376 SCREW MC6S 5X 70 12.9 4
80 79783 COUPLING RI-12-4-JE 1
81 71866 COUPLING GE10-SR 1/4" 1
82 76453 PLUG VSTIR 1" 1
83 70700 COUPLING VSTIR 3/4" 1
84 - NOT CONNECT 0
85 76920 TEMP/LEVEL INDICATOR HMFB 1 Option
86 49060 PRONAL BAG ASSY 1 Option
87 48031 PRESSUREGUARD 1 Option
88 77925 HEATER OE141/51 300W 1 Option
89 700749 EL.FILTER INDICATOR VM5 C.0 1 Option Pressure Filter
90 700750 EL.FILTER INDICATOR PSM2N-18NP 1 Option Return Filter
91 700673 FILTER ELEMENT PRESSURE 1
92 700674 FILTER ELEMENT RETURN 1
93 - NOT CONNECT 2 Included in Pos 4
94 - NOT CONNECT 1 Included in Pos 4
95 - NOT CONNECT 1 Included in Pos 4
96 - NOT CONNECT 1 Included in Pos 4
97 70073 COUPLING EVL20-S 1
98 76000 COUPLING KOR20-10 S 1
99 76506 COUPLING EVGE-10SR 1/4" 1

100 - NOT CONNECT 1 See Electric Part list

101 46753 MOUNTING DET.POWERPACK 4

Bromma Conquip 7-4- Dec. 02 rev.00

Bromma Group Manual

Spare parts list for

Telescopic Drive Assy

7-1- Nov. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 7-2- Nov. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

1 38070 TELESCOPIC DRIVE ASSY 1 See Draw ing SP-8
2 23756 TENSION ROD 1 FOR SSL40, SSX40, STR40,YSX40,YTR40
2 23748 TENSION ROD 1 FOR SSL45, SSX45, STR45,YSX45,YTR45
3 23757 TENSION ROD 1 FOR SSL40, SSX40, STR40,YSX40,YTR40
3 23749 TENSION ROD 1 FOR SSL45, SSX45, STR45,YSX45,YTR45
4 x SEE REMARKS 1 See Draw ing SP-9, SP-12
5 60747 CABLE CHAIN ASSY 45" 2 Include pos.19, 20,21,22,26,32,33
5 61137 CABLE CHAIN ASSY 45" 2 Include pos.19, 20,21,22,32,33 In STS45
5 37033 CABLE CHAIN ASSY 40" 2 Include pos.19, 20,21,22,26,32,33
6 38073 CHAIN ASSY 2 Include pos.6 and 7
7 61698 SHOCK ABSORBER 2 Includ pos. ,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18
8 53434 LINK SHOCK ABSORBER 1 Included in pos.7
9 59899 LINK L1=341 L2=381 1 Included in pos.7
10 59897 TUBE 35X2 L=196 1 Included in pos.7
11 53435 NUT SHOCK ABSORBER 1 Included in pos.7
12 71633 NUT M30 ML6M FZB 2 Included in pos.7
13 74686 NUT M30 LOC-KING FZB KLASS 8 1 Included in pos.7
14 75098 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB 2 Included in pos.7
15 75694 SCREW M6S 6X 55 FZB 8.8 2 Included in pos.7
16 75293 WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 4 Included in pos.7
17 71529 TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN 2 Included in pos.7
18 71686 CUP SPRING 71X36X4 No18 36 Included in pos.7
19 75421 SCREW MC6S 6X 22 FZB 8.8 6 Included in pos.5
20 75293 WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 6 Included in pos.5
21 75098 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB 6 Included in pos.5
22 37026 CABLE CHAIN 45 1 Include pos. 24,25,27,28
26 46771 PLATE 40 1 Not for STS45
29 47468 CHAIN SIMPLEX 1 1/2"177H 119 2 Included in pos.6
31 71512 CHAIN LOCK SIMPLEX 1 1/2" 177H 4 Included in pos.6
32 79520 SCREW MC6S 6X 12 FZB 2 Included in pos.5
33 75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 2 Included in pos.5
34 x SEE REMARKS 1 Not Valid

7-3- Nov. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

Bromma Group Manual

Spare parts list for Twistlock

Floating ISO 13357 (57046)
16061 (61692)

7-1- Nov. 02 vev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 7-2- Nov. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

0 61692 TWISTLOCK ASSY T.2 ISO FLOAT. 1 Include pos.1-3, 5-17, 19-26, 28-29
0 16061 TWISTLOCK ASSY T.1 ISO FLOAT. 1 Include pos.1-4, 6-17, 19-26, 28-29
1 16060 TWISTLOCK PIN ISO 1
2 22238 GUIDE BLOCK ISO FLOATING 1
3 53968 WASHER SPHERICAL 20X69.5/42.5 1
4 43653 TWISTLOCK ARM TYPE 1 1 See draw ing
5 57059 TWISTLOCK ARM TYPE 2 1 See draw ing
6 79098 KEY 12X 8X 20 TK DIN6885B 1
7 44524 NUT M39 TWISTLOCK FLOAT. 1
8 700647 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 1
9 54049 SPACER RING 2
10 74147 HYDRAULIC CYL. 32/20-100/85 1
11 37704 BLOCKADING PIN 1
12 70429 SPRING SF-TF 4,5X22X90 FZB 1
13 75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 1
14 75295 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB 2
15 74044 LOCK PIN R.R 3,0 2
16 71328 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" 2
17 74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 6
19 57095 PAD FOR SWITCH H=12 2
20 700763 SCREW M6S 6X100 FZB 8.8 4
21 700763 SCREW M6S 6X100 FZB 8.8 2
22 57069 PAD FOR SWITCH H=45 1
23 43654 BLOCKADING PIECE 1
24 75098 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB 1
25 75293 WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 2
26 46609 LOCKING PLATE 2
28 75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 12
29 79850 COVER PLATE DEP 4 3

7-3- Nov. 02 vev.00 Bromma Conquip

Bromma Group Manual

Spare parts list for Separating

Twinlift (STS 45)
This section shows only additional spare parts for the STS 45.
For all other spare parts, see spare parts list for the respective
module. (Main beam, Telescoping beam unit, Power pack etc.)

7-1- Feb. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

STS 45 General assembly

SP-POS PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

1 x Main Beam 1 See Draw ing SP-1
2 x Telescopic drive System 1 See Draw ing SP-2 and SP-30
3 x Tie Assembley 1 See Draw ing SP-31
4 x Tw in lift unit General assy 1 See Draw ing SP-32
5 x Sensor Arr. 20´, 40´, 45´Assy 1 See Draw ing SP-33
6 x Tw in frame left 1 See Draw ing SP-32
7 x Tw in frame right 1 See Draw ing SP-32
8 x Tw inlift box left and right 1 See Draw ing SP-32
9 x Tw inlift Tw istlock assy 1 See Draw ing SP-20
10 x Roof Assy 1 See Draw ing SP-34

x = not available as spare part

Bromma Conquip 7-2- Feb. 03 rev.01
 Bromma Group Manual

STS 45 Telescopic drive system

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

1 36794 HOOK 1
2 79150 BEARING GE30 1
3 48421 DISTANCE 1
4 48457 SHAFT 1
5 74983 SPLIT PIN 5.0X 40 FZB 3
6 79182 CYLINDRICAL BOLT HCB 25X 60 FZ 2
7 48370 HYDR.CYLIND.CAI 25-65/35-30/85 1
8 38095 TENSION ROD COMPLETE STS45 1
9 79288 CABLE CONNECTOR PROX 0.6 M STR 2
10 79134 PROXIMITY SWITCH PRESSURE 2

7-3- Feb. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

STS 45 Tie Assembly

Bromma Conquip 7-4- Feb. 03 rev.01

 Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

1 16086 TIE PLATE WELDMENT 2
2 23760 OUTER SUPPORT BEAM STS45 2
3 23759 MID SUPPORT BEAM STS45 1
4 400553 GLIDE PLATE 4
5 400287 SUPPORT PLATE 2
6 400559 OUTER GLIDE PLATE 6
7 400556 OUTER WASHER 6
8 400558 CENTER GLIDE PLATE 1
9 400557 CENTRAL WASHER 1
10 37797 SHAFT 2
11 75783 SCREW M6S 12X 50 FZB 8.8 14
12 75295 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB 14
13 70475 SCREW M6S 16X 50 FZB 8.8 6
14 74955 NUT M16 LOC-KING FZB 22
15 70283 SCREW M6S 16X 70h FZB 8.8 4
16 75226 SCREW M6S 8X 50 FZB 8.8 2
17 75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 4
18 75090 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB 2
19 79828 WASHER TBRSUB 17X42X8 FZB 24
20 75138 SCREW M6S 16X 60 FZB 8.8 12
21 48325 SHAFT 2
22 75732 SPLIT PIN 5.0X 71 FZB 2
23 37744 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER EH195 SHIFT 2 762mm stroke option
23 36674 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER EH195 SHIFT 2 800mm stroke standard
23 37276 HYDRAULIC CYL.EH195 SHIFT SPEC 2 700mm stroke option
23 37987 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER 25CA-125/75 2 375mm stroke option
24 700089 POTENTIOMETER L800 1
25 700225 PLUG FOR CYLINDER 36674,37744 1

7-5- Feb. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

STS 45 Twinlift unit

Bromma Conquip 7-6- Feb. 03 rev.01

 Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

1 16079 TWIN FRAME COMPLET.LEFT STS45 1
2 16078 TWIN FRAME COMPLET.RIGHT STS45 1
3 16468 TWIN LIFT BOX LEFT ISO STS45 1
4 16469 TWIN LIFT BOX RIGHT ISO STS45 1
5 61716 TWIN LIFT TWISTLOCK ASSY LEFT 1 See Draw ing SP-20
6 16068 TWIN LIFT TWISTLOCK ASSY RIGHT 1 See Draw ing SP-20
7 23528 TWINLIFT CYLINDER 1 Hydraulic Sealkit part no 700222
8 38090 SLIDE BEARING STS45 2
9 400274 WASHER STS45 9
10 75172 SCREW M6S 12X 30 FZB 8.8 2
11 75295 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB 6
12 37781 PLATE 2
13 49847 GLIDE BEARING TWIN EH195 2
14 70475 SCREW M6S 16X 50 FZB 8.8 8
15 70918 WASHER NORD-LOCK M16 FZB 8
16 49841 SHAFT TWIN EH195 2
17 49842 BUSHING TWIN EH195 2
18 75292 WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200 2
19 75052 NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB 2
20 400271 STOP STS45 2
21 75607 SCREW M6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 4
22 79265 SCREW MC6S 4X 25 FZB 8.8 4
23 75159 NUT M 4 LOC-KING FZB 4
24 75329 WASHER BRB 4.3X 9X0.8 FZB HB2 4
25 70142 CLAMP 01-110 PP 8
26 76914 CLAMP 02-214-PP 16
27 70145 CLAMP 02-218 PP (SIZE 2) 2
28 401124 BOLTING PLATE ASP 1 3
29 401125 BOLTING PLATE ASP 2 7
30 75669 SCREW M6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8 2
33 75101 SCREW M6S 6X 90 FZB 8.8 4
34 75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 22
36 700640 COVER PLATE DEP1 4
37 700641 COVER PLATE DEP2 7
38 75100 SCREW M6S 6X 45 FZB 8.8 16

The qty of parts from pos 7 only for one

Twinlift Unit

7-7- Feb. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

STS 45 Twinlift unit Twistlock

Bromma Conquip 7-8- Feb. 03 rev.01

 Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

0 16068 TWIN LIFT TWISTLOCK ASSY RIGHT 1 Include Pos. 1-4, 6-12, 14-29, 31-37
0 61716 TWIN LIFT TWISTLOCK ASSY LEFT 1 Include Pos. 1-3, 5-11, 13-29, 31-37
1 16060 TWISTLOCK PIN ISO 1
2 22238 GUIDE BLOCK ISO FLOATING 1
3 74147 HYDRAULIC CYL. 32/20-100/85 1
4 57059 TWISTLOCK ARM TYPE 2 1 See Draw ing
5 43653 TWISTLOCK ARM TYPE 1 1 See Draw ing
6 44524 NUT M39 TWISTLOCK FLOAT. 1
7 53968 WASHER SPHERICAL 20X69.5/42.5 1
8 37704 BLOCKADING PIN 1
9 70429 SPRING SF-TF 4,5X22X90 FZB 1
10 700647 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 1
11 75098 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB 3
12 61183 BRACKET RIGHT 1
13 23420 BRACKET LEFT 1
14 75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 1
15 75295 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB 1
16 49840 WASHER TWIN EH195 1
17 54049 SPACER RING 2
18 74044 LOCK PIN R.R 3,0 2
19 48916 SENSOR ATTACHMENT 4
20 79098 KEY 12X 8X 20 TK DIN6885B 1
21 71328 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" 2
22 57069 PAD FOR SWITCH H=45 1
23 74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 8
24 700685 SCREW M6S 6X130 FZB 8.8 2
25 700762 SCREW M6S 6X 50 FZB 8.8 4
26 75100 SCREW M6S 6X 45 FZB 8.8 2
27 75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 16
28 70142 CLAMP 01-110 PP 4
29 75669 SCREW M6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8 4
31 75212 SCREW M6S 6X 25 FZB 8.8 4
32 75293 WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 6
33 700640 COVER PLATE DEP 1 2
34 79850 COVER PLATE DEP 4 4
35 700641 COVER PLATE DEP 2 1
36 700646 SCREW M6S 6X 70 FZB 8.8 2
37 76914 CLAMP 02-214-PP 4

7-9- Feb. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

STS 45 Sensor Arrangement Assembly

* See Chapter 6.3 Electric System

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

0 38099 SENSOR ARR.ASSY 20'40'45'STS45 1 Include Pos.2-8 Item 1 Welded on Main Beam
1 38100 BRACKET ASSY 0 Welded on Main Beam
2 74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 8
3 48916 SENSOR ATTACHMENT 4
4 57095 PAD FOR SWITCH H=12 4
5 79850 COVER PLATE DEP 4 4
6 75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 8
7 700646 SCREW M6S 6X 70 FZB 8.8 8

STS 45 Roof Assy

SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE

1 48453 ROOF 1
2 75235 SCREW M6S 10X 35 FZB 8.8 4
3 75294 WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200 8
4 75119 NUT M10 LOC-KING FZB 4

Bromma Conquip 7-10- Feb. 03 rev.01

Bromma Group Manual instruction

7.4 Additional Drawings

This Chapter contains drawings and part lists for special

components valid only for this serial number.

7.4 -1- Nov. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Page 1 of 1

Article No: 1006805 FLIPPER ASSY, TYPE 1 date

Drawing No: 1006805 SPRING STEEL, SPLINES sign: RJ 2005-12-22
Serial No: BGS rev:
Customer:

Item Quant Title Material / Article No. Dwg No. Art. No. Remarks
1 1 GEAR BOX 1000307 1000307 CORNER FLIPPER TYPE 1
2 2 FLAT KEY 20x12x45 70320
3 4 SCREW M6S 20x110 FZB 76842
4 8 WASHER BRB 21x36 FZB 75292
5 4 NUT LOC-KING M20 FZB 75052
6 4 SPACER 47678 47678
7 1 FLIPPER ARM SPR. STEEL 23849 23849 LARGE SCOOP
 Page 1 of 1

Article No: 1006806 FLIPPER ASSY, TYPE 2 date

Drawing No: 1006806 SPRING STEEL, SPLINES sign: RJ 2005-12-22
Serial No: BGS rev:
Customer:

Item Quant Title Material / Article No. Dwg No. Art. No. Remarks
1 1 GEAR BOX 1000308 1000308 CORNER FLIPPER TYPE 2
2 2 FLAT KEY 20x12x45 70320
3 4 SCREW M6S 20x110 FZB 76842
4 8 WASHER BRB 21x36 FZB 75292
5 4 NUT LOC-KING M20 FZB 75052
6 4 SPACER 47678 47678
7 1 FLIPPER ARM SPR. STEEL 23849 23849 LARGE SCOOP
 Bromma Group Manual

8. Accessories
This chapter describes accessories for the BGS spreaders.
Accessories included in this delivery are marked in Chapter 3.
(Accessories included).
Some accessories may have been added after the spreader has
been delivered, notfication is then made in Chapter 9, Service
Notes.
For other special components see Chapter 7.4 (Additional
drawings for special components).

To ensure safe and harmless operation of the spreader it is

important to follow the instructions below and only use Bromma
spare parts when replacing components.

8-1- Jan. 03 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

BGS Accessories
8.15 LED signal lamps
Application
Bromma telescopic spreaders can be equipped with LED
signal lamps to inform the crane driver and other personnel if
the sprader has landed, (white or yellow), is unlocked (green)
or has locked (red) on a container. For twinlift spreaders a
fourth lamp is used to indicate twinboxes down (blue). For
mobile harbour crane spreaders the fourth lamp indicates
- Low power consumption tower in mid position (yellow).

- No Phantom color effect Description

The Bromma LED lamp assy consists of an aluminum bottom
- Low maintenance plate and 1-4 LED lights. They are available in 24VDC or
110/230VAC versions. The 24VDC models are equipped
- Excellent durability with a M12 connector. The 110/230 models come with 10 m
connection cable with an open end. The LED Lamp assy also
includes attachment screws, washers and nuts (M8 FZB).

Available models
LED Colors voltage Art. No. Rec. cable
Green, red, yellow 24 VDC 1001399

70396 (M12 open end 10 m)

Green, red, white 24 VDC 1001400

*10m open end included

*Green, red, yellow, blue 24 VDC 1001401
*Green, red, white, blue 24 VDC 1001402
Blue 24 VDC 1001403
Green, red 24 VDC 1001404

Red, green, yellow 24 VDC 1001479

*Green, red, white, yellow 24 VDC 1001883

Green, red, yellow 110/230VAC 1001405

Green, red, white 110/230VAC 1001406
10m open end included

Green, red, yellow, blue 110/230VAC 1001407

Green, red, white, blue 110/230VAC 1001408

Blue 110/230VAC 1001409
Green, red 110/230VAC 1001410
Red, green, yellow 110/230VAC 700919
Green, red, white, yellow 110/230VAC 1001884

8.15-1- Sept. 06 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Technical specifications
Model 24VDC 110/230VAC

Voltage range 21--30 VDC 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz

Power consumption per light aspect 3.2 W 2.5 W
Light intesity per light aspect (clear cupola) 40 cd 30 cd

Ambient air temperature from -40OC to +55OC

Relative humidity up to 98% at temperature up to +35OC
Salt mist conditions IEC 60068-2-11
Mechanical wibration 10-50 Hz with acceleration up to 10 g
Ingress protection IP68 (IEC 60529)
Material Cupola Hi tech polycarbonate Makrolon ®
Material Bottm plate 10 mm aluminum alloy powder coated (RAL9005)

Dimensions

Light
aspects A (mm) B (mm)

1 160 130
2 305 275
3 450 420
4 595 565

Spare parts
SP-POS PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS
1 75102 Screw M6S 8x30 4 FZB 8.8
2 75328 Washer BRB 8,4x16x1,5 8 FZB HB2
3 75090 Nut M8 LOC-KING 4 FZB
4 see page 1
5 1001415 Attachment stright 2 per LED
6 1002903 Attachment tilted 300 2 per LED
70396 Cable 10m for 24VDC

Warnings
CAUTION: LED light units are sources of bright light. Do
not stare directly into the beam from close distances and
observe all the warnings and guidelines in the instruction
manual. Bromma LED indicator panels are classified as
Class 2M LED devices according to the standard
IEC60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001.

Bromma Conquip 8.15-2- Sept. 06 rev.01

Bromma Group Manual

BGS Accessories
H.I.S. Height Indication
System

37991 115/230 V AC
37993 24V DC

37992 115/230 V AC PLC

37994 24V DC PLC

8-1- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Description
The system is based on ultrasonic sensors and is generally
used for indication to the crane pilot that the spreader is
approaching a container, or slowing the hoist down as the
spreader descends upon a container.

Two sensors have been chosen for redundancy and the

indicating signal is triggered if either of the sensors detect an
object below the spreader. The sensors are of two different
models and cannot interfere with each other´s operating
frequencies.
The range of the system is configurable (0,5-4 m) by setting
the sensors at the desired operating range to suit the ramp of
the hoist on the current crane.

Logic and redundancy can be located in the spreader or crane

PLC. In a case were an existing PLC is to be used, Bromma
will supply the block logic as a programming guideline. If no
PLC is available a heavy-duty controller can be provided for
this purpose.
Main Sensor
frame
The ultrasonic sensors are 24V DC and a power supply is
included for 115V AC and 230V AC systems.
Short
distance
position

Setting Crane slow speed

Crane slow speed: 10% of maximum speed or max 0.3m/s.
It is recommended to use the full sensing range of the sensors. Long
This distance can however be reduced based on experience distance
position
for each specific case.

Setting Switch Points

The two sensors are from different manufacturers, therefore
the method of setting the switch points is different.
LED on top
Sensor 1.1 (79579) of sensor
This sensor is provided with a switching output with two
programmable switch points. They are set by applying -24V Pins in sensor socket
for the long distance position or +24V for the short distance (Valid for both types)
position to the teaching input (pin no. 2 in sensor socket) for at
least 1 second.
The distance is programmed by holding a 100 mm by 100 mm
metal target in front of the sensor at the desired distance and
applying the proper voltage to Pin 2. The LED on the top of
the sensor indicates that the set point has been properly stored.
Bromma Conquip 8-2- Oct. 02 rev.00
 Bromma Group Manual

Controls P1
Sensor 2.1 (79580)
and P2 This sensor is equipped with two controls, P1 and P2.
The short distance position is set by P1 and the long distance
position by P2. LEDs located on the sensor indicate when the
target is detected.

For both sensors the long distance position should be set to

approximately 3 m (depending on crane type).
The short distance should be set as short as possible and by all
means kept above the bottom of the main frame.

Technical specifications

Sensor 79579 (FA) 79580 (SB)

Operating voltage 20-30 V DC 20-30 V DC

Rated operating current < 60mA < 50mA

Transducer frequency approx .85 kHz approx .120 kHz

Detection range 500-4000 mm 400-3000 mm

Protection class to
IP65 IP65
DIN40 050
Operating temp. range -25o C... +70o C -25o C ... +70o C
Storage temp. range -40o C... +85o C -40o C... +85o C

Spare parts
See chapter 6.3 Electrical system

8-3- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 8-4- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

BGS Accessories
8.5 Hour Counter
70779 (115V), 1015908 (115V)
70780(230V), 1015909 (230V)
70873(380V)
76139(24V)

Application
In order to maintain correct service intervals an hour counter can
be mounted in the electric cabinet. The counter is mounted on a
socket which in turn is fixed on a rail.

Function
The hour counter is connected to the hydraulic motor. (see chapt.
6.3 Electric system). The counter operates when the motor is
running. This is indicated by an LED in the front. The counter
cannot be reset. When it reaches its maximum (99999.99 h) it
restarts from 0.

Technical specifications

Counter 70779 70780 70783 701654 1015908 1015909 76139

Operating Voltage 115VAC 230VAC 380VAC 440VAC 115VAC 230VAC 24VDC
Numerals 1,5 x 3,5
Voltage tolrerance ± 10% ‐
Frequency 50 Hz 60Hz 50‐60Hz
Power Consumption ~ 10mA 1,4‐15mA
Protection DIN40050
Ambient Temp. ‐20 ˚to +70 ˚C
Weight 46g
Front 52 x 52 mm

8-1-Dec. 07 rev.01 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

BGS Accessories
Twistlock Counter
70782(230V), 70781(115V),
76140(24V)

Application
In order to maintain the correct service intervals a twistlock
counter can be mounted in the electric cabinet. The counter is
mounted directly on a rail.

Function
The twistlock counter is connected together with the twistlock
locked signal. (see chapt. 6.3 Electrical system). When the twist-
lock locked sensors gives a positve and a negative pulse the
counter increments one step. The counter cannot be reset. When
it reaches its maximum (9999999 pulses) it restarts from 0.

Technical specifications

Counter 70782 70781 70873

Operating Voltage 230V AC 115V AC 24V DC

Numerals 1.5 x 3.5 mm

Voltage tolerance + 10 % __

Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz __

Power consumption

Protection

Ambient temperature - 20oC to +70oC

Weight

Front 35x45 mm

8-1- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

Bromma Group Manual

BGS Accessories
HighTemperature indicator/Shut Off
Low Level indicator/Shut Off
76920
Application
This sensor is mounted on top of the hydraulic tank. It can be
used as a temperature indicator and a level indicator. The signal
from the sensor can be connected as a warning signal and/or as a
shut off function. (see Chapter 6.3 electical system).

Working principle
The float contains a magnet. It follows the fluid along the stem.
The stem is a non magnetic material with 1-5 built-in reed
switches. The magnet activates each reed switch for aprox. 10
mm. This is called a passing switch. To ensure that the contact
status remains unchanged, the stem is provided with a stop ring
below and above the float. This allows to determine whether the
level is rising or falling. The Contact status is defined with an
empty tank.

Temperature Switch
Level sensors may be equipped with built in over-temperature
protection, if specified. For this spreader the temperature
switches opens above +90oC.

Materials
Stem: Brass
Float: Buna-N (nitrofuel)
Junction box: Polyamid 6
Temp max: Oil + 100oC

Electrical Data

Contact rating * 80VA

max voltage 250 V
max current 1.3 A

* = resistive load
No ground = max 50 V

8-1- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Bromma Conquip 8-2- Oct. 02 rev.00

 OPERATION AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE FOR THE
BROMMA
TWIN TWENTY
DETECTION SYSTEM
(TTDS)

MARCH 2001
Revised APRIL 2002

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 1
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Table of Content

Introduction................................................................................................... 3
System Description........................................................................................................ 3
Sensing The Gap Between Containers ........................................................................ 6
Detecting a Container ................................................................................................... 6
Sensor Settings............................................................................................................... 7
Interface with Spreader and Crane Control............................................................... 8
Twin Twenty Detection By-Pass ................................................................................ 10
Maintenance................................................................................................................. 10
False Signals................................................................................................................. 10
Functional Description................................................................................................ 11
Limitations................................................................................................... 13
Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin Twenty
Detection System (TTDS)........................................................................... 14
Operation Mode Setting.............................................................................................. 14
Distance Setting ........................................................................................................... 14
Indication Lights ......................................................................................................... 14
Testing The Twin Twenty Detection System............................................ 16
Wiring .......................................................................................................... 17
Pin Layout.................................................................................................... 18
Spares ........................................................................................................... 19
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 20
Procedure to Trouble Shoot the Twin Twenty Detection System........................... 20
Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Sensor ........................... 23
Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Controller (TTDC) ...... 24
Procedure to Checking Cable to TTDS Controller.................................................. 25
Procedure to Checking Sensor ................................................................................... 27

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 2
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Introduction
System Description
The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) is designed to sense the existence of two-
twenty foot containers in a forty foot ship’s cell by detecting the gap between the two containers
or the sagging of the two containers. The twin twenty detection system is a tool to assist the
operator in detecting the dangerous situation of two twenty foot containers under a spreader
positioned in the 40 foot position.

The majority of twin twenty conditions consist of two typical containers, although there are
several other variables to consider. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System was designed
to detect as many types of flatrack and tank containers as possible without unnecessarily shutting
down operations.

Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System uses a seven sensor cluster to avoid many of the false
indications that plague other twin twenty detection systems. Many twin twenty detection systems
cannot differentiate between a twin twenty condition and an open top container, canvas tops, tank
container, and lifts with overheights. The Bromma twin twenty detection system is designed to
give a “go” signal during these lifts. By reducing the amount of false twin twenty indications that
need to be bypassed, Bromma can offer a more reliable and productive system.

The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System uses a cluster of seven photoelectric sensors
located in the center of the main frame. See Figure 1. The five inner sensors are used to locate a
gap between two containers. The two outer sensors, S95 and S96, along with the two outer
sensors on the center cluster, S90 and S94 are used to detect the existence of the containers. The
system can detect a 38mm (1-1/2”) gap with a range of plus or minus 28mm (1-1/8”) from the
center of the spreader.

The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System can also detect an unsafe twin twenty lift even is
the containers where butted together and there was no gap. The idea is based on the fact that an
unsafe twin twenty lift will lift the ends of the containers that are locked on to the spreader and
ends at the center will not be lifted. By setting the outer sensors lower than the inner sensors,
there will be an area where the TTDS will send an unsafe twin twenty lift even when no gap
exists. When the outer ends of the container are lifted beyond the setting of the inner sensors, the
TTDS go permissive will be switched off. The outer sensors should still detect the presence of
the containers. The TTDS will interrupt the go permissive until the spreader is lifted beyond the
range of the outer sensors. This means when the twistlocks are locked and the TTDS senses an
unsafe lift, the hoisting should stop. Figure 2 shows the condition where the twistlock are locked
and the outer ends of the containers are being lifted, but the ends at the center are not. The TTDS
will determine that this condition is an unsafe twin twenty lift and discontinue the go permissive.
Figure 3 show a typical unsafe twin twenty lift that will be detected by the TTDS.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 3
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Figure 1

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 4
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Figure 2

Figure 3

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 5
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

The Bromma TTDS can be mounted anywhere along the center of the spreader. It is
recommended that the TTDS be mounted inside the main frame for maximum protection.

The twin twenty detection system is designed so a failure of a sensor will not cause the system to
fail and send a "go" signal during a twin twenty condition. Because the definition of a gap is two
or more sensors, the system will not shut down if one of the gap sensors fails. The system will
become more sensitive to a twin twenty condition. A failure is defined by a failure of the sensor,
the relay wired to the sensor, or a loose connection.

The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) is not intended nor will it detect all
possible twin twenty conditions. The Limitation Section outlines the situations where the twin
twenty detection system may give a false twin twenty indication or fail to give an indication.

Sensing The Gap Between Containers

The Bromma TTDS can detect a minimum of 38mm (1-1/2”) gap between the containers. The
Bromma TTDS defines a gap as two or more consecutive sensors not detecting an obstruction in
their view path. Two consecutive sensors are used to define a gap to avoid false readings due to
damage or variations of the containers.

The center of the gap between containers does not have to fall in the center of the spreader. The
spreader could be as much as 28 mm (1-1/8”) from the center of the gap due to the spreader being
landed toward one end of the container, floating twistlocks, or the flexibility of the spreader. For
this reason, the gap sensing cluster is made up of five sensors to achieve a plus or minus 28mm
(1-1/8”) range. Because of the physical size of the sensors, the sensors are mounted in two rows.
The two rows are staggered so any one sensor is halfway between the sensors before and after.

Detecting a Container
The two outer sensors, S95 and S96, of the twin twenty detection system are the primary sensors
for detecting the existence of a container. The two outer sensors of the gap cluster, sensors S90
and S94, are used as secondary container sensors for tank containers and flat racks. If these four
sensors do not detect a container, the twin twenty detection system will allow the container to be
locked and lifted. This situation will occur on forty foot open top containers or loose fitting
canvas topped containers.

If any of the four container sensing sensors detects a container, the control is transferred to the
gap sensing sensors. If two consecutive sensors do not detect the container, the TTDS will not
give the “go” permissive.

The two outer sensors, S90 and S95, are located 114mm (4-1/2”) from the center of the spreader
to ensure that two twenty foot containers are detected no matter where they are in the ship cell.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 6
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Sensor Settings
The inner sensors should be set low enough to detect sagging canvas tops but not too low where it
will detect the load in an open top container. It is a known fact that two twenty foot containers
can be lifted in a cell by a spreader in single container mode. The bottom of the containers will
ride the cell guide and allow the crane to lift the two containers. Once the containers leave the
cell, the ends at the center will drop and in most cases the container will fall. Even in the cells the
ends of the container at the center will be lower in relation to the ends attached to the spreader.
The inner sensors must be set so they go from high to low state in the event that two twenty foot
containers are lifted in the cells.

When two twenty foot containers are lifted in a cell, the end of the container at the center will be
5.4 inches [137 mm] lower than the ends supported by the spreader. To ensure that the inner
sensors do not detect the container in this configuration, the inner sensors should be set so that the
range is 5 1/4 inches [133.4 mm] below the twistlock housings. Deflection of the spreader and
the 9/16 inch [14 mm] difference between the seated and the loaded position will ensure that the
inner sensor will not detect the container if this condition occurs. Since the TTDS is located in
different positions and the sensors are not mounted at the same elevation, it is best to set the
sensors based on the bottom of the main beam. The type of spreader will determine the range of
the inner sensors. See Table 1 for recommended inner sensor settings for different spreaders.

Since the spreader will travel lower than the theoretical spreader height when it is landed on a
container, the inner sensors will extend approximately 7 inches [178 mm] past the top of the
container when the spreader is landed. On all but canvas top containers, this engagement should
be adequate. The amount of the sag in the canvas top will determine if a canvas top container
will give a false indication.

In the case where an unsafe twin twenty lift occurs outside the cells, the ends at the center will not
be lifted. This means the outer sensors need to be set so that once the go permissive has been
interrupted, the hoist should stop before the containers are lifted out of the range of the outer
sensors. On faster cranes where the stopping distance is too long, logic in the crane should be
added to watch for the interruption of the go permissive with the twistlock locked and the
spreader not landed. Once a predetermined time period without the go permissive has been
reached with the twistlock locked, the hoist should be stopped, even if the go permissive returns.
When the containers have been lifted high enough the outer sensors will no longer be able to
detect the containers and the go permissive will be given. Bromma recommend a sensor setting
of 12 inches [305 mm] greater than the inner sensors. The stopping distance of the crane will
determine if additional crane logic will be needed. The difference between the inner sensor
setting and the outer sensor setting needs to be greater than the stopping distance of the crane, or
additional crane logic will be needed to properly detect the unsafe twin twenty condition. If the
settings are less than the stopping distance of the crane, the hoist will be interrupted and then the
hoist will coast until the containers are outside the range of the outer sensors then the go
permissive will be given and the hoist will be able to rise again. Only a pause will be seen.

See Table 1 for recommended outer sensor settings for different spreaders.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 7
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Table 1 Sensor Settings for Different Spreaders

Inner Sensor Setting Outer Sensor Setting

Type of Spreader (Inches from Bottom of (Inches from Bottom
Main Beam) of Main Beam)
[Millimeters] [Millimeters]
New Type ASX-7 & BSL-6, AST-6, & BST-6 16 28
(12 1/4” from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) [405 mm] [710 mm]
AST-6SCH 15 1/8” 27 1/8”
(12 1/4” from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) [384 mm] [689 mm]
Old Style ASX-7 and BSL-6 13 ¼ 25 ¼
(9 ½” from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) [337 mm] [640 mm]
ASX-7 & BSL-6, AST-6, & BST-6 Spreaders with INRS 18 30
Gable Ends [457 mm] [762 mm]
AST-6SCH 17 1/8” 29 1/8”
with INRS Gable Ends [435 mm] [740 mm]
SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with Standard 16 ¾ 28 ¾”
Gable ends (6 3/4” [172 mm] from Bottom T/L Housing to [425 mm] [730 mm]
Gable Tube)
SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with Bromma 22 3/8” 34 3/8”
Classic Gable ends (12 3/4” [342 mm] from Bottom T/L [568 mm] [873 mm]
Housing to Gable Tube)
SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 23 7/8” 35 7/8”
with INRS Gable Ends [606 mm] [911 mm]

Interface with Spreader and Crane Control

The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System should be tied into the spreader position circuit to
deactivate the system when the spreader is in the 20 or 45 foot position. In the case of a twin
twenty spreader, the system should also be tied into the center housing down circuit so the system
is deactivated when the housings are down. The TTDS should be tied into the hoisting circuit. In
the event the system is fooled by a small gap between the containers, the twistlocks can be locked
and the containers could be lifted. As the two containers are lifted, the outer ends of the container
are lifted beyond the setting of the inner sensors, the TTDS go permissive will be switched off.
The hoist should then stop, only if the system is tied into the locked hoist permit. The twin
twenty detection indication should not affect the lowering of the spreader or the unlocking of the
twistlocks.

The stopping distance of the crane determines if the hoisting of the container will stop within the
range of the outer sensors. The stopping distance of the crane is based on a number of
parameters, acceleration rate, deceleration rate and the hoist speed. Since each crane is set up
differently, testing the actual crane may be the only way to determine if the 12 inches [305 mm]
difference between the inner and outer sensors will be enough to stop the hoist. A test to
determine if only the difference in sensor settings will be enough to stop the hoist is described
below.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 8
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

On faster cranes the sensor settings may not be enough to stop the hoist. When the TTDS is
fooled by the two containers butted together and the two containers are lifted, the go permissive
will be interrupted, but since the crane can not stop quickly, the spreader will be lifted passed the
range of the outer sensors and the go permissive will be sent again. If no other logic is in the
crane PLC, the hoist will start again. To avoid this, one of the two crane logic options should be
added to the PLC.

• The first option would be to place TTDS latching logic to stop the hoist and keep it
stopped if the go permissive is interrupted for a half a second to one second when the
twistlocks are locked. The only way to hoist would be to cycle the twistlocks to the
unlock position or active the Twin Twenty Detection bypass. The TTDS latching logic
would need to be added in the PLC. It should be noted that is not a good idea to stop the
hoist and keep it stopped based on just the interruption of the go permissive. As the
spreader is landing or the containers are lifted, the TTDS will interrupt the go permissive
momentarily as the sensors adjust to a different status. The interruption of the go
permissive should be continuous over a period of time from 0.5 to 1 seconds.

• The second option would be to keep the hoist in slowdown mode for 2 second after lifting
the containers. This would allow the hoist to be stopped within the range of the outer
sensors.

Testing the Stopping Distance of the Crane

The following test can be done to check if the TTDS sensor setting and crane controls are
properly set to stop an unsafe twin twenty lift.

The first test should be performed without addition TTDS latching logic in the PLC to check if
the sensor settings would be all that is necessary.

• Properly set the TTDS sensors.

• Place two empty twenty foot containers on the ground so that the ends are butted
together.
• Land the spreader on the containers with the center housings up.
• Tape a large piece of cardboard (18” by 24”) to the top of the containers directly under
the TTDS sensors.
• Lock the twistlocks to the outside ends of the containers.
• The operator should lift the containers at full stick. (Note: The containers should only be
lifted about two to three feet)
• If the TTDS is set properly and the proper hoist interrupts are in place, the TTDS will
stop the hoist and it should remain stopped.
• Activate the Twin Twenty Detection Bypass to see if it is working properly.
• Check to see if the crane can hoist the containers with the Twin Twenty Detection Bypass
active. (Only lift the containers slightly).

If the test properly stops the hoisting of the containers, repeat the test two more times. If all three
attempts are successfully, then additional logic in the PLC is not needed.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 9
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

If any of the attempts fail to stop the hoist, the TTDS latching logic or the hoist slowdown needs
to be included in the PLC logic and the test should be repeated. If the TTDS latching logic is
used, start with a timer set for 1 second. Continue to reduce the time setting until the TTDS
properly stops the hoisting of the containers.

Twin Twenty Detection By-Pass

Since there is a possibility that the TTDS will indicate a twin twenty condition when it is landed
on a forty foot container or flat rack, the system must be equipped with a method to override the
system. To do this, a twin twenty bypass should be placed either on the crane or on the spreader.
The bypass should be keyed and only operated by authorized maintenance personnel. The bypass
should be used only after the situation has been checked thoroughly. When the twin twenty
bypass is activated, an audible alarm should be sounded to warn the workers that the bypass is
active. It is the customer’s responsibility to determine if a twin twenty condition exists when the
bypass is activated.

Maintenance
Normal maintenance of the system includes testing the system according to the Testing the Twin
Twenty Detection System Section (attached) and cleaning the lenses. The operation of the system
should be checked at every maintenance period to ensure the proper operation of the system. The
lenses should also be cleaned at every maintenance period. The sensor will become more
sensitive as the lens become dirty and the system will indicate a twin twenty condition where
there is none.

False Signals
Some ports have encounter false twin twenty indications during heavy rains. A puddle can form
directly beneath the sensor cluster and the wind and rain can produce ripple in the puddle. The
reflective nature of the puddle and the ripples abnormally disperses the light from the sensors,
leading to the TTDS indicating a twin twenty condition. The system should be bypassed until the
container is unloaded.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 10
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Functional Description
The twin twenty detection system (TTDS) is designed to stop the twistlocks from locking if a
twin twenty condition is detected. The system is also tied into the locked hoist permissive to stop
the hoist if the system is fooled and the twistlocks are locked. The twin twenty detection signal
should only stop the twistlocks from locking when the spreader is in the 40 foot position or the
position of the spreader is unknown and the center housings are up. A keyed bypass switch
labeled TWIN TWENTY DETECTION BYPASS, should be installed in a convenient location to
bypass the twin twenty detection system. The bypass should only be used after the twin twenty
situation has been checked. An alarm should sound when the bypass switch is activated to warn
the worker that a bypass is active.

The crane logic must contain the following interlocks for proper use of the TTDS:

• The crane logic must block the operator from locking the twistlocks when a TTDS go
permissive is not given.

• The crane logic must block the operator from hoisting the spreader and container when the
twistlocks are locked and a TTDS go permissive is not given.

The TTDS is bypassed under certain condition and a TTDS “go” permissive will be sent from the
spreader. The logic in the crane should also include the bypasses to mimic the spreader. The
valid TTDS “go” permissives that need to be supplied by the crane logic are as follows.

Valid TTDS “go” permissives supplied by crane control:

• Spreader in 20 foot position.

• Spreader in 45 foot position.

• Center Housings are down.

• The Twin Twenty Detection Bypass is activated

The twin twenty detection indication should not affect anything when the spreader is in the 20 or
45 foot position, the twistlocks are unlocked or the center housings are down. The twin twenty
detection indication should not effect the lowering of the spreader or the unlocking of the
twistlocks.

If the twin twenty detection indication effects the lowering of the hoist, then the crane may be
stuck in a position it cannot recover. If the system is fooled and the twistlocks are locked, the
TTDS can sense the sagging of the container at the center of the spreader and interrupt the “go”
permissive and stop the hoist. Without the ability to lower the spreader and unlock the twistlocks,
the containers will be stuck partial lifted.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 11
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

If the twin twenty detection indication effects the hoisting of the crane with the twistlocks
unlocked, the operator will not be able to raise the spreader to put down the center housing or the
spreader will not be able to be removed to check to see if there are two twenty foot containers.

Both of these conditions can be overcome using the twin twenty indication bypass, but frequent
use of the bypass will be a nuisance. If the use of the bypass becomes routine, then the operator
may use the bypass when there is a twin twenty condition just out of habit. Bromma strongly
recommends that each twin twenty occurrence be thoroughly checked before the bypass is used.

The logic for the twin twenty detection system is contained on the spreader. The logic on the
spreader should be imitated in the PLC. The logic must be installed and maintained to ensure the
safe operation of the spreader.

There may be a momentary loss of the twin twenty detection permissive during the landing of the
container as the photosensors adjust to their new status.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 12
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Limitations
The limitations of the twin twenty detection system are (see Figure 4):

1. There must be a 1-1/2 inch gap between the containers where the twin twenty detection
system is sensing.

2. There must be a support between the end corner castings near the top of the container or flat
rack. The support must be at least 3 inches thick and the side of the support cannot be more
than 2 inches from the end of the corner castings.

3. The maximum recess along the top of a container between the corner castings is 2".

4. The twin twenty detection system has given false twin twenty indications during heavy rains.

Figure 4

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 13
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin

Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Use the attached Figure 5 as reference

Operation Mode Setting

1. The operation mode screw is mounted on the front face of the sensor.

2. Rotate the mode screw to D for Dark On or to L for Light On.

3. Photoelectric Sensors S90 thru S94 are set Light On. Photoelectric Sensors S95 and 96 are
set Dark On.

Distance Setting
1. Determine the type of spreader. Using Table 1, find the settings for the inner and outer
sensors for the spreader.

2. Place a black mat object the proper distance +/- ¼ inches [6 mm] from the bottom of the
main beam for setting the inner sensors.

3. Rotate the sensor distance adjustment screw on the inner sensors until the photoelectric
sensor is activated.

4. Repeat the procedure until all five inner photoelectric sensors are set.

5. Place a black mat object the proper distance +/- ¼ inches [6 mm] from the bottom of the
main beam for setting the outer sensors.

6. Rotate the sensor distance adjustment screw on the outer sensors until the photoelectric
sensor is activated.

7. Repeat the procedure until both the outer photoelectric sensors are set.

Indication Lights
The green indicating light is illuminated when there is a stable light or dark condition.

The red indicating light is illuminated when the output is active.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 14
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Figure 5

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 15
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Testing The Twin Twenty Detection System

Items in parenthesis are for Twin Twenty Spreaders Only

Accepted
Description (Initials) Date
Check each sensor individually to see if the green LED lights on each
sensor are illuminated.
Check each sensor individually to see that the red LED lights changes state
when an object is place 6 inches below the sensor.
With the twistlocks unlocked, (the center housings up) and the spreader in
the 40-foot position, place an object about 6 inches below all the sensors.
The LED lights on each sensor should be checked to make sure the sensor is
tripped. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not
light.
Clear the area 20 inches under the sensors. With the twistlocks unlocked,
the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot
position, check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock
and the twin twenty light should not light.
With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and
the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6”
directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will
lock. The twistlocks should not lock and the twin twenty light should light.
With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and
the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6”
directly below the other outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will
lock. The twistlocks should not lock and the twin twenty light should light.
With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and
the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6”
directly below all of the sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock.
The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light.
With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and
the spreader in the 20-foot position, place an object approximately 6”
directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will
lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light.
With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housing up) and
spreader in the 45-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly
below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock.
The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light.
With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, the center housing down and
spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly
below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock.
The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light.
(This step is for Twin Twenty Spreaders Only)

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 16
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Wiring
Figure 6 shows the typical wiring scheme for the TTDS. See the electrical schematic of the
spreader to determine the actual wiring.

Figure 6

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 17
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Pin Layout

10 m

Male Socket on TTDS Main Cable with Plug

The following is the pin layout for the main cable.

Wire No. Pin No. Function

1 A Power
2 B Neutral
YL/GR C Equipment Ground
3 D Common Supply Relay 1
4 E TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.O.)
5 F TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.C.)
6 G Common Supply Relay 2
7 H TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.O.)
8 I TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.C.)
9 J Fault Override (115 VAC)

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 18
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Spares

The following is a list of typical spares. See the electrical wiring diagram of the spreader to
determine the actual parts used.

Part No. Description

38272 Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 120 VAC
38273 Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 220 VAC
38271 Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 24 VDC
38274 Main Cable
RST3RKWT4/3-631/.6M Cable Between TTDC and Sensors
UZD355A Photoelectric Sensor

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 19
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Troubleshooting
Procedure to Trouble Shoot the Twin Twenty Detection System
This procedure is used for Twin Twenty Detection Systems with the Bromma TTDS controller
another procedure is used to troubleshoot the TTDS with relays.

Position the spreader so it is raised at least three (3) feet from the ground in the area of the twin
twenty detection system. There will be one relay mounted in the main junction box that is the
“go” permissive for the twin twenty detection system. Check the electrical schematic for the
spreader to determine the relay number for the “go” permissive. For this document, the “go”
permissive relay will be called R100. When Relay 100 is powered, the go permissive is given. If
Relay 100 is not on, then the twin twenty detection system is indicating a twin twenty condition.
See Figure 1 for the sensor configuration.

™ Check to see that the cables number corresponds to the sensor number. See Figure 1 for the
sensor configuration. Cable S90 is on sensor S90, Cable S91 is on sensor S91, Cable S92
is on sensor S92, Cable S93 is on sensor S93, Cable S94 is on sensor S94, Cable S95 is on
sensor S95 and Cable S96 is on sensor S96.

• Reconnect the cables to the proper sensors if the cabling is not correct.

™ When there is no object under the sensor cluster, the green LED lights should be lit on all
the sensors. The red LED light should be illuminated on sensors S95 and S96. The LED
light on Relay 100 should be illuminated.

• If the green LED light on some sensors is not illuminated and illuminated on other
sensors, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the sensor may be bad or the controller
may be bad. First, check the sensor according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking
Sensors”. If the sensor is not bad, check the cable to the bad sensor according the
attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensor Cable”. If the cable to the sensor is not bad,
replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin
Twenty Detection System Controller.”

• If none of the green LED lights on the sensors are illuminated, the cable to the TTDS
controller may be bad or the controller is bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS
controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS
Controller”. If the wiring is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to the
attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”

™ Place masking tape over the face of the outside sensor S95. The red LED light should go
off. The LED light in Relay 100 will not be illuminate.

• If the red LED light does not go out, check the sensor according to the attached,
“Procedure For Checking Sensors”.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 20
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

• If the LED light in Relay R100 does not go out, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the
cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the
wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking
Cable to TTDS Controller”. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad, check the
cable to the bad sensor according the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensor
Cable”. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to
the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”

™ Remove the masking tape from sensor S95. Place masking tape over the face of sensor
S96. The red LED light should go off. The LED light in Relay 100 will not be illuminate.

• If the red LED light does not go out, check the sensor according to the attached,
“Procedure For Checking Sensors”.

• If the LED light in Relay R100 does not go out, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the
cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the
wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking
Cable to TTDS Controller”. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad, check the
cable to the bad sensor according the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensor
Cable”. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to
the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”

™ Place the masking tape back onto sensor S95, then individually add masking tape to sensors
S90, S91, S92, S93 and S94. When the tape is placed on the sensor, the red LED light on
the sensor should illuminate.

• If the red LED light does not illuminate, check the sensor according to the attached,
“Procedure For Checking Sensors”.

™ After all the sensors have been covered. The LED light on Relay 100 should illuminate.

• If the LED light in Relay R100 does not illuminate, the cable to the TTDS controller
may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS
controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS
Controller”. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad replace the TTDS
controller according to the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection
System Controller.”

™ Check the logic in the TTDS controller by removing the tape from two sensors. See the list
below for the proper pair of sensors. The LED light in Relay 100 should go out. If the
LED light in Relay 100 goes out, replace the tape and uncover the next pair.

Sensors S90 and S91

Sensors S91 and S92
Sensors S92 and S93
Sensors S93 and S94

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 21
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

• If the LED light in Relay R100 does not go out, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the
cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the
wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking
Cable to TTDS Controller”. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad, check the
cable to the bad sensor according the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensor
Cable”. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to
the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”

™ If everything has worked properly to this point and the system is still not functioning
properly on the spreader, check the wirings to the relay according to the attached
“Procedure to Check the Wiring to the “Go” Permissive Relay

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 22
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Sensor

™ Remove the sensor cluster from the spreader by removing the bottom locknuts on the
cluster shock mounts (See Figure 1).

™ Remove cluster from mounting brackets.

™ Remove screws and wiring from sensor. The sensors are held in place by two screws.

™ Separate the bad sensors from the other sensors. Note the location of sensors in cluster.

™ Unscrew the sensor cable form the sensor.

™ Reinstall the sensor cable onto the new sensor.

™ Reinstall the sensor back into the cluster and make sure all sensors are back in their proper
order.

™ Place the sensor cluster back on the support brackets and replace the shock mount nuts.

™ Set the new sensor according to “Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma
Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)”

™ Retest the Twin Twenty Detection System according to “Procedure to Trouble Shoot Twin-
Twenty Detection System”.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 23
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Controller (TTDC)

™ Disconnect the cables to the sensors at the TTDC.

™ Disconnect the main cable to the TTDC.

™ Remove the nut holding the TTDC.

™ Remove the TTDC.

™ Place the new TTDC on the shock mounts.

™ Reinstall the nut on the shock mounts.

™ Reinstall the main cable to the TTDC.

™ Reinstall the sensor cable to the TTDC. Make sure the cables are connected to the proper
connections.

™ Retest the Twin Twenty Detection System according to “Procedure to Trouble Shoot Twin-
Twenty Detection System”.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 24
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Procedure to Checking Cable to TTDS Controller

™ Before checking the cable, check all the connections of the cable to the terminal strips.
Look for loose screws, bad crimps and frayed strands.

• If any bad connections are found, repair and retest the TTDS

™ If a spare cable is available, temporarily wire the cable in the junction box. Disconnect the
existing cable and plug in the spare cable. Retest the TTDS.

• If the TTDS operates properly, then replace the existing cable. If the TTDS is not
functioning properly, reconnect the existing cable and follow the Procedure to Trouble
Shoot the TTDS to determine the cause of the problem.

™ If a spare cable is not available, unplug the cable from the TTDC with the power off. Turn
on the power. Carefully with a voltmeter meter, place one probe on Pin A and the other to
Pin B. The voltmeter meter should read the proper voltage (24 VDC, 115 VAC or 220
VAC). See the electrical schematic to determine the proper voltage.

• If the meter does not show any voltage, measure and verify with the voltmeter that the
proper voltage in on the wire terminations in the junction box. If not repair the problem
in the junction box. If the proper voltage exists on the wire terminations, replace the
cable.

™ If the meter reads the proper voltage, Carefully with an voltmeter meter, place one probe on
Pin G and the other to Pin B. The ohm meter should read the proper voltage (24 VDC, 115
VAC or 220 VAC). See the electrical schematic to determine the proper voltage.

• If the meter does not show any voltage, measure and verify with the voltmeter that the
proper voltage in on the wire terminations in the junction box. If not repair the problem
in the junction box. If the proper voltage exists on the wire terminations, replace the
cable.

™ If the meter reads the proper voltage, remove the power on the spreader. With the ohm
meter set to check for continuity, check each of the wires for continuity. The following
chart shows the pin out for the cable.

Wire No. Pin No. Function

1 A Power
2 B Neutral
YL/GR C Equipment Ground
3 D Common Supply Relay 1
4 E TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.O.)
5 F TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.C.)
6 G Common Supply Relay 2
7 H TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.O.)

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 25
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

8 I TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.C.)

9 J Fault Override (115 VAC)

• If the meter shows any breaks in the cable, replace the cable.

™ If no breaks are found, follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the
cause of the problem.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 26
 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Procedure to Checking Sensor

™ If a spare cable is available, remove the suspected cable and install the spare cable. Retest
the TTDS.

• If the TTDS operates properly, then keep the spare cable installed. If the TTDS
is not functioning properly, reconnect the existing cable and look for another
problem.

™ If a spare cable is not available, unplug the cable from the TTDC and the sensor.
With the ohm meter set to check for continuality, check each of the wires for
continuity.

• If the meter shows any breaks in the cable, replace the cable.

™ If no breaks are found, follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the
cause of the problem.

BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 27
 Bromma Group Manual

9. Service Notes, Feedback

9.1 Service Notes
To be able to follow up the history of this spreader it is of great
importance to make notes of all service measures and
replacement of spare parts. This can be done below.

Start up procedure
Comments:

Date Signature

Maintenance after 50 h
Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil

Comments:

Date Signature

Maintenance after 100 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected
Date Signature

Maintenance after 200 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected
Date Signature

* only valid for twinlift spreaders

9-1- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 300 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 400 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 500 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension
Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Date Signature

Maintenance after 600 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 700 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Bromma Conquip 9-2- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 800 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 900 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 1000 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected

Lubrication Glide plates

check
Comments:

Date Signature

Maintenance after 1100 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 1200 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

9-3- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 1300 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 1400 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 1500 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension
Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Date Signature

Maintenance after 1600 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 1700 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Bromma Conquip 9-4- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 1800 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 1900 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 2000 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected

Lubrication Glide plates

check
Comments:

Date Signature

Maintenance after 2100 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 2200 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

9-5- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 2300 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 2400 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 2500 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension
Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Date Signature

Maintenance after 2600 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 2700 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Bromma Conquip 9-6- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 2800 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 2900 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 3000 h

Twistlock crack Hydraulic system * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
detection pressure, roller attachments inspected
leakage and tighten tightened
Lubrication Glide plates
renew
Comments:

Date Signature

Maintenance after 3100 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 3200 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

9-7- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 3300 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after3 400 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 3500 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension
Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Date Signature

Maintenance after 3600 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 3700 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Bromma Conquip 9-8- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 3800 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 3900 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 4000 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected

Lubrication Glide plates

check
Comments:

Date Signature

Maintenance after 4100 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 4200 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

9-9- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 4300 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 4400 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 4500 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension
Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Date Signature

Maintenance after 4600 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 4700 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Bromma Conquip 9-10- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 4800 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 4900 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 5000 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected

Lubrication Glide plates

check
Comments:

Date Signature

Maintenance after 5100 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 5200 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

9-11- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 5300 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 5400 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 5500 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension
Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Date Signature

Maintenance after 5600 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 5700 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Bromma Conquip 9-12- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after 5800 h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after 5900 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 6000 h

Twistlock crack Hydraulic system * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
detection pressure, roller attachments inspected
leakage and tighten tightened
Lubrication Glide plates
renew
Comments:

Date Signature

Maintenance after6100 h
Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after 6200 h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

9-13- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

Maintenance after .......... h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails

check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Positioning sensors
inspected

Date Signature

Maintenance after ..........h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after .......... h

Lubrication Renew filter Renew hydraulic oil Check chain tension
Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments: Date Signature

Maintenance after .......... h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Maintenance after .......... h

Twistlock Hydraulic system pressure, * Ties, bearing beams, Bottom rails
check leakage and tighten roller attachments tightened inspected
Comments:
Date Signature

Bromma Conquip 9-14- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

9.2 Feedback
In our efforts to evaluate both the products and the manuals it
is of great value for BROMMA to receive your opinion and
experience from daily usage.
We would be grateful if you could take a few minutes of your
time and fill in the applicable parts in the form below.
The Product

Spreader type Serial No Date of delivery

Approx. operating time Company Date

Name

1. Did the product fulfil your expectations?

Not at all Not in all aspects Acceptable Yes, in most aspects Yes,very much so

2. Is there something you miss or find unsatisfactory about this product?

3. Is there something you find unnecessary on this product?

Service and spare parts

4. In your experience have you received the help and support from BROMMA you expected?
Not at all Not in all aspects Acceptable Yes, in most aspects Yes,very much so

5. Is it easy to find the spare parts you need to order?

Not at all Not in all aspects Acceptable Yes, in most aspects Yes, very easy

6. Do you find it easy to order the requested spare parts ? (BROMMA E-Commerce)

Not at all Not in all aspects Acceptable Yes, in most aspects Yes, very easy

7. How do you find the pricing of the BROMMA spare parts ?

Cheap Acceptable High Expensive

9-15- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

8. How do you find the delivery time of the BROMMA spare parts ?
Slow Acceptable Fast

9. Do you have any other viewpoints about the service and spare parts?

This Manual
10. Is it easy to find the information needed in this manual?
Not at all Not in all aspects Acceptable Yes, in most aspects Yes, very easy

11. Is it easy to understand the symbols, illustrations and the text in this manual?
Not at all Not in all aspects Acceptable Yes, in most aspects Yes, very easy

12. Is there any information you miss in this manual?

13. Is there any unnecessary information in this manual?

14. Do you have any other comments about this manual?

15. Will you recommend your company to purchase more products from BROMMA?
No No opinion Yes

Thank you for taking your time. Please send this form to:
BROMMA Conquip AB
Aftersales & Service Dept.
Krossgatan 31-33
SE 162 50 Vällingby
Sweden
You can also send it by fax to: +46 8 7393703

Bromma Conquip 9-16- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

10. Index Introduction

Keywords are represented in alphabetical order. The numbers
after the keywords refer to the applicable chapter and page within
that chapter.
Example: Drain plug 6.4-14, 6.4-15 means that the word
Drain plug is mentioned on pages 14 and 15 in chapter 6.4.
Most words in chapters 7 and 8 are excluded since these
chapters are modular and their contents vary.
A D
Accessories 3-2 Damper 2-7
Actuator 2-7 Data plate 7-1
Adjuster 6.4-7 Data sheet 2-6, 2-7, 3-1,7-1
Adjuster screw 6,4-12 De-aeration 6.4-1, 6.4-3, 6.4-13
Adjuster slot 6.4-7 Delivery note 7-2
Digital encoder 6.4-1, 6.4-10
B Directional valve 2-5
Beam tunnel 6.1-6 Drain plug 6.4-12, 6.4-13
Beam unit 6.4-6 Draw bar 6.4-14
Bearing beams 6.1-2, 6.1-4
Bearing covers 6.4-6 E
Bearings 6.4-8 EC-Directive 3-3
Bell-housing 6.4-11 E-commerce website 7.1-1
Blocking circuit 6.5-3 Electric motor 6.4-1, 6.4-11
Blocking piece 4-2 Electrical cabinet 2-1, 2-5, 4-1, 6.4-10
Bottom rails 6.1-2, 6.1-4 Electrical protection 3-1
Breather bag 3-2 Electrical system 2-5
Bromma Hotline 7-1 Encoder 2-5, 6.4-10
End beam 2-1, 2-5
C Endless chain 2-3
Cable chain 6.4-1, 6.4-10
Cable clamp 6.4-10 F
Cable holder 6.4-10 Filler cap 6.4-13
Center twistlock housings 4-2, 5-1 Filter 6.4-13
Chain 6.1-7 Filter insert 6.4-13
Chain locks 6.4-7 Fixed guide arms 2-6
Chain lubricant 6.1-5, 6.1-7 Flag 6.4-3
Chain wheel 6.4-8 Flipper arm attachment 6.4-4
Claw wrench 4-2 Flipper arm gearbox 6.1-7, 6.4-4
Colour coded 5-2 Flipper arms 2-1, 2-5, 2-6, 5-2, 6.4-1
Cones 5-1 Flipper arms a 6.4-3, 6.4-4, 6.4-13
Container crane 4-1 Floating mechanism 6.1-2
Container range 3-1 Flow meter 4-2
Control supply 4-1, 4-3 Flow rate 6.5-1
Corner rollers 3-2 Flow regulator 6.4-12
Corrosion protection 3-1 Forklift truck 6.4-6
Counter balance valve 2-3
Crane cab control panel 2-5, 4-1
Crane connector 4-1
Crane controls 5-1
Cross bar 6.4-10
Cylinder coupling 6.4-15

10-1- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

G
Land side 5-2
Gear lubricant 6.1-5
Lubrication instruction 6.1-5
Gearbox 2-7, 6.4-4, 6.4-8
Leakage hose 6.4-12
Gearbox fitting screws 6.4-8
Limit switches 6.4-3
General funktion 2-1
Lower glide plater 6.4-6
Glide plates 2-3, 6.1-4, 6.4-1,6.4-6
Loctite 6.4-6
Glide plates a 6.4-14
Landing buffer 6.4-6, 6.4-14
Gravity point 5-1
Lock rings 6.4-8
Grease 6.1-5
Landing switches 6.5-3
Grease fitting 6.1-7, 6.4-8
Guide arm indicator 3-2
Guide arms 2-5, 2-7 M
Guide block 6.4-2, 6.4-16 Mandatory symbol 1-1
Main electrical box 4-1
H Main frame (Main beam) 2-1, 2-5, 4-1, 6.1-6,
Main frame (Main beam)a 6.1-8, 6.4-14
Hydraulic pump 6.4-1, 6.4-12
Maintenance actions 6.1-4
Hydraulic motor 6.4-4, 6.4-8
Maintenance information 1-1
Hydraulic pump pressure 6.1-2
Maneuver panel (Control p.) 3-2
Hydraulic tank 6.1-2
Manifold block 6.4-10
Hydraulic system 2-2, 2-5, 6.1-4
Manifold couplings 6.4-10
Headblock 2-5, 4-1, 4-3
Manually operated 2-5, 4-2
Hand pump 3-2
Modular system 2-6
Humidity 6.1-2
Moored ship 5-1
Height 3-1
Motor flange 6.4-11
Hose connections 6.1-2
Motor heater 3-2
High temp indicator 3-2
Motor lead wires 4-1
Housing 6.4-10
Motor rotation 4-1,4-3
Hour counter 3-2
Motor screw 6.4-4
Hose couplings 6.4-10
HIS Height indication system 3-2
Hub 6.4-1 N
Non-containerized cargo 2-3
I
Indicator lamps 3-2 O
INRS Impact noise red. syst. 2-5 Oil and filters 6.4-1, 6.4-13
Oil filling hole 6.4-13
J Oil level 2-5, 4-1
Operating movements 3-1
Junction box 2-5, 6.4-10, 6.4-15
Operating voltage 3-1
Operator information 1-1
K Over centre valves 2-2
key 6.4-4, 6.4-8 Overheight extension legs 2-3

L P
Lifting lugs 2-3 Password 7-1
Landing pin 2-4, 4-2 Pedestal bearing 6.1-7, 6.4-1, 6.4-8
Lifting capacity 3-1 Penetrating fluid 6.1-3
Landing pin bypass 3-2 Plastic bag 6.4-3, 6.4-4
Low level indicator 3-2 Position sensors 6.4-1, 6.4-2, 6.4-9
Low pressure indicator 3-2 Power consumption 3-1
Lubricate 4-1, 4-3, 6.1-2, 6.1-3 Power pack 2-1, 2-7, 6.1-10

Bromma Conquip 10-2- Oct. 02 rev.00

 Bromma Group Manual

Power pack cover 6.4-11 Split cotters 6.4-3, 6.4-7

Power supply 6.1-2, 6.4-1, 6.4-10 Spreader bar 6.1-1
Pressure filter 6.4-13 Spreader type 3-1
Pressure gauge 4-2, 6.4-12, 6.4-13 Spring Washer 2-4
Pressure test point 6.4-12 Stop screw 6.4-10
Product responsibility dir. 3-3 Symbols 1-1
Prohibitory symbol 1-1
Protection plate 6.4-9 T
Proximity switches 2-4, 2-5 Tank 2-2
Pulpit on wheel 3-2 Tank capacity 3-1
Pulse encoder 2-4 Telescopic beam unit 2-1, 2-3, 6.1-6, 6.1-9,
Pump drain line 6.5-1 Telescopic beam unit a 6.4-1, 6.4-6, 6.4-14
Pump suction line 6.5-1 Telescopic chain 2-4, 6.1-2, 6.4-1,
Telescopic chain a 6.4-7, 6.4-8
R Telescopic drive 6.1-10
Rail mounted gantry spr. 2-6 Telescopic motor 4-2, 6.1-7,6.4-1, 6.4-8
Receptacle 4-1, 4-3 Telescopic system 2-1, 2-3
Reduction gearbox 2-3 Tension rods 2-4, 6.4-10
Registered user 7.1 Test adapter 2-2
Retractable guide arms 2-5 Ties 6.1-2
Return line filter 6.4-13 Timer 6.5-3
Return number 7-2 Torque wrench 6.1-8, 6.4-7
Return parts 7-2 Trestles 4-1, 6.4-1
Robalon pad 6.4-6 Triangle symbol 1-1
Roller attachment 6.1-2 TTDS 3-2
Rubber gear ring 6.4-11 Twin lift 2-6
Twin lift spreaders 5-1
S Twinlift box 6.4-15
Sensor 6.4-3, 6.4-16 Twinlift cylinder 6.4-15
Sensor plate 6.4-9 Twinlift unit twistlocks 6.4-1, 6.4-16
Sensor plug 6.4-9 Twinlift units 6.4-1, 6.4-15
Separating inner attachment 2-6 Twistlock 2-1, 2-2, 2-4, 6.1-3,
Serial no. 7-1 Twistlock a 6.1-4, 6.1-6, 6.1-9,6.4-1
Service notes 4-3, 6.1-4, 9.1 Twistlock assy floating 2-7
Service panel 3-2, 4-1, 4-3 Twistlock cylinder 6.4-2, 6.4-3
Shaft coupling 6.4-11 Twistlock function 5-1
Ship to shore 2-6 Twistlock head 6.4-2
Shock absorbers 2-4 Twistlock housing 2-4, 4-2
Shock relief valves 2-2, 2-5 Twistlock nut 6.4-2
Sight glass 4-1 Twistlock pin 6.1-2, 6.1-3, 6.4-2, 6.4-16
Signal lamps 2-5, 5-1
Slide rails 4-1 U
Solenoid coils 6.5-2 Upper glide plates 6.4-6
Solenoid valves 2-2, 2-5, 4-2 User ID 7-1
Solid flipper arms 2-7
Space heater 3-2 W
Spacer rings 6.4-3 Water side 5-2
Spherical bearing 6.1-6 Weight 3-1
Spherical washer 6.1-3, 6.4-2 Working pressure 3-1, 6.5-2
Split collar twistlocks 3-2
Y
Yard crane spreader 2-5, 2-6, 2-7

10-3- Oct. 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

 Bromma Group Manual

 Bromma Conquip AB 2002

Stockholm 2002

Bromma Conquip 10-4- Oct. 02 rev.00